SUBARU 2021 Subaru Outback Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for SUBARU models including: 2021 Subaru Outback

2021 Subaru Outback owners manual - OwnersMan

Not Your Device? Search For Manuals / Datasheets:

File Info : application/pdf, 592 Pages, 13.94MB

2021-Subaru-Outback

FFoorewroerdword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner's Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner's Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer. The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owner's Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle. Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
"SUBARU" and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*C Copyright 2020 SUBARU CORPORATION

This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) Legacy 2) Outback

Table of Contents

Introduction ....................................................................................................................1 Illustrated Index ...........................................................................................................13 Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags ..............................................................................27 Keys and Doors .........................................................................................................113 Instruments and Controls....................................................................................... 165 Climate Control ......................................................................................................... 277 Audio ........................................................................................................................... 297 Interior Equipment ................................................................................................... 301 Starting and Operating............................................................................................ 323 Driving Tips ............................................................................................................... 417 In Case of Emergency ............................................................................................. 447 Appearance Care ...................................................................................................... 473 Maintenance and Service ....................................................................................... 481 Specifications............................................................................................................ 529 Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects .................................... 549 Index ............................................................................................................................ 567

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14

* Warranties ..............................s.in.t........................... 2 Warranties for U.S.A. ............................................. 2 Warranties for Canada ........................................... 2 Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada ............... 2
* How to Use This Owner's Manual ..................... 2 Using Your Owner's Manual ................................... 2 Safety Warnings .................................................... 3 Safety Symbol ....................................................... 4 Abbreviation List ................................................... 4
* Vehicle Symbols ................................................. 5 * Safety Precautions When Driving ..................... 5
Seatbelt and SRS Airbag........................................ 5 Child Safety........................................................... 5 Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide) ................ 6 Drinking and Driving.............................................. 7

Introduction
Drugs and Driving ................................................. 7 Driving When Tired or Sleepy ................................ 8 Modification of Your Vehicle .................................. 8 Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving ................. 8 Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation
System ............................................................... 8 Driving with Pets................................................... 8 Tire Pressures....................................................... 9 On-Road and Off-Road Driving .............................. 9 Attaching Accessories .......................................... 9 * General Information ......................................... 10 California Perchlorate Advisory ............................10 Noise from under the Vehicle ...............................10 Event Data Recorder ............................................10

Introduction

Warranties

Warranties
s00aa
& Warranties for U.S.A.
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subasr0u0aao01f America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranties . Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties . California Emissions Control Systems Warranties
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Susb00aaar0u5 Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties: . SUBARU Limited Warranty . Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Service Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A. and Canada
All warranty information, including des0t0aaial0s6 of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Read these warranties carefully.

How to Use This Owner's Manual
s00ab
& Using Your Owner's Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, cares0f0ualbl0y1 read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.
Introduction This chapter informs you general information before driving.
Illustrated Index This chapter informs you about the vehicle layout with illustrations.
Chapter 1: Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and Doors This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.

Introduction

How to Use This Owner's Manual

Chapter 3: Instruments and Controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior Equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and Operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving Tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of Emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance Care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and Service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications This chapter informs you about the dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects This chapter informs you about Tire information, Uniform tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index This is an alphabetical listing of all that's in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
For EyeSight system: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

& Safety Warnings
You will find a number of WARNINs0G0abs02, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others. Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your vehicle.

CONTINUED

How to Use This Owner's Manual

& Safety Symbol

s00ab03

You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen", depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation List
You may find several abbreviations ins0t0habi0s4 manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation

Meaning

ABS

Anti-lock brake system

A/C

Air conditioner

AKI

Anti knock index

ALR

Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/ Emergency locking retractor

AVH

Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD

All-wheel drive

BSD

Blind Spot Detection

CVT

Continuously variable transmission

DRL

Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distribution

ELR

Emergency locking retractor

GAW

Gross axle weight

GAWR

Gross axle weight rating

GPS

Global positioning system

GVW

Gross vehicle weight

GVWR

Gross vehicle weight rating

INT

Intermittent

Abbreviation LATCH LCA LED MIL MMT OBD RAB RCTA RON SI-DRIVE SRH
SRS TIN TPMS

Meaning Lower anchors and tethers for children Lane Change Assist Light emitting diode Malfunction indicator light Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl On-board diagnostics Reverse Automatic Braking system Rear Cross Traffic Alert Research octane number SUBARU Intelligent Drive Steering Responsive Headlight Supplemental restraint system Tire identification number Tire pressure monitoring system

Vehicle Symbols

Introduction

Vehicle Symbols

s00ac

There are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to "Warning and Indicator Lights" FP24.

Mark

Name

WARNING

CAUTION Read these instructions carefully Wear eye protection Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety Precautions When Driving
s00ad
& Seatbelt and SRS Airbag s00ad01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
. To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" FP46.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)" FP77.

& Child Safety WARNING

s00ad02

. Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passen-

CONTINUED

Safety Precautions When Driving

ger and objects inside the vehicle. . While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be seated in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. . Place children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. . Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to "Child Safety Locks" FP145. . Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to "Windows" FP145. . Never leave unattended children, adults or animals in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them. . Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny

days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small children. . When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections. . For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" FP46. . For the child restraint system, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" FP58. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)" FP77.
& Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)
s00ad03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Safety Precautions When Driving

Introduction

. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and Driving WARNING

s00ad04

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the severity of that injury. Please don't drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and Driving WARNING

s00ad05

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers' and other persons' risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

CONTINUED

Safety Precautions When Driving

& Driving When Tired or Sleepy s00ad06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers' and other persons' chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving with others.
& Modification of Your Vehicle s00ad07
WARNING
Do not remove the genuine SUBARU navigation and/or audio system. Doing so could cause the following functions to be inoperable. . Combination meter display (color
LCD) . Rear view image and help lines

. Vehicle settings . Climate control . Front seat heater and ventilation . Clock
CAUTION Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.
& Use of Cell Phones/Texting and Driving
s00ad16
CAUTION Do not talk on a cell phone or text while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and lead to an accident. If you use a cell phone to talk or text, first pull off the road and park in a safe place. In some States/ Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the phone is hands-free.
& Driving Vehicles Equipped with Navigation System
s00ad09
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the navigation system, first take the vehicle off the road and stop it in a safe location.
& Driving with Pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with sy00oadu1r0 driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your passengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness

which can be secured to the rear seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier's handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger's seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.
& Tire Pressures
Check and, if necessary, adjust the ps0r0eads1-1 sure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. For detailed information, refer to "Tires and Wheels" FP502.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an accident.

& On-Road and Off-Road Driving
This vehicle is classified as a utility vehs0ic0alde13. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to "Off Road Driving" FP422.

& Attaching Accessories WARNING

s00ad15

. Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stickers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.

Safety Precautions When Driving

. If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.

Introduction

10 General Information

General Information
s00ak
& California Perchlorate Advisory
Certain vehicle components such ass00aakir0-3 bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the Vehicle

NOTE

s00ak01

You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

& Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an eventsd00aakt0a4 recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

* Exterior .............................................................. 14 * Interior .....................................s.ill......................... 16 * Instrument Panel............................................... 19 * Steering Wheel.................................................. 20 * Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/
Switches .......................................................... 21

Illustrated Index
* Combination Meter ........................................... 22 U.S.-Spec. Models ................................................22
Except U.S.-Spec. Models.....................................23 1
* Warning and Indicator Lights.......................... 24

Illustrated Index

14 Exterior
Exterior
s00ay

1) Engine hood (page 487) 2) Headlights (page 248, 518) 3) Turn signal lights (page 256, 518) 4) Windshield wipers (page 258) 5) Moonroof (page 161) 6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars (page
432) 7) Door locks (page 137) 8) Outside mirrors (page 271) 9) Tire pressure (page 504) 10) Flat tires (page 452) 11) Fog lights (page 256, 518) 12) Tie-down hooks (page 461) 13) Towing hook (Outback) (page 461)

Exterior 15

1) Rear window defogger (page 261)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 328)

3) Child safety locks (page 145)

Illustrated Index

4) Tie-down holes (page 461)

5) Lights (page 248, 518)

6) Turn signal lights (page 256, 518)

7) Trunk lid (page 148)

8) Rear gate (page 151)

9) Rear window wiper (page 260)

10) Towing hook (page 461)

16 Interior
Interior
s00az

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 69) · U.S.-spec. models: 5 lower anchorages · Except U.S.-spec. models: 4 lower anchorages
2) Seatbelts (page 46) 3) Center console (page 305) 4) Accessory power outlet (page 308) 5) Front seats (page 28) 6) Rear seats (page 40)

Interior 17

1) Cup holder (page 306)

2) Select lever (page 348)

3) Accessory power outlet (page 308)

Illustrated Index

4) Glove box (page 305)

5) Dual 7.0-inch display models*1 (page 232)/Climate control (page 279)/Audio*2

6) 11.6-inch display models*1 (page 211)/ Climate control (page 282)/Audio*2/Navigation system*2

7) Rear seat heater switches (page 39)

8) USB power supply (page 310)

*1: Center information display

*2: For details about how to use the audio and navigation system (if equipped), refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

CONTINUED

18 Interior

1) Moonroof switch (page 161) 2) Door interlock switch (page 302) 3) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK 4) Map light switches (page 302)
NOTE
For models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK.

Instrument Panel
s00ba

Instrument Panel 19
1
1) Power window switches (page 145) 2) Remote control mirror switch (page 271) 3) Seat position memory buttons (page 33) 4) Combination meter (page 173) 5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
172) 6) Camera for Driver Monitoring System
(page 404) 7) Front view monitor switch (page 377) 8) Electronic parking brake switch (page
366) 9) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 274) 10) Hood release knob (page 487) 11) Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch
(page 160) 12) Illumination brightness control dial (page
175) 13) Trunk lid opener button (page 149)/
Power rear gate button (page 152)

Illustrated Index

20 Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel
s00bb

1) Audio control switches*1 2) Talk switch for voice command system*1 3) Cruise control switches*2 4) Shift paddles (page 351) 5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 353) 6) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
275) 7) SRS airbag (page 77) 8) Horn (page 276) 9) Control switches for combination meter
display (color LCD) (page 202) 10) Hands-free phone switches*1
*1: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
s00bc

21 Light Control and Wiper Control Levers/Switches
1
1) Windshield wiper (page 257) 2) Mist (page 258) 3) Windshield washer (page 259) 4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 260) 5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 259) 6) Wiper control lever (page 258) 7) Light control switch (page 248) 8) Front fog light switch (page 256) 9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 248) 10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 250) 11) Turn signal lever (page 256)

Illustrated Index

22 Combination Meter
Combination Meter & U.S.-Spec. Models

s00bd s00bd01

1) Tachometer (page 173) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
197) 3) Combination meter display (color LCD)
(page 201) 4) Trip meter and odometer (page 173) 5) Speedometer (page 173) 6) Fuel gauge (page 174) 7) Digital speed screen (page 208) 8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
175)

& Except U.S.-Spec. Models s00bd02

Combination Meter 23

1) Tachometer (page 173)

Illustrated Index

2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page

197)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 201)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 173)

5) Speedometer (page 173)

6) Fuel gauge (page 174)

7) Digital speed screen (page 208)

8) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

175)

24 Warning and Indicator Lights

Warning and Indicator Lights s00be

Mark

Name

Page

Mark

Seatbelt warning light 177

Front passenger's seatbelt warning light

177

Rear seatbelt warning light

179

SRS airbag system warning light

181

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- 182 dicator light

Charge warning light 183

Oil pressure warning light

183

Engine low oil level warning indicator

183

AT OIL TEMP warning light

184

ABS warning light

185

Name Brake system warning light

Page 186

Electronic parking brake indicator light

187

Door open indicator

189

Engine hood open warning light

189

Low fuel warning light 189

All-Wheel Drive warning light

189

Power steering warning light

189

Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light

188

Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light

188

Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control

190

operation indicator light

Mark

Name

Page

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

191

Access key warning indicator (if equipped)

191

Security indicator light 196

Turn signal indicator lights

197

High beam indicator light

197

High beam assist indicator

197

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning 198 light

LED headlight warning light

198

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator 198 light

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light

198

Mark

Name

Page

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)

198

X-MODE indicator (Outback)

199

Hill descent control indicator (Outback)

199

Headlight indicator light 198

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light (U.S.-spec.

184

models)

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator 181 light

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator 181 light

Windshield washer fluid warning light

189

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light

198

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)

199

Mark

Name

Page

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)

198

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator 199 light

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)

199

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)

199

Intelligent (I) mode indicator (if equipped)

197

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator (if equipped)

197

Icy road surface warning indicator

200

RAB warning indicator (if equipped)

200

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)

200

Sonar audible alarm

OFF indicator (if

201

equipped)

Warning and Indicator Lights 25

Mark

Name

Page

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator light (green) (if

200

equipped)

Illustrated Index

Driver Monitoring System warning light (yel- 200 low) (if equipped)

Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light 200 (if equipped)

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop indicator light (if

200

equipped)

1-1. Front Seats........................................................ 28 Manual Seat (If Equipped) .........s.0.1..........................31 Power Seat (If Equipped) ......................................32 Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................37
1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped) ................................. 38 Front Seat Heater .................................................39 Rear Seat Heater...................................................39
1-3. Seat Ventilation (If Equipped) .......................... 40 1-4. Rear Seats ......................................................... 40
Reclining the Seatback (Outback) .........................41 Folding Down the Rear Seatback ..........................42 Head Restraint Adjustment ...................................44 Armrest ................................................................46 1-5. Seatbelts............................................................ 46 Seatbelt Safety Tips..............................................46
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................47 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ...........................................48 Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ........................48 Fastening the Seatbelt ..........................................48 Seatbelt Maintenance............................................54
1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners ..................................... 55 Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt Pretensioner ..............55 Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt and Lap Belt Pretensioners .....................................................56
System Monitors...................................................57 System Servicing..................................................57 Precautions against Vehicle Modification ..............57 1-7. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 58

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags
1-8. Child Restraint Systems .................................. 58 Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems ............................................................. 60 Where to Place a Child Restraint System..............61
Choosing a Child Restraint System ......................63 1
Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt .............................................................63
Installing a Booster Seat ......................................68 Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use
of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH) ..........69 Top Tether Anchorages ........................................74 1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System Airbag)............................................... 77 General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System ..............................................................77 General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System for Accessories and Any Objects ...........79 General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag
System and Children ..........................................81 Components ........................................................84 SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS
Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ............................................86 SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag ........... 100 SRS Airbag System Monitors ............................. 107 SRS Airbag System Servicing ............................ 108 Precautions against Vehicle Modification............ 109 How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer concerning Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced Airbag System ................................................. 110

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

28 Front Seats
1-1. Front Seats
s01aa
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driving, as personal injury or loss of vehicle control may occur.
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure nothing is blocking the adjusting mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to ensure the seat is securely locked. If it is not, it may move suddenly or the seatbelt may not operate properly.
. Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with front seat locking mechanism and cause an accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should always be used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not in the upright position and a collision occurs, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death. . The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not sitting back and upright when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

cure ALL types of child systems in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" FP58.

WARNING To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seatback. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

Front Seats 29
1
WARNING Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may lead to detective operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury. . Occupant detection system . SRS side airbag . SRS seat cushion airbag . Front seat heater (if equipped) . Front seat ventilation (if
equipped) . Power seat (if equipped)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

CONTINUED

30 Front Seats

WARNING Do not press your feet onto the instrument panel. Doing so may prevent the occupant detection function of the SRS airbag system from functioning correctly, and may result in serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

WARNING Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

& Manual Seat (If Equipped) s01aa01
! Forward and backward adjustment s01aa0101

! Reclining the seatback

Front Seats 31

s01aa0102

! Seat cushion height adjustment (driver's seat)
s01aa0103

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to the desired position, and then release the lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely locked into place.

1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when pulling up the lever. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

1) Push the lever down to lower the seat. 2) Pull the lever up to raise the seat.
You can adjust the height of the seat by moving the seat cushion adjustment lever up or down.

CONTINUED

32 Front Seats
& Power Seat (If Equipped) s01aa02
! Driver's seat s01aa0208
1) Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat cushion height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.
3) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch. To decrease lower back support, push the rear side of the switch.

! Front passenger's seat (if equipped) s01aa0209
1) Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.
3) Seat height control switch To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

Front Seats 33

! Thigh extension (driver's seat if equipped)
s01aa0210
CAUTION When the thigh extension is pulled out to its fullest, do not put weight on the top of it. Doing so could break the part.
The seat front length can be adjusted. Pull up the lever "1" to adjust the length and release the lever to lock it.

! Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function (if equipped)
s01aa0207
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or personal injury, never perform the following operations while driving. Adjusting the seat Selecting a registered seat position
. Before adjusting the seat or selecting a registered seat position, make sure that cargo or the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
. The memory adjustment of the seat position is finished. Be sure to confirm that the select lever is in the "P" position, and the parking brake is applied, when adjusting the seat position. Do not drive until the utilizing of the seat position is complete.
. When any unusual conditions or malfunctions occur during the memory adjustment of the seat position, stop the memory ad-

justment of the seat position by performing any of the following procedures.

Operate any of the power seat switches.

Press the "SET" button.

Press button "1" or "2".

Operate the outside mirror control switch.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

Register the seat position with button "1" or "2" or each of the key fobs.
The following memory positions can be registered. . Forward/backward position of the seat . Angle of the seatback . Angle of the seat cushion . Height of the seat . Angle of the outside mirrors . Angle of the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side when the reverse tiltdown operates.
NOTE
The seat position can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227.
CONTINUED

34 Front Seats

! Registration of memory position with button "1" or "2"
s01aa020701
1. Adjust the seat and outside mirror positions under the following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied. . The ignition switch is in the "ON" position. . The select lever is in the "P" position.
2. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.
. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds. . While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.
NOTE
If a new position is registered for the same button, the previously registered memory position is deleted.
! Registration of the reverse tiltdown mirror angle with button "1" or "2"
s01aa020706
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.
1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will move to the reverse tilt-down position. 2. Adjust the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" FP271. 3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position. 4. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.

. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds. . While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.
NOTE
. Approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position other than "R" position. . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the front passenger's side mirror. The setting of the driver's side mirror operation can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Registration of memory position with a access key fob (if equipped)
s01aa020703
1. Adjust the memory position under the following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied. . The ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position. . The select lever is in the "P" position.

Front Seats 35

2. Hold the access key fob and press and hold the "SET" button. Then press the " " button of the access key fob.
A chirp will sound once, and the memory position is registered.
NOTE
When registering the seat position, carry the access key that you want to register with you. If you are carrying 2 or more access keys, registration may not be possible.

! Registration of the reverse tiltdown mirror angle with the key fob
s01aa020707
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.
1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle will move to the reverse tilt-down position. 2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" FP271. 3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF"/ "LOCK" position. 5. Hold the access key fob and press and hold the "SET" button, then press the " " button of the access key fob. A chirp will sound once, and the reverse tilt-down mirror angle will be registered.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

NOTE

. Approximately 9 seconds after the

select lever is moved to any position

other than "R" position. . The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as the front

passenger's side mirror. The setting of

the driver's side mirror operation can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

. The system stores the adjusted

mirror angle for approximately 45 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned

to the "OFF" position. Register the

mirror angle while the memory function

is available.

! Utilizing of memory position registered with button "1" or "2"
s01aa020702

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to retrieve your registered memory position. If the seat position is not optimum for you, it may adversely affect your driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

CONTINUED

36 Front Seats

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. 2. Put the select lever is in the "P" position and apply the parking brake. Then press button "1" or "2".
A chirp will sound and the seat and angle of the outside mirrors moves to the registered position. When the select lever is moved to the "R" position, the outside mirror will move to the registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the registered memory position data will not be deleted. . When the button "1" or "2" is pressed within 45 seconds after the

driver's door is opened, the registered memory position can be retrieved even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK" or "OFF" position. . If buttons "1" and "2" are pressed at the same time, execution of seat position retrieval may not be possible. . When the retrieved position is the same as the current seat position, a chirp will sound twice.
! Utilizing of the seat position registered with access key fob
s01aa020704
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
2. Unlock the driver's door by pressing the " " button or gripping the door handle. 3. Open the driver's door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the registered position.
When the select lever is moved to the "R" position, the outside mirror will move to the registered reverse tilt-down position.
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following procedures.
(1) Press the "SET" button on the driver's door. (2) Press the " " button on the access key fob or touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors. (3) Perform the prior procedures again. . If the keyless access function is disabled, the seat position cannot be retrieved by gripping the driver's door handle. However, the seat position can still be retrieved by pressing the " " button on the access key fob. For information about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to "Disabling Keyless Access Function" FP127. . If a new position is registered for the same access key fob, the previously registered seat position is deleted.

Front Seats 37

. If you are carrying 2 or more access keys, seat position retrieval may not be possible.
! Clearing the registered seat position with access key fob
s01aa020705
1. Close the driver's door. 2. While holding the access key fob and pressing the "SET" button, press the " " button on the access key fob.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat position will be cleared.
NOTE
After deleting the seat position, wait for a few moments before registering a new seat position.
& Head Restraint Adjustment s01aa04
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints backwards. Doing so will prevent the head restraints from functioning as intended. Therefore, when the

head restraints are removed, all head restraints must be reinstalled properly to protect vehicle occupants. . The vehicle should not be operated until the head restraints are installed in their proper positions. . The front seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the front seats only. The rear seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do not attempt to install the front seat head restraints into the rear seats, or the rear seat head restraints into the front seats.
Both the driver's seat and front passenger's seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.

! Head restraint height adjustment s01aa0401
1
1) Head restraint 2) Release button To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

38 Seat Heater

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.
NOTE
It is not possible to remove or install the head restraint without reclining the front seatback. Reclining the front seatback and then remove or install the head restraint.

! Head restraint angle adjustment s01aa0402
The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintaining a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible. To tilt: Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked. To return: Tilt the head restraint once as far forward as it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

1-2. Seat Heater (If Equipped)
s01ab
The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
. People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
. Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not

Seat Heater 39

running can cause battery discharge. . When using for a long period of time, we recommend setting the heater to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick heating at the start of the function usage.

& Front Seat Heater
Adjust the front seat heater function ons01tahb0e5 center information display. Refer to "Front Seat Heater" FP290.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

& Rear Seat Heater CAUTION

s01ab06

Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the rear seat heater switch. There is the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

Rear seat heater switches 1) Front passenger's side 2) Indicator lights 3) Driver's side Press the rear seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.
HIGH: 2 indicator lights are illuminated. LOW: 1 indicator light is illuminated. OFF: All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting "HIGH" mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker.

NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches retain the previous switch position

even if the vehicle has restarted. The

rear seat switch will reset.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

40 Seat Ventilation

1-3. Seat Ventilation (If Equipped)
s01ar
The seat ventilation are equipped in the front seats.
The seat ventilation operate when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
. When cleaning the seat, do not use organic solvents, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
. If water or liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth immediately.
NOTE
. Use of the seat ventilation for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge. . The seat ventilation function cannot be used simultaneously with the front seat heater.

. When using for a long period of time, we recommend setting the seat ventilation to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick cooling at the start of the function usage.
Adjust the seat ventilation function on the center information display. Refer to "Front Seat Ventilation" FP290.

1-4. Rear Seats
s01ac
WARNING Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. Do not place cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

& Reclining the Seatback (Outback)
s01ac06

Rear Seats 41

cargo area cover when rear seat is reclined.

. Move the front cover of the cargo

area cover backward so that the cover is not damaged by the

reclined seatback. Refer to "Lift-

ing Cargo Cover (Outback If

Equipped)" FP314.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback as it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

WARNING To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event of a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION If the vehicle is equipped with a cargo area cover, observe the following precautions. . Make sure hands are not pinched
between the headrest and the

Adjust the seatback to the desired position while pulling the lever. After adjusting the seatback, release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.
CONTINUED

42 Rear Seats
& Folding Down the Rear Seatback
s01ac02
WARNING . When folding down the seatback,
check that there are no passengers or objects on the rear seat. Not doing so creates a risk of injury or property damage. . Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback or in the cargo area or trunk. Doing so may result in serious injury or death. . Secure all objects and especially long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden steering maneuver or acceleration. . When you return the seatback to its original position, shake it slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If it is not securely fixed in place, it may suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, both could cause serious injury or death.

1) Striker
WARNING When the seatback is returned to its original position, observe the fol-

lowing precautions. Failure to do so may lead to serious injury or an accident because the proper seatbelt operation will be affected. . The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it should be fully visible. . The seatbelt should not pass behind the striker for the seatback.
CAUTION For Outback, the rear seatback may fold down quickly due to the internal spring. Hold the seatback while pulling the release lever to slow it down.

! Folding down the rear seatback (Legacy)
s01ac0201

of the following procedures and then fold the seatback down. . Push the release button. . Pull the release lever.
! Folding down the rear seatback (Outback)
s01ac0202

Rear Seats 43 1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

Release button

Release lever
Folding the seatback by performing either of the following procedures. . Push the release button. . Pull the release lever.

1) Release lever (if equipped) Unlock the seatback by performing either

CONTINUED

44 Rear Seats
! Return the rear seatback

s01ac0204

the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area, which could cause serious injury or death.

WARNING
When returning the seatback to its original position, observe the following precaution. Failure to do so may damage the seatbelt, and possibly result in a serious injury. . Pull the seatbelt out towards the
vehicle exterior so that it will not be caught between the seatback and the trim.

Lock release button 1) Unlocked 2) Locked A) Unlocking marker in red
To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place and ensure that the unlocking marker on the lock release button is no longer visible.
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its original position, check that the unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. Also, shake the seatback slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If the seatback is not securely in place, the seatback may suddenly fold down in

& Head Restraint Adjustment
Both the rear window side seats ands01tahc0e3 rear center seat are equipped with head restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Therefore, when you remove the head restraints, you must reinstall all head restraints to protect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the

Rear Seats 45

front seats only. The rear seat head restraints are designed to be installed into the rear seats only. Do not attempt to install the front seat head restraints into the rear seats, or the rear seat head restraints into the front seats. ! Rear window side seating position
s01ac0301

To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.
To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower the head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

move or install the head restraint.

! Rear center seating position s01ac0302

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used in the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

1) Head restraint 2) Release button
To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove or install the head restraint without folding down the rear seatback. Fold down the rear seatback and then re-

1) When not used (retracted position) 2) When used (extended position)
CONTINUED

46 Seatbelts

1) Head restraint 2) Release button
To raise: Pull the head restraint up. To lower: Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback. To remove: While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint. To install: Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks.
When the rear center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

& Armrest

s01ac01

To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest's top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury and vehicle damage, passengers must never sit on the center armrest.

1-5. Seatbelts & Seatbelt Safety Tips
WARNING

s01ae s01ae01

. All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
. All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.

. Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint systems in the REAR seats at all times. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating

Seatbelts 47

positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" FP58.
This vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record the use of the seatbelt by the front passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is sus0it1aaeb01l0e1 for this vehicle. Refer to "Child Restraint Systems" FP58.
! Children If a child is too big for a child ress0t1raae0i1n02t system, the child should sit in the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the child's

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child's

arm or behind the child's back.

! Expectant mothers

s01ae0103

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The driver's seatbelt has an Emergse0n1ace0y2 Locking Retractor (ELR). The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor
CONTINUED

48 Seatbelts

locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)
Each passenger's seatbelt has an As0u1ateo0-3 matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ ELR has an additional locking mode, "Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode", intended to secure a child restraint system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

For instructions on how to install the child restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to "Installing Child Restraint Systems with ALR/ELR Seatbelt" FP63.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor is restored to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s01ae04

Refer to "Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime" FP177.

& Fastening the Seatbelt WARNING

s01ae06

. Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death. . Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

Seatbelts 49

WARNING Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.

! Front seatbelts 1. Adjust the seat position:

s01ae0601

Driver's seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger's seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

1
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt. 6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.
CONTINUED

50 Seatbelts

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
s01ae060101
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck. To raise: Push and hold the upper part of the anchor and slide the anchor up. To lower: Push and hold the upper part of the anchor and slide the anchor down. Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is locked in place.

WARNING When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt s01ae060102
1) Button 1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt on Outback) 1. Sit well back in the seat.

s01ae0602

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Seatbelts 51

! Unfastening the seatbelt

! Rear center seatbelt on Outback

s01ae060201

s01ae0603

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle. 2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate 2) Anchor tongue plate 3) Anchor buckle 4) Center seatbelt buckle

CONTINUED

52 Seatbelts
WARNING Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the anchor tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

not fastened to the anchor buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
2. Pass the seatbelt through the belt guide.

WARNING Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as a shoulder belt (with the anchor tongue plate

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling. 1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate from the slot in the recess by pulling the anchor tongue plate.
3. Make sure that the " " mark on the anchor tongue plate and the " " mark on the buckle face outwards.

Seatbelts 53
! Unfastening the seatbelt s01ae060301 1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

4. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a click sounds.
. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, give it a strong pull and let it retract slightly, then pull it out slowly again.

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle until it clicks.

1) Button
1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

6. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

CONTINUED

54 Seatbelts

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard pointed object into the slot in the connector (buckle) on the right-hand side and push it in. The anchor tongue plate will then disconnect from the buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess and then insert the anchor tongue plate into the slot.
CAUTION Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit against the trim, causing damage to the trim. . Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly. . Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are neatly stored.

& Seatbelt Maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soaps0a1ane0d7 lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating properly.

Seatbelt Pretensioners 55

1-6. Seatbelt Pretensioners
s01af
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner. . Driver's seatbelt . Front passenger's seatbelt . Rear passenger's seatbelt (windowside)
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be activated in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal and side collision and rollover accident.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to "Seatbelts" FP46.
. Do not modify, remove or strike the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of

seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU dealer. . When discarding seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impacts or in rear impacts. . Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts. . If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge 1
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with seatbelt pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer of the contents in this section.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

Pretensioner

NOTE

s01af01

This section is applicable to the following components.

. Front passenger's seatbelt . Rear passenger's seatbelt (window-

side)

CONTINUED

56 Seatbelt Pretensioners

The pretensioner sensor also serves as follows.
. Front impact sensor
. Side impact sensor
. Front door impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, any seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The rear passenger's seatbelt (windowside) pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision.
The front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision. The adaptive force limiter will select a reducing load to suit the body size of the occupant as detected by the occupant detection system sensors.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

& Seatbelt with Shoulder Belt

and Lap Belt Pretensioners

NOTE

s01af02

This section is applicable to the following components.

. Driver's seatbelt

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter)
2) Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is located at the base of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal collision force is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.
The driver's seatbelt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a reducing load to suit the body size of occupant as detected by the occupant detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

Seatbelt Pretensioners 57

& System Monitors
A diagnostic system continually monsi0to1arf0s3 the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to "SRS Airbag System Monitors" FP107.
& System Servicing s01af04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to "Components" FP84. If you need service or repair in those areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Precautions against Vehicle

Modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer ifs0y1oaf0u5

want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners. . Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end. . Modification of the suspension system or front end structure. . Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.

58 Rear Seat Reminder

1-7. Rear Seat Reminder
s01at
This function prompts the driver to confirm the presence of passengers and cargo in the rear. This function will be activated when the rear doors are opened and closed. It alerts the driver by warning messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps when the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "OFF" position.
NOTE
. This function does not directly detect passengers and cargo in the rear seat. . This function detects the opening and closing of the rear doors. In this

situation, there is the possibility that the following phenomenon may occur.
It may alert the driver even if there are no passengers or cargo in the rear seat. It may not alert the driver even if there are passengers and cargo in the rear seat. . This function can be set to on or off by the "Car settings". For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . The ON/OFF setting will not be changed even if the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position. . The ON/OFF setting will be returned to the default setting if the battery is removed.

1-8. Child Restraint Systems
s01ag
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child's age and size. All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in "Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)" FP69).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraint systems are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

Lock release button 1) Unlocked 2) Locked A) Unlocking marker in red
WARNING
. Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
. Do not leave children in the car unattended. High interior temperatures may cause heat stroke and dehydration that result in serious injury or death.

Child Restraint Systems 59 1
WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap or in his or her arms while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

60 Child Restraint Systems
WARNING Children should be properly restrained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously. Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

& Safety Tips for Installing Child Restraint Systems
s01ag16
WARNING
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a seatbelt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seatbelt will not securely hold the child restraint system. Use of a seatbelt extender could cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
. Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
. Child restraint systems and seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child

in it. . Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

Child Restraint Systems 61

& Where to Place a Child Restraint System
The following descriptions are SUBARs01Uag'0s1 recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING
. Several types of child restraint systems may conceal the buckle of the neighboring seat. If the occupant of the neighboring seat cannot correctly fasten the seatbelt, that person must move to a different seat. If the seatbelt cannot be correctly fastened, there is the risk of serious injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
. If the child restraint system cannot be correctly installed because it contacts the driver's seat, move the child restraint system to a different seat. If it cannot be installed in a different seat (other than the driver's seat), adjust the front seat so that contact does not occur.

A: Front passenger's seat You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passenger's airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating positions Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a 1
bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position (U.S.-spec. models) In this position, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system. . ALR/ELR seatbelts . Lower anchorages (bars) . Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt. The rear center seat includes lower anchorages, and the lower anchorages on the center side of the rear right seat can be used to install a child restraint system. When a child restraint system is installed in the rear center seat using the lower
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

62 Child Restraint Systems

anchorages, do not sit in the rear right seat.
If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child restraint system should be moved to a window seat position of the rear seat.
C: Rear seat, center seating position (other models) In this position, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.
. ALR/ELR seatbelts
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in the rear seat's center seating position, raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat in the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturer's instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you should install the child restraint system in a rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, children can be seriously injured by the airbag. Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint systems in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. According to accident statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. . Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle. . Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).
WARNING . SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-

Child Restraint Systems 63

GER'S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. . Do not allow children to lean their heads or any other parts of their bodies against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy even if children are seated in the child restraint system. It will be dangerous if the SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags inflate. The impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. . To secure the child restraint system, be sure to comply with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. Not doing so could result in death or serious injury to children in a sudden stop or accident.

& Choosing a Child Restraint System
s01ag02
Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the child's age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacture's statement of compliance in the document attached to the system. Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

& Installing Child Restraint

Systems with ALR/ELR Seat-

belt

s01ag04

CAUTION

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

. When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
. When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, set both seatbacks to the original position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained, which may result in death or serious injuries in the event of sudden stop, sudden steering maneuver or an accident.

CONTINUED

64 Child Restraint Systems

! Installing a rearward facing child restraint system
s01ag0401
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

confirm that it is securely locked into place. Check that the red colored unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. For details, refer to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback" FP42.
2. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system in the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to Place a Child Restraint System" FP61.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is recommended by the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to

Child Restraint Systems 65

7. Push and pull the child restraint system forward and side to side to check that it is firmly secured in the center of the seat. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt.
8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

9. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing a forward facing child restraint system
s01ag0402

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.
Check that the red colored unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. For details, refer to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback" FP42.
2. If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details,
CONTINUED

66 Child Restraint Systems

refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
3. For Outback models, adjust the seatback to the upright position. 4. Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child restraint system on the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to Place a Child Restraint System" FP61.

5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
When a child restraint system is installed in the rear center seating position of an Outback, pass the rear center seatbelt through the belt guide properly. For details, refer to "Rear center seatbelt on Outback" FP51.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Child Restraint Systems 67
Tether Anchorages" FP74.
1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

9. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Legacy
Outback 11. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top

12. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position (retracted position). Therefore, when the rear center seat is occupied (including when a child restraint system is installed), be sure to raise the head restraint to the extended position.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the
CONTINUED

68 Child Restraint Systems

seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a Booster Seat s01ag05
WARNING Before installing a booster seat, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result. 1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.
Check that the red colored unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. For details, refer to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback" FP42. 2. If the booster seat makes contact with

the head restraint of the rear seating position where the booster seat with seatback is to be installed, raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the booster seat still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or cargo area (Outback). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.
3. For Outback models, adjust the seatback to the upright position. 4. Place the booster seat in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat. 5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. 6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.
7. To remove the booster seat, press the release button on the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract.
WARNING . Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child. . Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the child's hips. A high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

& Installation of Child Restraint Systems by Use of Lower and Tether Anchorages (LATCH)
s01ag07
! Lower and tether anchorages s01ag0701
Legacy

Child Restraint Systems 69
1
Outback
WARNING . Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents. . When installing a child restraint system using LATCH anchors with the rear seatbelt fastened, ensure that the rear seatbelt does
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

70 Child Restraint Systems

not become caught in the child restraint system or the lower LATCH anchorages.

! Lower anchorages

s01ag070101

NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the rear seats detects if any of the seats are occupied by a passenger. Installing a child restraint system in the rear seating area, using the LATCH anchors, may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to installing the child restraint system will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. For details, refer to "Rear passenger's seats" FP179.
Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with five lower anchorages (bars) (U.S.-spec. models) four lower anchorages (bars) (other models) and three upper anchorages (tether anchorages) for accommodating such child restraint systems.

U.S.-spec. models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).
There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at the rear seat. The rear anchorage from the right side is used for both the right seat and center seat. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

! Tether anchorages

s01ag070102

Child Restraint Systems 71 1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

Other models
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).
Two lower anchorages (bars) are provided for installing a child restraint system on the rear seat window-side seating positions. Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side seating positions may be used for a seat in the center seating position if a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors as far apart as those in this vehicle. Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

Legacy 1) For right seat 2) For center seat 3) For left seat

Outback 1) For left seat 2) For center seat 3) For right seat
The tether anchorages (upper anchorages) are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. For details,
CONTINUED

72 Child Restraint Systems
refer to "Top Tether Anchorages" FP74. ! To install a child restraint system using lower and tether anchorages
s01ag070103
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
1. Move the seatback back and forth to confirm that it is securely locked into place.
Check that the red colored unlocking marker on the lock release button is not visible. For details, refer to "Folding Down the Rear Seatback" FP42.

For U.S.-spec. models

Each lower anchorage is located behind the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.

Other models
2. You will find " " marks at the bottoms of the rear seatback. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).

Peel off the anchorage cover completely from the selected side of the rear seatback to expose the anchorages (bars) to be used for installation of the child restraint

Child Restraint Systems 73

system. If it is hard to install the child restraint system because the anchorage cover returns to the original position, press the anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it is flat. 3. If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head Restraint Adjustment" FP44.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has been removed in the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback). Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

4. For Outback models, adjust the seatback to the upright position.
5. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at " " marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

1
6. If your child restraint system is a flexible attachment type (which uses tether belts), push the child restraint into the seat cushion and pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system by taking up the slack in the belt. 7. Latch the top tether hook onto the tether anchorage that is located on the rear shelf (Legacy)/behind the rear seat (Outback) and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top Tether Anchorages" FP74.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

CONTINUED

74 Child Restraint Systems

8. Before seating a child in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and left and right to verify that it is firmly secured in the center of the seat.
9. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installation.
If you have any question concerning this type of child restraint system, ask your SUBARU dealer.

& Top Tether Anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with threes01taog0p9 tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a top tether whenever one is required or available.

! Tether anchorage location ! Legacy

s01ag0901 s01ag090101

1) For right seat 2) For center seat 3) For left seat

Three tether anchorages are installed on the rear shelf behind the rear seat head restraint. Open the cover flap to use each anchorage.

! Outback

Child Restraint Systems 75

s01ag090102

installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

! To hook the top tether CAUTION

s01ag0902
1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

. Always raise the head restraint when mounting a child restraint system with a top tether. Failure to do so may prevent the top tether from being fastened tightly.
. If the head restraint is removed, store the head restraint in the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback).
. Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

1) For left seat 2) For center seat 3) For right seat
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions, are already

CONTINUED

76 Child Restraint Systems

! Legacy

s01ag090201

anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any questions regarding the installation of a child restraint system.

! Outback

s01ag090202

2. Open the cover flaps to use the anchorages. 3. Pass the top tether between the head restraint and seatback.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint system to the appropriate upper

1) When installing on the window-side seating position
2) When installing on the rear center seating position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed with the seatbelt or lower anchorages. 2. Adjust the seatback to the upright position. 3. Pass the top tether between the head restraint and seatback.

77 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

4. Attach the top tether hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you have any questions regarding the installation of a child restraint system.

1-9. SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
s01ah
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle's seatbelts.
This vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system which consists of eight airbags. The configurations are as follows. . Driver's and front passenger's frontal airbags . Driver's and front passenger's side airbags . Front passenger's seat cushion airbags . Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers) . Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt Pretensioners" FP55.

& General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag System
s01ah10

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS airbag is

designed only to be a supplement

to the primary protection pro-

vided by the seatbelt. It does not

eliminate the need to fasten seat-

belts. In combination with the

seatbelts, it offers the best pro-

tection in case of a serious acci-

dent.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" FP46.

. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also important to wear a seatbelt to

CONTINUED

78 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front passenger should move the seat as far back

WARNING
. Do not sit or lean close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean close to the front or rear door on either side. Do not put body parts out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact, rollover or an offset frontal collision. However, the force of its deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag. . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear seatbelts to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in their proper position. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occupant may suffer minor injury, such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms, because of the SRS airbag deployment force.
WARNING . Keep arms away from either front
door or its internal trim. They could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment. . Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

79 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

& General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag System for Accessories and Any Objects
s01ah13
1

NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable section in this Owner's Manual. . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to "If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident" FP470.

CONTINUED

80 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including straps or cord) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard. These objects could be entangled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal airbag, etc. from operating properly. If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the driver's side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard accessories, or another key. If the SRS knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

WARNING Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle's occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

81 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

tain airbags. Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.

protection available to the driver's seat and front passenger's seat's occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine SUBARU seat

cover exclusively designed for

use with the SRS airbag. Even

when using a genuine SUBARU

seat cover, the SRS side airbag

system may not function nor-

mally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

& General Precautions regarding SRS Airbag System and Children
s01ah14

WARNING Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hook. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deployment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the cur-

WARNING . Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over the driver's seat and front passenger's seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the driver's seat and front passenger's seat surface on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side airbag, reducing

CONTINUED

82 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint systems (including forward facing child restraint system) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, refer to "Child Restraint Systems" FP58.
WARNING NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger's seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

WARNING Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

83 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

facing the side window.

Wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback.

Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of

the window.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/ or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the following. Kneel on any passenger's seat

CONTINUED

84 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

& Components

s01ah11

1) Driver's SRS frontal airbag 2) Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag 3) SRS side airbag 4) SRS curtain airbag

5) SRS seat cushion airbag 6) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.
Driver's SRS frontal airbag: in the center portion of the steering wheel An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located on the pad of the airbag.
Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag: near the top of the dashboard An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located on the right corner of the dashboard.
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each front seat cushion which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat) "SRS AIRBAG" marks are located at the top of each center pillar.
SRS seat cushion airbag: in the center console side of the front passenger's seat cushion that bears an "SRS AIRBAG" label
SRS knee airbag: under the steering column An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the door of the airbag.

85 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

1) Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver's side) 3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger's
side) 4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side) 6) Side airbag module (driver's side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger's
side) 8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)

9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (driver's side)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger's side)

13) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger's

side)

18) Knee airbag module (driver's side)

19) Front passenger's occupant detection

system sensor

20) Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

21) SRS airbag system warning light

22) Side impact sensor (under the rear center

seat)

23) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand

side)

24) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand

side)

25) Seat cushion airbag module (front pas-

senger's side)

26) Lap belt pretensioner (driver's side)

27) Driver's seat position sensor

28) Passenger's seat position sensor

29) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-

ger's side)

30) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver's side)

CONTINUED

86 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

& SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBsA01RahU02 advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver's SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

This vehicle has warning labels on the driver's and front passenger's sun visors beginning with the phrase "EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS" and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase "Even with Advanced Air Bags". Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. All occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.
This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer to "Components" FP84.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy. . SRS frontal airbag for driver . SRS frontal airbag for front passenger . SRS seat cushion airbags for front passenger . SRS curtain airbag*1 . SRS knee airbag for driver
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact to the occupant's head, chest and knees.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's chest and waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's

87 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt pretensioner are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. ! Driver's SRS frontal airbag The driver's SRS frontal airbag usessa01dahu02a01l stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.
SRS airbag system warning light Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.

! Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
The front passenger's SRS frontal as0i1rabh0a20g2 uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.
1) Occupant detection sensors The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even when the driver's SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver's seatbelt preten- 1
sioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt Pretensioners" FP55.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail. . Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger's seat such as by kicking. . Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. . Do not spill liquid on the front passenger's seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately. . Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger's seat. . Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger's
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

88 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

seat. . Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger's seat. . Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passenger's seat. . Do not use the front passenger's seat with the head restraint removed. . Do not leave any articles on the front passenger's seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle. . Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery. . Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor. . Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual Seat" FP31 (models equipped with manual seats only).

NOTE
The front passenger's SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
! Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators
s01ah0203

SRS airbag system warning light
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger's occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger's seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

89 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Occupant detection system s01ah0209

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
Refer to "Front Passenger's Frontal Airbag ON and OFF Indicators" FP181.

1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag should be deployed or not.
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS airbag system warning light may illuminate to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

Electrical devices, such as cell phones, laptops, portable music players, or electronic games, especially when connected to the accessory power outlet and placed on the front passenger's seat or used by the person sitting in the front passenger's seat, may affect the operation of the occupant detection system. If either of the following situations occurs when using an electronic device in the vehicle, at first try to relocate that device to avoid it creating any interference. . The SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates. . The front passenger's frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicators operate erratically. If the device continues to cause interference, the use of that device in the vehicle should be discontinued.

CONTINUED

90 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

SRS airbag system warning light
If the front passenger's seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat dry naturally and then check the SRS airbag system warning light.

Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators do not work properly even when the front passenger's seat is dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger's seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

91 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger's seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger's frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passenger's seat.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger's SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal as0i1rabh0a20g4 will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger's seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an infant

or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-

ING that follows.)

. The front passenger's occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger's seat may be killed or severely

CONTINUED

92 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

injured should the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.
CAUTION
When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may increase the load on the front passenger's seat, activating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by an infant. . Do not place any article on the
seat other than the infant in the child restraint system. . Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system. . Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seatback. . Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket. . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback. ! If the front passenger's frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)
s01ah020401

Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer's recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in "Child Restraint Systems" FP58, correctly install the child restraint system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and make sure that the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

93 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth. (Models equipped with manual seats only)
. Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passenger's seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupant's seating posture. Children should always wear a seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deac-

tivated or activated. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following actions. . Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/ small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger's SRS frontal as0i1rabh0a20g5 will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat. . When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) are placed on the seat.

When the front passenger's seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

the load on the front passenger's seat,

deactivating the front passenger's SRS

frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat

is occupied by an adult. This may result in

personal injury.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger's seat cushion

using his/her feet.

. Do not place any article under the front

passenger's seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

. Do not squeeze any article between the

front passenger's seat and side trim/pillar,

door or center console box. This may lift

the seat cushion.

CONTINUED

94 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! If the passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult
s01ah020501
Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger's seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the

following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger's seat, or should sit in a rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

! Operation

s01ah0207

95 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

A) Driver's side

B) Passenger's side 1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a

collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to

deflate immediately so that the driver's

vision is not obstructed.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the characteristic of item(s) or person on the front passenger's seat monitored by the front passenger's occupant detection system sensor. For this reason, only the driver's SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver's module or both driver's and front passenger's modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

CONTINUED

96 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

. The front impact sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag control module
On the driver's side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the driver's SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.
! After deployment After deployment, the SRS airbag ism01amh02e1-0 diately starts to deflate so that the driver's vision is not obstructed and the driver's ability to maintain control of the vehicle is not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver's and front passenger's seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident The driver's SRS frontal airbag ands01farho02n11t passenger's SRS frontal airbag are designed as follows. . To deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision . To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows. . To deploy in most lesser frontal impacts*1

. To deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most rollover accidents*2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags would not protect the occupant in those situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy
s01ah021101

97 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy
s01ah021102

Only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
riage area from the road surface (such as 1
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

CONTINUED

98 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
S01AH021103
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

99 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) are not designed to deploy in most cases
s01ah021104

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

once either or both of the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags is/are activated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact.
! SRS seat cushion airbag operation 1 s01ah0212

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

1) Passenger's side

The driver's and front passenger's SRS

1) First impact 2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the driver's and/or front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession,

WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is designed not to deploy when the seatbelt for the corresponding seat is not fastened. For safety, all persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts.
The SRS seat cushion airbags are designed to deploy simultaneously when the SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details
CONTINUED

100 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

about the operating conditions, refer to "SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag" FP86.
The front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag is designed not to deploy in either of the following conditions.
. The front passenger's seatbelt is not fastened (even when the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates while the OFF indicator remains off).
. The front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator is off while the OFF indicator illuminates.
NOTE
When the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is deactivated by the occupant detection system, the front passenger's SRS seat cushion airbag is also deactivated.

& SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag
s01ah03
! SRS side airbag The SRS side airbag is stored in thes01daho03o0r2 side of each front seat seatback, which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants. ! SRS curtain airbag Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBs01AahR03U03 SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head and chest.
! Operation The SRS side airbag and SRS csu01ratha03i0n1 airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
The following airbags deploy indepen-

101 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

dently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. . Driver's SRS side airbag . Front passenger's SRS side airbag . SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side) . SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploys independently of the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel.
For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to "Components" FP84.
! After deployment After the deployment, the SRS side as0i1rabh0a30g4 immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment. After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain airbag system (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident The SRS side airbag and SRS csu01ratha03i0n5 airbag are designed as follows: . To deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision

. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases: . In most lesser side impact

. In most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not pro-

tect the occupant in those situations)

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

CONTINUED

102 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
! Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy
s01ah030501
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

103 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy S01AH030502

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear seat. The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle's tires hit a curbstone

laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

CONTINUED

104 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy S01AH030503
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

105 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy S01AH030504

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact. The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

CONTINUED

106 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy S01AH030505
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique sideon impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curtain airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

107 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases
s01ah030506

ary). 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. 3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.
& SRS Airbag System Monitors 1 s01ah04

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-

1) First impact 2) Second impact A) SRS curtain airbag B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the

SRS airbag system warning light A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including seatbelt pretensioners) with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
CONTINUED

108 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

The following components are monitored by the indicator:
. Front impact sensor Right-hand side Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)
. Frontal airbag module Driver's side Front passenger's side
. Knee airbag module Driver's side
. Seat cushion airbag module Front passenger's side
. Side impact sensor Center pillar left-hand side Center pillar right-hand side Forward of rear wheel house lefthand side Forward of rear wheel house righthand side Front door left-hand side Front door right-hand side Under the rear center seat
. Side airbag module Driver's side Front passenger's side
. Curtain airbag module Right-hand side Left-hand side

. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter
Driver's side Front passenger's side . Lap belt pretensioner Driver's side . Seatbelt buckle switch Front passenger's side . Front passenger's occupant detection system sensor . Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator . All related wiring . Rear seatbelt pretensioner Driver's side Passenger's side . Seat position sensor Driver's side Passenger's side
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warning light
. No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the "ON" position . Continuous illumination of the
warning light . Illumination of the warning light
while driving Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of injury.
& SRS Airbag System Servicing s01ah05 WARNING . When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer. . The SRS airbag has no userserviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the

system's wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas. . Under the center of the instru-
ment panel . On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle . Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas . Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas . Top of the dashboard on front
passenger's side and nearby areas . Each front seat and nearby area . Inside each center pillar . Inside each front door

109 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

. In each roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags did not deploy. . The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. . The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in

an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy. . The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise 1
damaged. . The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which no SRS airbag was deployed.
& Precautions against Vehicle Modification
s01ah06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system. This includes following modifications. Installation of custom steering wheels Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard Installation of custom seats Replacement of seat fabric or leather
CONTINUED

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

110 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)

Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat
Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/ or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
Modifications on or inside the front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect the pressure of an impact, are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trims, such as the addition of door speakers for example. Any modifications to the doors will create a risk of the

airbag system becoming inoperative or unintended airbag deployment.
CAUTION Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system. . Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end. . Modification of the suspension system or front end structure. . Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual. . Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts on your vehicle.
& How to Contact the Vehicle Manufacturer concerning Modifications for Persons with Disabilities That May Affect the Advanced Airbag System
Changing or moving any parts of the sf0r1oahn15t seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District of Columbia> Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Retailer Services Department One Subaru Drive P.O. Box 9103 Camden, NJ 08101-9877 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

<Hawaii> Subaru Hawaii 2850 Pukoloa Street, Ste. 101, Honolulu, HI 96819 877-215-0338
<Guam> Shen's Corporation dba Prestige Automobiles 491 East Marine Corps Drive, Dededo, Guam 96929 671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico> Trebol Motors 296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan, Puerto Rico 787-793-2828
<Canada> Subaru Canada, Inc. Consumer Support Department 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7 1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

111 SRS Airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag) 1

Seat, Seatbelt and SRS Airbags

2-1. Keys ................................................................. 115 Key Number Plate.....................s.0.2........................ 115
2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped) .................................... 115 Safety Precautions.............................................. 116 Locking and Unlocking with "Keyless Access" Entry Function.................................................. 120 Unlock Using PIN Code Access .......................... 124 Power Saving Function ....................................... 126 Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob ......... 127 Disabling Keyless Access Function .................... 127 Selecting Audible Signal Operation ..................... 130 Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation....... 130 Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator .............. 130 When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ........................................................... 130 Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob ................. 130 Replacing Access Key Fob ................................. 130 Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System................................. 130
2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 131 Security Indicator Light....................................... 132 Key Replacement................................................ 132 Certification for Immobilizer System.................... 132
2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System ...................... 133 Locking the Doors .............................................. 135 Unlocking the Doors ........................................... 135 Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy) .......................... 135 Unlocking the Rear Gate (Outback) ..................... 135 Setting Audible Signal Operation ........................ 135

Keys and Doors
Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation ...... 136 Vehicle Finder Function...................................... 136 Sounding a Panic Alarm..................................... 136 Replacing the Battery......................................... 136 Replacing Lost Transmitters............................... 136 Certification for Remote Keyless Entry System ... 136
2-5. Door Locks ......................................................137 2
Locking and Unlocking from the Outside............ 137 Locking and Unlocking from the Inside .............. 139 Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking .................... 140 Key Lock-In Prevention Function........................ 140 Battery Drainage Prevention Function ................ 141 2-6. Alarm System ..................................................141 Alarm System Operation .................................... 142 Arming the System ............................................ 142 Disarming the System ........................................ 143 Alarm System Setting......................................... 144 If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm
System ............................................................ 144 Valet Mode ......................................................... 144 2-7. Child Safety Locks ..........................................145 2-8. Windows...........................................................145 Power Window Operation ................................... 146 Initialization of Power Window (Windows with
One-Touch Auto up and down Function)........... 148 2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy) ..........................................148
To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from Outside ............................................................ 149
To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside ..................... 149 Internal Trunk Lid Release Handle ...................... 149

Keys and Doors

Keys and Doors
2-10. Rear Gate (Outback) ..................................... 151 Manual Rear Gate ............................................... 151 Power Rear Gate (If Equipped) ............................ 152

2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped) .................................161 Moonroof Switches ............................................ 161
Sunshade........................................................... 162

Keys 115

2-1. Keys
s02aa
NOTE
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" FP115.

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.
NOTE
Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the key. For detailed information, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" FP133.

2-2. Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped)

s02ap

The following access key fobs are pro-

vided with the vehicle.

Keys and Doors

1) Master keys 2) Valet key 3) Key number plate
Two types of keys are provided for your vehicle: Master key and valet key.
The master key fit all locks on your vehicle. . Ignition switch . Driver's door . Glove box

CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine.
& Key Number Plate
The key number is stamped on thes0k2aea0y1 number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to "Key Replacement" FP132.

1) Access key fobs 2) Key number plate
The keyless access with push-button start system allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key fob. . Locking and unlocking of the doors, fuel filler lid and rear gate (Outback) . Opening the trunk (Legacy) . Starting and stopping the engine. For detailed information, refer to "Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-But-
CONTINUED

116 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

ton Start System)" FP336. . Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm System" FP141.
NOTE
. Locking and unlocking by the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the access key fob. For detailed information, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" FP133. . Carefully store the key number plate supplied with the access key fob. It is necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access key fobs. For details, refer to "Key Replacement" FP132.
An emergency key is attached to each access key fob.

1) Release button 2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key. The emergency key is used for the following operations. . Locking and unlocking the driver's door . Locking and unlocking the glove box
NOTE
The glove box can be kept locked when you leave your vehicle and the access key fob (with the emergency key removed) at a parking facility.

& Safety Precautions

s02ap11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators. If you wear electronic medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to "Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start system" mentioned later, and contact the electronic medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electronic medical equipment.

"Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start system"

. The keyless access with pushbutton start system uses radio waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote keyless entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations. *: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

117 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System 2

Keys and Doors

Legacy 1) Antennas

Outback 1) Antennas
CONTINUED

118 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access key fob inside the vehicle or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key fob.
. The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunctions. It is recommended to have the access key fob battery replaced at an authorized SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage. Do not get the access key fob wet. If the access key fob gets wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely. Do not apply strong impacts to the access key fob. Never leave the access key fob in direct sunlight or anywhere that may become hot,

such as on the dashboard. It may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions. Do not wash the access key fob in an ultrasonic washer. Do not leave the access key fob in humid or dusty locations. Doing so may cause malfunctions. Keep the access key fob away from magnetic sources. Do not leave the access key fob near a personal computer or home electrical appliance. Do not leave the access key fob near a battery charger or any electrical accessories. Do not apply metallic window tint or attach metallic objects to the windows. Do not fit non genuine accessories or parts. . If the access key fob is dropped, the integrated emergency key inside may become loose. Be careful not to lose the emergency key. . When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the access key fob. If any button of the access key fob is pressed, radio

waves are emitted and may affect the operation of the airplane. In a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting procedure, refer to "Disabling Keyless Access Function" FP127. . For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the nonoperational mode, refer to "Access Key Fob If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly" FP465. . The keyless access with push-button start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key fob and environmental conditions may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.
When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a broadcast station

119 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

and power transmission lines. When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as an access key fob or a remote transmitter key of another vehicle. When carrying the access key fob of your vehicle together with the access key fob or the remote transmitter of another vehicle. When the access key fob is placed near wireless communication equipment such as a cell phone. When the access key fob is placed near a metallic object. When metallic accessories are attached to the access key fob. When carrying the access key fob with an electronic appliance such as a laptop computer. When the battery of the access key fob is discharged. . The access key fob is always communicating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery becomes fully discharged, replace it with a new one.

. If an access key fob is lost, it is recommended that all of the remaining access key fobs be reregistered. For reregistration of an access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer. . For a spare access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer. . Up to 7 access key fobs can be registered for one vehicle. . Do not leave the access key fob in the storage spaces inside the vehicle, such as the door pocket, dashboard or inside the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key fob or turn on the switch, possibly resulting in a lockout. . After the vehicle battery is discharged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may be required to start the engine. In this case, perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position. For details, refer to "Switching Power Status" FP171. (2) Open and close the driver's door. (3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places.

On the instrument panel

On the floor Inside the glove box

Inside the door trim pocket

On the rear seat

On the rear shelf (Legacy)

Inside the trunk (Legacy)

In the cargo area (Outback)

Keys and Doors

If you do, the following situations may occur. The access key fob is mistakenly locked inside the vehicle. A false warning issues although no malfunction actually occurs. No warning issues even when a malfunction occurs.

CONTINUED

120 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

& Locking and Unlocking with "Keyless Access" Entry Function
When the access key fob is carried ws0it2hapi0n1 the operating range, the doors, the fuel filler lid, the trunk (Legacy) and the rear gate (Outback) can be locked/unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" FP133.

! Operating ranges

s02ap0101

Legacy 1) Antennas 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))
Outback 1) Antennas 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
in (40 to 80 cm))
1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either of the operating ranges of the front doors, the LED indicator on the access key fob flashes. When the keyless access functions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access key fob is pressed.
NOTE
. If the access key fob is placed too close to the vehicle body, the keyless access functions may not operate properly. If it does not operate properly, repeat the operation from farther away. . If the access key fob is placed near the ground or in an elevated location from the ground, even if it is in the indicated operating range, the keyless access function may not operate properly. . When the access key fob is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who is not carrying the access key fob, to operate the keyless access function. Note that the keyless access function can be operated only by the door handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener button or rear lock button in the operating range in which the access key fob is detected. . It is not possible to lock the doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid using the keyless access function when the ac-

121 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

cess key fob is inside the vehicle. However, depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions, the access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, make sure that you have the access key fob. . When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, or when operating it in a location with strong radio waves or noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, broadcast station or an area where wireless equipment is used), or while talking on a cell phone, the operating ranges may be reduced, or the keyless access function may not operate. In such a case, perform the procedure described in "Locking and Unlocking" FP466. . The doors may lock or unlock when the car is being washed or exposed to a significant amount of water that touches the door handle while the key fob is still in the operating range.
! How to lock and unlock It is possible to perform the follso02wapi0n10g8 operations when you are carrying the access key fob. . Lock and unlock the doors and the fuel filler lid.

. Unlock the trunk lid (Legacy). . Unlock and lock the rear gate (Outback).
NOTE
. It is not possible to lock the doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid using the keyless access function when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Refer to "Switching Power Status" FP171. . If the door handle is gripped with a gloved hand, the door lock may not be released. . If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor operation. . When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not complete. After performing the locking procedure, it is recommended to pull the rear door handle to confirm that the doors have been locked. . If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
An electronic chirp sounds five times. The hazard warning flashers flash five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors even when one of the doors is open. After performing the locking procedure, close the opened door or rear gate to lock it. . Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate using the 2
keyless access function, it is not possible to unlock doors and/or the rear gate using the keyless access function. . When locking, be sure to carry the access key fob to prevent locking the access key fob in the vehicle. . The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation and the volume of the audible signal can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for models with the center information display, the setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220.
CONTINUED

Keys and Doors

122 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

! Locking with the door lock sensor s02ap010801

first. You can then touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button (Outback)
s02ap010802

! Locking with the power rear gate lock button (Outback if equipped)
s02ap010803

1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all doors (for Outback, including the rear gate) and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to lock all of the doors (including the rear gate), if you touch the door lock sensor once more to attempt the lock operation without first unlocking the doors, nothing will happen, even if the door lock sensor is touched. In this case, perform the unlocking operation once

1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate and press the rear lock button. The rear gate, the fuel filler lid and all doors will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

1) Power rear gate lock button
Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. It will close automatically, and the rear gate, all doors and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

! Unlocking

s02ap010804

123 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

! Opening rear gate (Outback) s02ap010805

! Opening trunk (Legacy) s02ap010806

Keys and Doors

Carry the access key fob, and touch the sensor behind the door handle.
. When the driver's door handle is gripped, only the driver's door and the fuel filler lid will be unlocked.
. When the front passenger's door handle is gripped, all doors (for Outback, including the rear gate) and the fuel filler lid will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate will be unlocked and opened. Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

1) Trunk opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the trunk opener button. The trunk will open. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the trunk can be opened without the key fob. . The trunk lock/unlock setting is on. . All doors are unlocked.

CONTINUED

124 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

The trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
! Door unlock selection function When the door is unlocked usinsg02apt0h10e5 keyless access function, only the doors that were set and the fuel filler lid can be unlocked. The settings can be changed with the following methods. . The setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. . The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

& Unlock Using PIN Code Access
s02ap21
1) Trunk opener button (Legacy)

While all doors (for Outback, including the rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the doors (including rear gate) without a key by performing the following procedure. . Legacy: press the trunk opener button . Outback: press the rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) is registered.

1) Rear lock button (Outback)

125 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

! Registration for a PIN code s02ap2102 Steps

Operation

Time from the previous step

Turn off the ignition switch.

Close all doors (including trunk/rear gate).

Press and hold the " " button on the access key fob, then press and hold the

trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button (Outback) until a chirp sounds

intermittently.

Keys and Doors

Press the " " button on the access key fob.

Within 30 seconds

Input the PIN code using the trunk opener button (Legacy)/rear lock button (Outback) within 30 seconds after the chirp sound of step 4. For example, to register "32468" as the PIN code, perform the following procedure.

(1)

Press the button three times.

(2)

After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

Within 30 seconds

(3)

After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.

(4)

After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.

(5)

After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.

Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.

All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.

NOTE
Press the " " button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the " " button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

CONTINUED

126 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

NOTE
. Press the trunk opener button/rear lock button ten times to enter "0". . Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft. . If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not been changed or deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a new PIN code. . If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the " " or " " button on the access key fob. Then, start over from the procedure described in "Preparation". . To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register "00000" to "99999" or "12345" as a PIN code. . Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as "11122" or "12121" as a PIN code. Doing so will increase the risk of vehicle theft. . When you try to register "22222", the registered PIN code will be deleted. You cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access until a new code is registered. . After registering a new PIN code, make sure that you can unlock the doors using the PIN code. . The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is

disabled by operating the access key fob. . Reregister the PIN code in the following case.
When you forget the PIN code When you want to change the PIN code
! Unlocking Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 dessc0r2iabp2e10d3 in "Registration".
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code Access in the following cases.
When the access key fob is within the operating ranges When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position . If you make an operation error during the unlocking procedure, start over with the unlocking procedure after waiting for 5 seconds or longer. . To protect your vehicle from theft, a buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five times continuously. If this occurs, you cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code Access for 5 minutes.

& Power Saving Function
To protect the access key fob batterys0a2anp2d3 the vehicle battery, the keyless access function will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system have not been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button ignition switch has been turned off, communication between the antennas and the access key fob will be stopped. (2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors (both lock sensor and unlock sensor) on the front passenger's door will be disabled. . When the access key fob has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or longer while all doors are locked, the keyless access function will be disabled.
! Recovery from power saving mode When one of the following operatios0n2asp23i0s1 performed, the keyless access function will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle (only when the sensors on the front passenger's door are not disabled) or pressing the rear gate opener button on the rear gate (Outback)/trunk opener button on the trunk lid (Legacy).

127 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless entry system.
. Open a door and then close it.
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.

& Power Saving Function of Access Key Fob
This function stops the access keys02faop2b6 from receiving signals and helps minimize the battery consumption of the access key fob. 1. Press the " " button twice while holding the " " button.
1) LED indicator 2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4 times to notify that the setting is complete. When the access key fob is in the power save mode, the keyless access function and push-button start system will not be available. To cancel the power save mode, press one of the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling Keyless Access Function
s02ap07
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per- 2
form the procedure "By operating the driver's door" FP128 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the procedure "By operating the access key fob" FP128, the operation of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by the radio waves from the transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time, or when you choose not to use the keyless access function, the keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function by the remote keyless entry system is not disabled. . To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in "Starting Engine" FP466.

Keys and Doors

CONTINUED

128 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

! Disabling functions

s02ap0701

! By operating the access key fob s02ap070102
To disable the keyless access function by

operating the access key fob, register a

PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details

about registering a PIN code, refer to

"Unlock Using PIN Code Access" FP124.

1. Open the driver's door.

! By operating the driver's door s02ap070101

2. Rotate the lock lever forward.

3. Press and hold the " " button and " " button on the access key fob simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the function will be disabled.

To disable the keyless access function by operating the driver's door, perform the following procedures.

129 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

Steps 1 2 3
4

Operation Sit in the driver's seat, and close the door. Push " " on the power door locking switch. Open the driver's door. Push " " on the power door locking switch twice.

5 Close and open the driver's door twice.

Push " " on the power door locking switch twice while the door is open.

7 Close and open the driver's door once.

8 Close the door.

Time -- --
Within 5 sec. Within 5 sec.
Within 10 sec.
Within 10 sec. Within 10 sec. Within 5 sec.

Status Close Close Close?Open
Open
Open?Close? Open?Close?Open
Open
Open?Close?Open Open?Close

A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch is not pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

! Enabling functions When the procedure to disable thes0f2uapn07c0-2 tions is performed again, a chirp sound will be heard, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE . The keyless access function will be 2
enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner you disabled the function (for example, when disabling by operating the driver's door, the function will not be enabled even if you operate the access key fob). . Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the procedure in which the keyless access function was disabled.
When disabling by operating the driver's door: A chirp will not be heard. When disabling by operating the access key fob: A chirp will be heard.

Keys and Doors

CONTINUED

130 Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System

& Selecting Audible Signal Operation
Using an electronic chirp, the systems02wapi1l2l give you an audible signal when the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the audible signal off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the audible signal can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation
Using the hazard warning flasher,s02tahp1e8 system will give you a visible signal when the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator
The keyless access with push-buttonss02taap0r6t system is equipped with a warning chime and the access key warning indicator in

order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to "Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" FP191.

& When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob If Accesss0K2aep0y8 Fob Does Not Operate Properly" FP465.

& Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob
Refer to "Replacing Battery of Accesss0K2aep0y9 Fob" FP526.

& Replacing Access Key Fob
Access key fobs can be replacesd02apa13t SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Keyless Ac-

cess with Push-Button Start

System

. U.S.-spec. models

s02ap14

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-2 FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

. Canada-spec. models

. Mexico-spec. models

IFT RLVDE1415-1661 14AHK DENSO

Immobilizer 131

2-3. Immobilizer

s02ab

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle's immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. If engine

start is attempted with an unregistered

access key fob or key, the engine will not

start. Even if the engine does start, it will

stop after a few seconds. This system,

however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-

tee.

Keys and Doors

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct sunlight or anywhere it may become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
CONTINUED

132 Immobilizer

Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside. Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the moonroof, and lock the doors (all models) and rear gate (Outback). Do not leave spare keys or any record of your key number in the vehicle. . The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
& Security Indicator Light
Refer to "Security Indicator Light" FPs1029ab602.
& Key Replacement
Your key number plate will be requirse02dab0i3f you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicle's immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows. . Four (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") . Seven (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")
One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key's ID code still remains in the memory of the vehicle's immobilizer system. For security reasons, the lost key's ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost key's ID code, all keys that will be used are required. For details about new key registration and erasing the lost key's ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for Immobilizer System
. For models with "keyless accs0e2asb0s5 with push-button start system": Refer to "Certification for Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" FP130. . For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":
U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: Y8PFJ18-3
CAUTION
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Canada-spec. models

Mexico-spec. models

Remote Keyless Entry System 133
2-4. Remote Keyless Entry System
s02ae
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans- 2
mitter to severe shocks, such as those experienced as a result of dropping or throwing. . Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing the battery. . Do not get the remote transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately. . When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not press the button of the remote transmitter while in the airplane. When any button of the remote transmitter is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons of the remote transmitter from being pressed.
CONTINUED

Keys and Doors

134 Remote Keyless Entry System

Access key fob 1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate
unlock button (Outback) 4) PANIC button

Transmitter 1) Lock/arm button 2) Unlock/disarm button 3) Trunk lid opener (Legacy)/Rear gate
unlock button (Outback) 4) PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the following functions. . Locking and unlocking the doors, rear gate (Outback) and fuel filler lid . Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) . Sounding a panic alarm . Arming and disarming the alarm system. For details, refer to "Alarm System" FP141.
The operable distance of the remote keyless entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will

vary depending on environmental conditions. The system's operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the "OFF" position. . For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. . The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key fob/transmitter button is pressed in the following cases.
When locking the doors When unlocking the doors When unlocking the rear gate
If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. The setting can also be changed by a

Remote Keyless Entry System 135

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Locking the Doors
Press the " " button to lock all doorss,02tahe0e1 trunk (Legacy), rear gate (Outback) and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed. . An electronic chirp sounds five times. . The hazard warning flashers flash five times.
When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will occur. . An electronic chirp sounds once. . The hazard warning flashers flash once.
& Unlocking the Doors
Press the " " button to unlock the drivs0e2are'0s2 door and fuel filler lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors and the rear gate, briefly press the " " button again within 5 seconds.

NOTE
If the interval between the first and second presses of the " " button (for unlocking of all of the doors and the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.
& Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)
Press and hold the " " button to opens02tahe1e3 trunk lid. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. This operation setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Unlocking the Rear Gate (Outback)
Press the " " button to unlock thes0r2eaea0r3 gate. An electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. This operation setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Setting Audible Signal Operation
Using an electronic chirp, the systems02waei0l7l

give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock.

Models with "keyless access with

push-button start system":

If desired, you can turn the audible signal

off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings"

Keys and Doors

FP220. Furthermore, the volume setting

of the audible signal can also be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without "keyless access with

push-button start system":

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. Take the same steps to

restore the function.

CONTINUED

136 Remote Keyless Entry System

Steps 1 2
(1) 3
(2)
4

Operation Sit in the driver's seat. Close all doors and the rear gate. Press and hold " " on the power locking switch. Insert the key into the ignition switch and pull it out at least 6 times. Open and close the driver's door.

Time -- --
Within 10 sec.
Within 10 sec.

The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting.
Your SUBARU dealer can perform the above procedure for you.

& Selecting Hazard Warning Flasher Operation
Using the hazard warning flasher,s02tahe2e6 system will give you a visible signal when the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle Finder Function
Use this function to find your vesh02icael0e5 parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the " " button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicle's horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too short when you press the " " button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote transmitter.
& Sounding a Panic Alarm
To activate the alarm, press the "PAsN02IaCe0"6 button once. The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash. To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. If a button on the remote transmitter is not pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.
& Replacing the Battery
Refer to "Replacing Battery" FP525.s02ae08

& Replacing Lost Transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or wans0t2aet0o9 purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), you should reprogram all of your transmitters for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

& Certification for Remote Key-

less Entry System

. U.S.-spec. models

s02ae18

FCC ID: CWTB1G077

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION
FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation. . Canada-spec. models

. Mexico-spec. models

IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814 SUBARU MODEL: TB1G077
IFETEL RLVSUTD18-0302 SUBARU MODEL: TD1G141

Door Locks 137

2-5. Door Locks

s02ac
& Locking and Unlocking from

the Outside

NOTE

s02ac01

If you unlock the driver's door with a 2
key (including an emergency key) and open the door while the alarm system is armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicle's horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

Keys and Doors

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":
. Press any button on the access key fob (except when the access key fob battery is discharged). . Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" position. . Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures.
Grip the front door handle. Press the rear gate opener button.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system": . Press any button on the remote transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is discharged).

CONTINUED

138 Door Locks

. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. For details about the alarm system, refer to "Alarm System" FP141. ! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
using the key s02ac0101

direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.
! How to lock the vehicle without using the key
To lock the door from outside withosu02tact0h10e2 key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever s02ac010201

! Locking using power door locking switch
s02ac010202

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock. 2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, only the driver's side door is locked or unlocked.
NOTE
Models with "keyless access with push-button start system": The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the

1) Rotate the lock lever forward. 2) Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was operated will be locked.

1) Press the side of the power door locking switch*.
2) Close the door. *: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to "How to operate the power door locking switches" FP139.
In this case, all closed doors, the fuel filler lid and the rear gate (Outback) are locked at the same time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and Unlocking from the Inside
s02ac02
! How to use the lock lever s02ac0202
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock. 2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock. To lock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever forward. To unlock the door from the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked. Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door. Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (Outback) are closed before starting to drive.

WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle. Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraint systems, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent passengers from falling out by preventing a door from being accidentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle from inside while driving. The door could open even if it is locked.

Door Locks 139

! How to operate the power door

locking switches

All doors, the rear gate (Outback) ans0d2afcu02e03l

filler lid can be locked and unlocked by

pressing either side of the power door

locking switches located on the driver's side and the front passenger's side doors.

Keys and Doors

1) Lock 2) Unlock
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the power door locking switches.

CONTINUED

140 Door Locks

& Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking
All doors and the fuel filler lid are as0u2atco0-8 matically locked or unlocked under the following conditions.
. For automatic door locking When the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory default setting). When the select lever is shifted into a position other than the "P" position.
. For automatic door unlocking When the driver's door is open (factory default setting). When the ignition switch is turned to OFF. When the select lever is shifted into the "P" position.
NOTE
. The automatic door lock and unlock setting can be changed with the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . When locking the door by the power door locking switches, automatic door locking will not operate. . When unlocking the door by the power door locking switches, auto-

matic door unlocking will not operate. . If the system detects a strong enough impact to deploy the airbags, all doors may be automatically unlocked. For further details, refer to "Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident" FP470. . When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock all the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the Key lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator " " will appear and the warning chime will also sound.
& Key Lock-In Prevention Function
Under the following conditions, alls02tahc0e6 doors will not lock when the power door locking switch is pushed with a front door open. . The key is still in the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system"). . The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

NOTE
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before locking the doors. . When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock all the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. . When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock all the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the Key lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator " " will appear and the warning chime will also sound. . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as "operational". This function's operational/non-operational setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
! Non-operation of key lock-in prevention function
When the system is set so that it does0s2acn06o02t operate, the doors are locked by the following operation. . If the lock lever is turned to the front

Alarm System 141

("LOCK") position with the driver's door open and the driver's door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driver's door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the driver's door from the outside of the vehicle, the door is locked.

& Battery Drainage Prevention Function
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) iss02naco03t completely closed, the interior lights will remain illuminated as a result. However, several lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from going dead. The following interior lights are affected by this function.

Item

Switch Automatically turning

position

off

Map lights DOOR

Approximately 20 minutes later

Dome light DOOR

Approximately 20 minutes later

Ignition switch light

Approximately 20 minutes later

Cargo area

light

DOOR

(Outback)

Approximately 20 minutes later

NOTE
. The default setting for this function is set as "operational". The operational/ non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting. . When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the rear gate (Outback) are completely closed. . The battery drainage prevention function does not operate under the following condition.
While the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON" (models with the push-button ignition switch) While the key is in the ignition switch (models without the pushbutton ignition switch) . Models with the push-button ignition switch are also equipped with the battery drainage prevention function for the push-button ignition switch. For details, refer to "Battery drainage prevention function" FP172.

2-6. Alarm System

s02af

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

Keys and Doors

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":
The system can be armed or disarmed with the keyless access function or access key fob.
The system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":
The system can be armed or disarmed with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle's alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

CONTINUED

142 Alarm System

& Alarm System Operation
When the alarm system is armed, si0t2afi0s1 triggered by the opening any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the following alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle's horn will sound for 30 seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback)/ trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear gate (Outback)/ trunk lid (Legacy) or engine hood is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger the illumination of the following interior lights. . Map lights (illuminates only when the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position) . Dome light (illuminates only when the dome light switch is in the "DOOR" position)

. Cargo area light (Outback) (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch is in the "DOOR" position)
The notifications regarding the map lights, dome light and cargo area light (Outback) are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Arming the System
The alarm system becomes armed ws0h2eaf0n4 the following operation is performed. 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped) and turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. 2. Carry the key and get out of the vehicle. 3. Make sure that the engine hood is locked. 4. Lock the doors using any of the following methods.
. Locking using the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" FP133. . Locking using the keyless access function (if equipped). For details, refer to "Locking with the door lock sensor" FP122.

. Locking using the power door locking switch. For details, refer to "Locking using power door locking switch" FP138. . Locking using the rear lock button. For details, refer to "Locking with the rear lock button (Outback)" FP122. . Locking using the power rear gate lock button. For details, refer to "Locking with the power rear gate lock button (Outback if equipped)" FP122.
Security indicator light
NOTE
. All doors, the rear gate (Outback)/ trunk lid (Legacy) and fuel filler lid will lock, an electronic chirp will sound once, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and the security indicator

Alarm System 143

light will start flashing rapidly. . If any of the doors or the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times and the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are not properly closed. When you close the door, doors will automatically lock and the system will automatically arm in 30 seconds.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state, the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the windows and/or moonroof are open. Always make sure that they are fully closed before arming the system. . The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer. . If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveillance state.

Doors (including the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are unlocked using the access key fob/ remote transmitter. Doors (including the rear gate (Outback)/trunk lid (Legacy)) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with "keyless access with push-button start system"). Any door (including the rear gate (Outback) and engine hood) is opened. The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system"). Push-button ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with pushbutton start system").
& Disarming the System
Perform either of the following procedus0r2easf05.
. Briefly press a button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/remote transmitter.
. Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").
Grip the front door handle.

Press the rear gate opener button (Outback).
Press the trunk opener button (Legacy).
Unlock using the PIN code access.

Keys and Doors

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming If you cannot disarm the system usins0g2atf0h50e1 access key fob/transmitter (i.e., the transmitter is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is too weak), you can disarm the system without using the access key fob/ remote transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ON" position with a registered key/access key fob.

NOTE
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", if the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in "Switching Power Status" FP466. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" FP526.

CONTINUED

144 Alarm System

& Alarm System Setting
To change the setting of your vehics0l2eaf'1s1 alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Disarming the System" FP143.
2. Sit in the driver's seat and shut all doors, the rear gate (Outback), the trunk lid (Legacy) and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
4. Hold down " " of the driver's power door locking switch, open the driver's door within the following 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

Setting status
Activate Deactivate

Combination meter display (color LCD)
AL ON AL OFF

Horn
Once Twice

NOTE
You may have the above setting change done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If You Have Accidentally Triggered the Alarm System
s02af03
! To stop the alarm Do any of the following operations: s02af0301 . Press any button on the access key fob/ remote transmitter. . Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system"). . Turn the push-button ignition to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the immobilizer transponder is not registered, the alarm will not stop.
& Valet Mode
When you choose the valet mode,s0t2haf0e6 alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate (Outback) and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to deactivation mode. Refer to "Alarm System Setting" FP144. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3

seconds, indicating that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to activation mode. Refer to "Alarm System Setting" FP144.

Child Safety Locks 145

2-7. Child Safety Locks
s02ag
WARNING Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit on the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the "LOCK" position, the door cannot be opened from inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

2-8. Windows
s02ah
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception. . When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's body parts or any other objects from being caught in the window. . Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. . Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects resistance, an impact or abnormality, the window operation may be automatically stopped to prevent further jam-

ming, entrapment or malfunction. The closing window slides down slightly and stops. The opening window stops sliding down.
. The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an 2
abnormality in the following cases. A substantial sized object is caught between the window and the window frame. A foreign object is caught between the window and the window frame. The vehicle drives over a deep pothole.
. The window cannot be closed for a few seconds after the window is automatically stopped by the system.
CONTINUED

Keys and Doors

146 Windows

& Power Window Operation s02ah07
! Power window switches . Driver's side power window switcs0h2eahs07:01

. Passenger's side power window switches:

! Operating the window

s02ah0702

1) For front left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
2) For front right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
3) For rear left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature (if equipped))
4) For rear right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature (if equipped))
5) Lock switch

Each passenger's window can be controlled by the power window switch located on the door.
The switch illuminates when operated.

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster on the driver side door.
The switch illuminates when operated.

With one-touch auto up and down feature 1) Automatically close* 2) Close 3) Open 4) Automatically open* *: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.

Windows 147

Without one-touch auto up and down feature 1) Close 2) Open
NOTE
Avoid the following. . Continuously operating a switch in the same direction after the window is fully closed or fully opened. . Continuously operating three or more switches all at once in the same direction after the windows are fully closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described above may cause the power window breaker to operate making it impossible to open or close the window. Be sure to initialize the power windows. Refer to

"Initialization of Power Window (Windows with One-Touch Auto up and down Function)" FP148.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows with one-touch auto up and down function)
While closing the window automaticsa02lalhy0,70i3f the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops. If a foreign object is caught while window is opening automatically, the window will stop.
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test the power window operation using body parts.
. If an object is caught just before the window fully closes, the system may not operate properly.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar to that caused by trapping an object (for example, when the vehicle encounters a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment function may operate.

. You cannot close the window for a few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.

Keys and Doors

! Off delay function (windows with

one-touch auto up and down func-

tion) The windows can be operated for apsp02raoh0x70i-5

mately 40 seconds even after the ignition

switch is turned to the "ACC" or "OFF"

position. If a front door is opened within 40

seconds, the off delay function is can-

celed.

! Locking the passengers' windows s02ah0704

1) Lock 2) Unlock
When the lock switch is in the lock position, the rear passenger's window switches on the driver side door and the passengers'
CONTINUED

148 Trunk Lid (Legacy)

window switches cannot be operated.
When the indicator on the window switches does not illuminate, the window switch cannot be operated.
& Initialization of Power Window (Windows with OneTouch Auto up and down Function)
If the one-touch auto up and down funsc0t2iaoh0n6 or off delay function does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following procedure in order to initialize the power window system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3. Open the window completely and then press and hold down the power window switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then pull and hold the power window switch for approximately 1 second.

2-9. Trunk Lid (Legacy)
s02ai
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the trunk lid closed while the engine is running.
. Check that the trunk is completely closed before driving. If it is not, it may suddenly open, which could lead to an accident.
. Help prevent children, adults or animals from locking themselves in the trunk. On hot or sunny days, the temperature in the trunk could quickly become high enough to cause death or serious heat-related injuries including brain damage to anyone locked inside, particularly for small children.
. When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors. Also make certain that the trunk is closed.

CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the trunk lid.
. Check carefully when opening and closing the trunk.
. Pay attention to hot engine exhaust gas when loading and unloading cargo, as it could possibly cause burns.
. Be careful opening the trunk when the wind is strong. The trunk lid could close or open suddenly, possibly causing injuries.
. Make sure that the trunk is completely open when using it. If it is not, the trunk lid may suddenly drop and cause serious injury.
. Be careful opening and closing the trunk suddenly on a slope, as trunk is more difficult to open and close on a slope than on a flat area.
. Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts. If the trunk lid becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to hold it open.

Trunk Lid (Legacy) 149

. Remove snow and ice from the trunk lid before opening it. Not doing so could cause the trunk lid to fall after it is opened.
. Do not push the trunk lid forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
& To Open and Close the Trunk Lid from Outside
The trunk lid can be opened usings0t2hai0e1 keyless access function or remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to the following section. . For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Opening trunk (Legacy)" FP123, or "Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)" FP135. . For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Opening the Trunk Lid (Legacy)" FP135.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
. Do not leave your valuables in the trunk when you leave your vehicle. . Under the following conditions, the trunk can be opened without the access key fob.

The trunk lock/unlock setting is set to on. All doors are unlocked. The trunk lock/unlock setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
& To Open the Trunk Lid from Inside
s02ai02
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button for more than 1 second.

& Internal Trunk Lid Release

Handle

The internal trunk lid release handles0is2ai0a4

device designed to open the trunk lid from

inside the trunk. In the event children or

adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle allows them to open the lid. The

handle is located on the inside of the trunk

lid.

Keys and Doors

To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, pull the yellow handle as indicated by the arrow on the handle. This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid. The handle is made of material that remains luminescent for approximately an hour in the dark trunk space after it is exposed to ambient light even for a short time.
CONTINUED

150 Trunk Lid (Legacy)

WARNING Never allow any child to get in the trunk and play with the release handle. If the driver starts the vehicle without knowing that a child is inside the trunk and the child opens the lid using the release handle, the child could fall out and be killed or seriously injured.

! Inspection Perform the following steps at least tws0i2caie040a1 year to check the release handle for correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.

CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping the release handle. The handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook to fasten straps or ropes to secure your cargo in the trunk. Such use may result in damage of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo cannot strike the release handle. If the cargo hits the handle while the vehicle is being driven, the handle may be pulled and the trunk lid may open. That may cause cargo to fall out of the trunk, which could create a traffic safety hazard.

This places the latch in the locked position.
2. To lock it, press the latch with the screwdriver shaft until it clicks.
3. Move the release handle, from outside the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to check if the latch is released.

Rear Gate (Outback) 151

If the latch is not released, contact your SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release handle feels restricted or not entirely smooth during operation, or the handle and/or handle base is cracked, contact your SUBARU dealer.

2-10. Rear Gate (Outback)
s02aj
& Manual Rear Gate
The rear gate can be locked and unlocs0k2eaj0d4 using any of the following systems. . Power door locking switch: Refer to "Locking and Unlocking from the Inside" FP139.
. Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" FP115.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to "Remote Keyless Entry System" FP133.
To open:

2. Press and hold the rear gate opener button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTE

Keys and Doors

If the rear gate cannot be opened due to a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-

function in the door locking/unlocking

system or other causes, you can unlock

it by manually operating the rear gate

lock release lever. For the procedure,

refer to "Rear Gate (Outback) If the

Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened" FP467.

To close:

Rear gate opener button 1. Unlock the rear gate.

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you pull it down holding the convenient grip.
CONTINUED

152 Rear Gate (Outback)
WARNING . To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while the engine is running. . Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the recessed grip. Also do not close the rear gate by pulling the grip from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.
CAUTION . Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. That could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open. . Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.

& Power Rear Gate (If Equipped)
s02aj01
WARNING
. When operating the power rear gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precautions may result in an injury (e. g., anyone's body is hit against the rear gate or is caught in the rear gate, etc.) Make sure there are no people around the rear gate. Never let anyone get close to the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's fingers, arms, neck, head or other objects from being caught in the rear gate. Otherwise, serious personal injury may be caused by entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a slope by using the power rear gate feature, the rear gate may close. Make sure that the rear gate has stopped completely after opening it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always carry the key for safety and never

allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power rear gate. . The driver should be aware of and pay careful attention to his/her responsibilities. . Use the power rear gate only when the area around the rear gate is clearly visible and when you have checked that there is no danger of people being caught in the gate.
CAUTION . When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the power rear gate. If you close the rear gate manually with extra force, the power rear gate may be damaged. . Do not install any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts on the rear gate. If the weight of rear gate increases excessively, the rear gate stay cannot support the rear gate sufficiently when opening the rear gate. Also, the power rear

Rear Gate (Outback) 153

gate may not function properly or may malfunction.
The power rear gate operates only when all of the following conditions are satisfied. . The vehicle is stopped completely. . The outside temperature is within a range from -228F to 1408F (from -308C to 608C). . The ignition switch is in the "OFF" or "ACC" position. Or, the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is in the "P" position.
We recommend using the power rear gate function in most circumstances instead of manual operation.
NOTE
. The rear gate may not move smoothly when the battery power becomes low. . Do not press the power rear gate button repeatedly while the power rear gate is operating. Otherwise, the system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged. . If the vehicle starts to move while the power rear gate is operating, the system sounds a buzzer and closes the rear gate automatically. At this time, if the system detects jamming, it will

deactivate the power rear gate and the rear gate will not be closed. If this occurs, close the rear gate manually. For details, refer to "Manual Rear Gate" FP151. . If you try to open the rear gate using the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate using the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear gate will not open. Wait for a while before trying to open the rear gate via the power rear gate function. . If either of the operating conditions has not been satisfied while operating the power rear gate, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate will be deactivated. In this case, the rear gate may stop opening or closing suddenly.

! Operation
NOTE

s02aj0111

. The rear gate will remain unlocked

even after closing it. Always lock the rear gate when leaving the vehicle.

. If you cannot open/close the rear gate by performing the operation described here, a short electronic chirp

will sound three times (beep, beep, beep). In this case, perform the initiali-

zation of the power rear gate. Refer to

"Initialization of power rear gate" FP158.
! By the power rear gate button (other than the buttons on the rear gate)
s02aj011101
2
Power rear gate button on the instrument panel
CONTINUED

Keys and Doors

154 Rear Gate (Outback)

Power rear gate button on the access key fob
To open the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate will open automatically. Then an electronic chirp and the hazard warning flashers will operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate button on the instrument panel: sounds and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate button on the access key fob: sounds and flashes four times.
NOTE
. While the rear gate is locked, you cannot open the rear gate by operating the power rear gate button on the

instrument panel. In such a case, unlock the rear gate before operating the power rear gate button. . The factory setting (default setting) of the operation for the " " button on the access key fob or the transmitter is pressing and holding. This setting can be changed to non-operation or pressing twice at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close. You can open the rear gate by pressing the power rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open.
To close the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you briefly press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

! By the buttons on the rear gate s02aj011102
NOTE
After performing the following procedures, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

Rear Gate (Outback) 155

. Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button

again, the rear gate will close. You can

open the rear gate by pressing the power

rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

Keys and Doors

Rear gate opener button

Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate 1) Power rear gate lock button 2) Power rear gate button
To open the rear gate: 1. For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", carry the access key fob. For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", unlock the rear gate. 2. Briefly press the rear gate opener button when the rear gate is closed.
The rear gate will open automatically.
To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press either of the following buttons while the rear gate is being opened. . Rear gate opener button

NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open.
To close the rear gate: Briefly press either of the following buttons. . Rear gate opener button
CONTINUED

156 Rear Gate (Outback)

. Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

To Lock the doors using the power rear gate lock button:
Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. All doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked, and the rear gate will be closed. Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

NOTE
. By pushing the power rear gate lock button for more than 2 seconds, all doors are locked, however, the auto closing function of the rear gate will be canceled. . If any of the doors is not fully closed, the electronic chirp sounds five times to alert you that the doors are not properly closed.

! By manual operation To open the rear gate:

s02aj011103

Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate is

at the midway position. The rear gate will

open automatically.

To close the rear gate: Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate is opened. The rear gate will close automatically.
NOTE
. If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may not operate automatically open or close. . When leaving the vehicle, make sure that all doors and the rear gate are completely locked.
! Memory function The preferred rear gate height cas0n2aj0b10e1 registered.
! Registration of the rear gate height
s02aj010101
To register the rear gate height, perform the following procedures. 1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the preferable height.

1) Power rear gate button
2. Press and hold the power rear gate button to register the height. An electronic chirp sounds and the hazard warning flashes for confirmation.
The rear gate will stop at the registered position when the memory function is on.
NOTE
. Register the rear gate height to turn on the "Power Rear Gate Memory" automatically. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. . To change the registered height, perform the registering procedure again. . It is possible to register the height from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more

Rear Gate (Outback) 157

from the completely closed position.
! Deactivation of the memory function
s02aj010103
Deactivate the memory function to open the rear gate fully. Perform either of the following operation to deactivate the memory function. Deactivate the "Power Rear Gate Memory" function on the center information display (CID). Refer to "Car settings" FP220. Register the position of the rear gate at the fully open position.
! Utilizing the memorized rear gate height
s02aj010102
To open the rear gate and stop it at the registered height, perform the following procedure. 1. Check that "Power Rear Gate Memory" is on. Refer to "Car settings" FP220. 2. Press and hold any of the power rear gate button.
NOTE
The rear gate will open to the position that is stored in the memory function even if the rear gate is opened by the reverse function.

! Reverse function WARNING

s02aj0102

. Do not let parts of your body get caught when operating the reverse function. If the reverse function does not operate for some reason, this may lead to serious injury or accidents.
. The reverse function may not operate if foreign objects are caught in the rear gate just before it closes completely. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.
. The reverse function may not operate depending on the object shape and the manner in which it was caught. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.

CAUTION . If the reverse function is operated
3 times consecutively, automatic opening and closing of the power rear gate function will be canceled and the rear gate will stop opening or closing suddenly.

However, the rear gate may open or close depending on the rear gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that the rear gate does not hit anyone's head or face, etc. and that
fingers and baggage, etc. are not 2
caught in it. . Take care not to damage the
touch sensors. Otherwise, the reverse function may cease to operate.
If, while opening or closing using power rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate will operate as follows.
When opening the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically open.

Keys and Doors

CONTINUED

158 Rear Gate (Outback)

1) Touch sensor
Touch sensors are attached on the left and right edges of the rear gate. If the touch sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc. while closing by the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3 times and the rear gate will open automatically.
NOTE
When the rear gate is opened using the reverse function, it will be opened fully or to the height registered in the memory function.
! Rear gate drop prevention function If, while fully opened via the powesr02raej01a0r4 gate function, the rear gate is lowered by the weight of snow and such, an electronic

chirp will sound and the rear gate drop prevention function will apply braking to the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid closure of the rear gate.
NOTE
. If there is snow on the rear gate, only use the power rear gate function after removing the snow. . If you close the rear gate manually just after the rear gate is fully opened using the power rear gate function, the rear gate drop prevention function will detect a rapid closure of the rear gate and apply braking to the rear gate. In this case, this is not a malfunction.
! Selecting audible signal operation Using an electronic chirp, the powesr02raej01a0r9 gate will give you an audible signal before starting its operation. If desired, the audible signal can be turned off by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", you can also turn the audible signal off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal also works as the audible signal settings

for the "remote keyless entry system" and the "keyless access with push-button start system". However, for the electronic chirp such as that caused by "Reverse function" FP157 or "Rear gate drop prevention function" FP158, it cannot be set as nonoperational.
! Initialization of power rear gate If the power rear gate detects ss0o2amj011e2 abnormality while operating, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate operation will be automatically stopped in either opening or closing position. In this case, the system needs to be initialized in the following order to restart the function properly.
! If the power rear gate is closed s02aj011201

Rear Gate (Outback) 159

1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener button until it is unlocked (for approximately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate. 2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed. 3. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.
! If the power rear gate is opened s02aj011202
1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed. If the rear gate will not close completely, keep pressing the rear gate opener button for approximately 5 seconds and pull down the rear gate. 2. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.
CAUTION
If the power rear gate function does not operate properly, have your vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
! Hands-free Power Rear Gate function
The Hands-free Power Rear Gate funs0c2atij0o11n3 enables the rear gate to be opened

automatically by holding a hand over the rear emblem. This function can be deactivated using the Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch. Refer to "Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch" FP160.
CAUTION Do not remove the rear emblem or decorate it or the area around it. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function. To open the rear gate via the function, perform the following steps.
1. When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, carry the access key fob.

2. Move your hand slowly toward the rear emblem and hold it there until a electronic chirp sounds. 3. Immediately after the electronic chirp sounds, move your hand away. 4. The rear gate will open automatically.
2
NOTE
. It is possible to open the rear gate by moving close to the rear emblem. . The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function will not operate when the rear gate has already been opened. . If any of the following are performed before automatically opening the power rear gate, the operation will be canceled.
Your hand is not properly held over the rear emblem for approxi-
CONTINUED

Keys and Doors

160 Rear Gate (Outback)

mately 2 seconds or more. Touching the rear emblem . The rear gate may suddenly open under the following circumstances if someone is holding the access key fob near the vehicle. Washing the vehicle by hand and/ or machine. There is an object rearward of the vehicle in a narrow space. Attaching a carrier on the backside of the vehicle Attaching a trailer Removing snow
Take the access key fob out of the operation range or turn off the function when you do not want to activate the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function. Refer to "Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch" FP160. . The Hands-free Power Rear Gate function may not operate properly in the following conditions.
In heavy rain The rear gate is very dirty. The vehicle is covering by snow. Hands and arms may not be detected because of clothing. The system of the vehicle cannot detect the access key fob.

In those cases, push the rear gate opener button to open. ! Hands-free Power Rear Gate off
switch s02aj0114

Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch status 1) Inactive 2) Active
Pressing the Hands-free Power Rear Gate off switch deactivates the Hands-free Power Rear Gate function.

Moonroof 161

2-11. Moonroof (If Equipped)
s02ak
WARNING
Never let anyone's hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or turns sharply or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, you must conform to the following instructions without exception. . Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one's hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof. . Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-entrapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function does not operate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be sure to confirm that it is safe to do so before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close, have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions. The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

& Moonroof Switches
! Tilting moonroof

s02ak02 s02ak0201

Keys and Doors

The tilting up function will only operate when the moonroof is fully closed. The laying down function will only operate when the moonroof is tilted.
To tilt up the moonroof: Press and hold the moonroof switch.
To lay down the moonroof: Slide and hold the moonroof switch forward.
CAUTION
Release the switch after the moonroof has been tilted or has been laid down completely. Pressing the
CONTINUED

162 Moonroof

switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTE
One-touch operation does not take place when the moonroof is lowered. Press the switch continuously to lower the moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

s02ak0202

1) Open 2) Close
To open the moonroof: When the moonroof switch is slid and held backward, the moonroof will open, then stop slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully open the moonroof.
To close the moonroof: When the moonroof switch is slid and held to the close side, the moonroof will fully close.
To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the moonroof switch either way.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.
! Anti-entrapment function When the moonroof senses a subsst0a2nakt0i2a03l enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicle's roof during closure, it automatically moves to the open side and stop. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

& Sunshade

s02ak05

The sunshade can be slid forward or backward by hand while the moonroof is closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade also moves back.

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System) .s.0.3....................... 168 Key Positions ..................................................... 168 Key Reminder Chime .......................................... 169 Ignition Switch Light........................................... 169
3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System) .......................... 170 Safety Precautions.............................................. 170 Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 170 Switching Power Status ...................................... 171 When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly ........................................................... 172
3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher................................. 172 3-4. Meters and Gauges ........................................ 173
Speedometer ...................................................... 173 Tachometer......................................................... 173 Odometer ........................................................... 173 Double Trip Meter ............................................... 174
Fuel Gauge......................................................... 174 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................... 175 Combination Meter Settings ................................ 175 3-5. Illumination Brightness Control .................... 175 Auto Dimmer Cancel Function ............................ 176 3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights ........................ 177 Seatbelt Warning Light and Chime ...................... 177 SRS Airbag System Warning Light ...................... 181 Front Passenger's Frontal Airbag ON and OFF
Indicators ......................................................... 181 CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction
Indicator Light .................................................. 182
Charge Warning Light ......................................... 183

Instruments and Controls
Oil Pressure Warning Light ................................ 183 Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indicator ............. 183 AT OIL TEMP Warning Light ............................... 184 Low Tire Pressure Warning Light (U.S.-Spec.
Models)............................................................ 184 ABS Warning Light............................................. 185 Brake System Warning Light .............................. 186 Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light............. 187
Auto Vehicle Hold ON Indicator Light ................. 188 3
Auto Vehicle Hold Operation Indicator Light ....... 188 Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................... 189 Door Open Indicator........................................... 189 Engine Hood Open Warning Light ...................... 189 Windshield Washer Fluid Warning Light ............. 189 All-Wheel Drive Warning Light ............................ 189 Power Steering Warning Light ............................ 189 Vehicle Dynamics Control Warning Light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control Operation Indicator Light ................................................................ 190 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light .... 191 Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped) ........................................ 191 Security Indicator Light ...................................... 196 SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped) ................ 197 Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator ................... 197 Turn Signal Indicator Lights ............................... 197 High Beam Indicator Light.................................. 197 High Beam Assist Indicator ................................ 197 Automatic Headlight Beam Leveler Warning Light ................................................................ 198 LED Headlight Warning Light ............................. 198

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF Indicator Light ................................................................ 198
Steering Responsive Headlight Warning Light ..... 198 Headlight Indicator Light..................................... 198 Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped)....... 198 Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow) ............... 198 Auto Start Stop OFF Indicator Light .................... 198 Auto Start Stop Indicator Light (Green) ............... 199 Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected Indicator
Light ................................................................ 199 X-MODE Indicator (Outback) ............................... 199 Hill Descent Control Indicator (Outback) ............. 199 BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator (If Equipped).......... 199 BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator (If Equipped)................ 199 Icy Road Surface Warning Indicator .................... 200 RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)................... 200 RAB OFF Indicator (If Equipped) ......................... 200 Driver Monitoring System Operation Indicator
Light (Green) (If Equipped)................................ 200 Driver Monitoring System Warning Light
(Yellow) (If Equipped)........................................ 200 Driver Monitoring System OFF Indicator Light
(If Equipped)..................................................... 200 Driver Monitoring System Temporary Stop
Indicator Light (If Equipped).............................. 200 Sonar Audible Alarm OFF Indicator
(If Equipped)..................................................... 201 3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) ...... 201
Basic Operation.................................................. 202 Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and
Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen ............... 202 Warning Screen .................................................. 203

Meter Information Screen ................................... 203 Telltale Screen ................................................... 204 Basic Screens .................................................... 205
Digital Speed Screen .......................................... 208 3-8. Center Information Display (CID) ...................209
Features ............................................................ 209 Welcome Screen ................................................ 209 Good-Bye Screen ............................................... 210 Interruption Screen ............................................ 210 Touch Screen Operations ................................... 210 11.6-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ............... 211 Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models (If Equipped) ......... 232
3-9. Clock ................................................................245 Setting the Clock Manually ................................. 245 Setting the Clock Automatically.......................... 246
3-10. Light Control Switch .....................................248 Headlights ......................................................... 248
High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer) ...................... 250 Headlight Flasher ............................................... 250 High Beam Assist Function ................................ 251 Daytime Running Light System .......................... 254 3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) .........254 3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler................................255 3-13. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped) ..........256 3-14. Turn Signal Lever ..........................................256 One-Touch Lane Changer ................................... 257 3-15. Wiper and Washer .........................................257 Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches ............. 258 Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch
(Outback) ......................................................... 260

3-16. Defogger and Deicer..................................... 261 3-17. Mirrors ........................................................... 263
Inside Mirror (without Auto-Dimming Function) (If Equipped)..................................................... 263
Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink® (If Equipped)..................................................... 263

Instruments and Controls Outside Mirrors .................................................. 271
3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .....................274 3-19. Heated Steering Wheel System
(If Equipped) ..................................................275 3-20. Horn................................................................276
3

Instruments and Controls

168 Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

3-1. Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)
s03aa
WARNING . Never turn the ignition switch to
"LOCK" while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much greater effort than usual to steer. . Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.
CAUTION Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on it as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position when the engine is not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position can cause the battery to go dead. . If the ignition switch will not move from the "LOCK" position to the "ACC" position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

& Key Positions

Position

Description

s03aa11

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.

ACC

In this position the electrical accessories (audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the en-

gine.

START

The engine is started in this position.

CAUTION Do not turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while the engine is running.

169 Ignition Switch (Models without Push-Button Start System)

. The engine may not start in the following cases:

der. The key is near or touching another transmitter.

NOTE
. To turn the key from the "ACC" to "LOCK" position, the select lever must be in the "P" position and the key must be pushed in and turned. . If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once (the security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key again and turn it to the "START" position again to restart the engine.

The key grip is touching another key or a metallic key holder. The key is near another key that contains an immobilizer transpon-

& Key Reminder Chime
The reminder chime sounds whens03taha0e5 driver's door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position. 3
The chime stops under the following conditions. . The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. . The key is removed from the ignition switch. . The driver's door is closed.
& Ignition Switch Light
For easy access to the ignition switcs0h3aai0n6 the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when driver's door is opened or when the driver's door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and gradually turns off under the following conditions. . The driver's door is closed. . The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

170 Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

The light gradually turns off under the following conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
. The doors are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with PushButton Start System)
s03bg
& Safety Precautions
Refer to "Safety Precautions" FP116s.03bg04
& Operating Range for PushButton Start System
s03bg01

Legacy 1) Antennas 2) Operating range

Outback 1) Antennas 2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch and the engine start cannot be operated. . Even when the access key fob is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine. . Do not leave the access key fob in the following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the engine start.
On the instrument panel

171 Push-Button Ignition Switch (Models with Push-Button Start System)

On the floor Inside the glove box Inside the door trim pocket On the rear seat On the rear shelf (Legacy) Inside the trunk (Legacy) At the corner of the cargo area (Outback) . When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in "Access Key Fob If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly" FP465. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" FP526.

& Switching Power Status s03bg02
1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch The power status is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed. 1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the driver's seat. 2. Make sure the select lever is in the "P" position. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of "OFF", "ACC", "ON" and "OFF". When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON", the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates in orange.

Power status

Indicator color

Operation

OFF

Turned off

Power is turned off.

ACC

Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

Turned off

used.

(while engine is

running)

Instruments and Controls

CAUTION
. To prevent the vehicle battery from discharging, do not leave the push-button ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position for a long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe the following precautions. Do not spill drinks or other liquids on the push-button ignition switch.

CONTINUED

172 Hazard Warning Flasher

Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand that is soiled with oil or other contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch does not operate smoothly, stop the operation. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface of the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way. . If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off. . If the indicator light on the pushbutton ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.
! Battery drainage prevention function
When the push-button ignition switchs0i3sbgl0e20f1t in the "ACC" or "ON" position for approximately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to "OFF" to prevent the battery from going dead. This function is activated when the select lever is in the "P" position.
& When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob If Accesss0K3beg0y3 Fob Does Not Operate Properly" FP465.

3-3. Hazard Warning Flasher
s03ab
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works with the ignition switch in any position. To turn on the hazard warning flasher, press the hazard warning flasher switch on the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, press the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

Meters and Gauges 173

3-4. Meters and Gauges
s03ad
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in some of the meters and gauges in the combination meter. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehs0i3cadl0e3 speed.
NOTE
The initial movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position can be activated or deactivated. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0inch display models).

& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine sps0e3aed0d6 in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
The initial movement of the meter needles and gauge needles that occurs when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position can be activated or deactivated. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0inch display models).

& Odometer

s03ad04

Instruments and Controls

3
1) TRIP RESET switch 2) Odometer This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. The indicators will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.

CONTINUED

174 Meters and Gauges

& Double Trip Meter

s03ad05

To reset the trip meter, select either the A trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the TRIP RESET switch.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

& Fuel Gauge

s03ad07

1) TRIP RESET switch 2) Trip meter
This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since you last set it to zero.
The display can be switched as shown in the following sequence by pressing the TRIP RESET switch.

NOTE
. If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost. . If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is possible to switch between the A trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. In addition, it is possible to reset the trip meter by pressing and holding the TRIP RESET switch. The indicators will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/ "OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge shows "E" even if the fuel tank contains fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel level movement in the tank (e.g., during braking, turning or acceleration).
NOTE
. You will see the " " sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle. . If you press the TRIP RESET switch while the ignition switch is in the

Illumination Brightness Control 175

"LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.
& Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
s03ad08
1) Normal operating range The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Refer to "Engine Overheating" FP460.
& Combination Meter Settings
Meter settings can be set on the ces0n3atde1r6 information display. For details, perform the procedures described in "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

3-5. Illumination Brightness Control
s03aj
3
The illumination brightness of the combination meter and center information display dims under the following conditions. . The light switch is in the " " or " " position when the ambient light is dark. . The light switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically. You can adjust the illumination brightness for better visibility. To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

176 Illumination Brightness Control

NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all. . The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. . The operation method of illumination brightness will differ depending whether or not "Brightness Dial" in the center information display is on. Refer to the operation method indicated the following table.

"Brightness Dial" is on.

Operational item

Combination meter

Center information dis-
play

Control dial Available Available

"Brightness"*1

on the center Not avail- Not avail-

information

able

display

"Brightness Dial" is off.

Operational item

Combination meter

Center information dis-
play

Control dial

Available

Not available

"Brightness" on the center information
display

Not available

Available

*1: When "Brightness Dial" is on, "Brightness" on the center information display is not available.
For details about "Brightness Dial" on/ off settings, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0inch display models).

& Auto Dimmer Cancel Function
When the ambient light is bright, s0t3haj0e1 illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust the illumination brightness by using the control dial. When the ambient light is dark, you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.
The operational/non-operational setting and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

Warning and Indicator Lights 177

3-6. Warning and Indicator Lights
s03ae
Several of the warning and indicator lights illuminate momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the "ON" position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. For the system check, the following lights illuminate and turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front passenger's seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger fastens the seatbelt.)
: Rear seatbelt warning light
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light
: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/ Malfunction indicator light

: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Electronic parking brake indicator light
: Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.spec. models)
: Low fuel warning light
: Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
: Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system. Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

& Seatbelt Warning Light

and Chime

s03ae01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's and passenger's seats, as required by current safety standards.

! Driver's and front passenger's seats With the ignition switch turned to thes0"3Oae0N11"4

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Instruments and Controls

Driver's seat CONTINUED

178 Warning and Indicator Lights

Front passenger's seat (dual 7.0-inch display models) Front passenger's seat (11.6-inch display models)

! Operation s03ae011401
When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the driver's and/or front passenger's warning light will illuminate, then it will blink for several seconds. If the seatbelt of the driver's seat is not fastened, the warning chime may make a peep sound.
NOTE
. If the driver's and/or front passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened while driving, the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.
The warning light will illuminate when driving approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. The warning light will blink, and the warning chime will make a peep sound when driving between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The warning chime will stop when the vehicle stops. The warning light will blink, and the warning chime will sound loudly when 15 seconds have elapsed while driving between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound loudly when driving approximately more than 13 mph (20 km/h). . The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened. . The seatbelt warning system can be cancelled. However, when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position after it is turned to the "OFF" position, the warning system settings will be restored. For details about the warning cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front passenger's seat, the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat will be deactivated. The front passenger's seatbelt warning system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passenger's seat.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to fail. . Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seatback. . Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.

Warning and Indicator Lights 179

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Front Seats" FP28.
If the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passenger's seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant, although we strongly recommend that all children sit in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front passenger's seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

! Rear passenger's seats

s03ae0115

Rear seatbelt warning light (dual 7.0-inch display models) 1) Rear left seat 2) Rear center seat 3) Rear right seat

3
Rear seatbelt warning light (11.6-inch display models) 1) Rear left seat 2) Rear center seat 3) Rear right seat With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning light and chime reminds the rear passenger to fasten their seatbelt by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the above illustration and sounding a chime.
WARNING
. The driver must check that the all passengers have fastened their seatbelts properly since the seatbelt warning system may not detect passengers under the fol CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

180 Warning and Indicator Lights

lowing circumstances. When cushions or child re-
straint systems, etc., are used. When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat. . Observe the following precau-
tions Do not apply any strong im-
pact to the rear seat. Do not fold the seatback for-
ward when objects are on the seat. Do not spill liquid on the rear seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately. Do not remove or disassemble the rear seat.
NOTE
. The seatbelt warning system of the rear seat detects if the seat is occupied by a passenger. Heavy cargo or large pets on the rear seat may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to loading cargo or large pets will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime.

. When folding the rear seat, ensure that the seat is empty prior to folding. Items caught between the seat bottom and seatback, when folded, may damage the seat surface or activate the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime.
! Operation s03ae011501
If passengers in the rear seats do not fasten their seatbelts while the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not fastened.
NOTE
. If the rear passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened while driving, the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.
The warning light will illuminate when driving approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less. When driving approximately between 6 mph (10 km/h) and 12.5 mph (20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not fastened for 50 seconds, the seatbelt warning lights will blink and a warning chime will sound.

The chime will make a peep sound for 15 seconds, and it then will become louder and continue for 35 seconds. The warning light will blink for 50 seconds, then it will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop.
When driving more than approximately 12.5 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts are not fastened for 35 seconds, the warning lights of the unfastened seatbelts will blink and a chime will sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts are not fastened after 35 seconds, the blinking warning light will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop. The warning lights will continue to illuminate until their seatbelts are fastened. . The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened. . The seatbelt warning light can be cancelled. However, when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position after it is turned to the "OFF" position, the warning system settings will be restored. For details about the warning cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.

& SRS Airbag System

Warning Light

s03ae02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbag system. . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light . No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position . Continuous illumination of the warning light . Illumination of the warning light while driving Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS airbags will operate improperly (e.g. SRS airbags may inflate in a very minor collision or not inflate in a severe collision), which may increase the risk of injury.

For details about the components monitored by the warning light, refer to "SRS Airbag System Monitors" FP107.

& Front Passenger's Frontal

Airbag ON and OFF Indica-

tors

NOTE

s03ae03

For details about the operating conditions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer to "SUBARU Advanced Frontal Airbag System, SRS Seat Cushion Airbag, SRS Side Airbag and SRS Curtain Airbag" FP86.

Warning and Indicator Lights 181
3
Dual 7.0-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

182 Warning and Indicator Lights

11.6-inch display models : Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator : Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator
The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located as shown in the illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will remain off while the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE

Warning Light/Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light

s03ae04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light illuminates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is at least one problem or potential problem somewhere in the emission control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly If the light illuminates constantly s0w3ahe0i4l0e1 driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light turn off immediately. It may take several driving

Warning and Indicator Lights 183

trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking If the light is blinking while drivinsg03,ae0a40n2 engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should conform to the following instructions. . Reduce vehicle speed. . Avoid hard acceleration. . Avoid steep uphill grades. . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible. . Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible (Outback).
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge Warning Light s03ae05
If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Oil Pressure Warning Light

s03ae06

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on. This may cause serious engine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
For details about checking the engine oil level or adding the engine oil, refer to "Engine Oil" FP491.

& Engine Low Oil Level

Warning Indicator

s03ae58

Instruments and Controls

This indicator appears when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit.
If the warning indicator appears, check the engine oil level on a level surface. When the engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to 3
"Engine Oil" FP491. After adding or changing the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a level surface, then start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm that the warning indicator has turned off after the engine has started. If the warning indicator does not turn off after refilling the engine oil, or the indicator appears even though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the system just after turning the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. If the oil level is below the lower limit when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the engine low oil level warning indicator will turn on. . When the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, the engine low oil level warning indicator may not illuminate even if the oil level is below the lower
CONTINUED

184 Warning and Indicator Lights

limit to avoid erroneous lighting.

& AT OIL TEMP Warning Light

s03ae07

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

! Transmission control system warning
If the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light flsa03sahe0e70s1 after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is not working properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light (U.S.-

Spec. Models)

s03ae08

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all tires are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING
If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur. 1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed. 2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pres-

Warning and Indicator Lights 185

sure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
CAUTION The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire inflation pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph (32 km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few minutes later. Therefore, be sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires.

& ABS Warning Light

s03ae09

CAUTION

Instruments and Controls

. If any of the following conditions occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the first available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer. The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, but it does not turn off even after starting the vehicle. The warning light illuminates during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and brake system warning light is off), the ABS function shuts down; however, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

CONTINUED

186 Warning and Indicator Lights

The ABS warning light illuminates together with the brake system warning light if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Brake System Warning Light" FP186.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions, the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off immediately, remaining off. . The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, but it turns off while driving. . The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the engine is jump started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will turn off.

& Brake System Warning Light
s03ae10
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light illuminates, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" FP366.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning light illuminates, if the warning light

behavior is as described in the following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.
The warning light turns off when the electronic parking brake is applied or released. The warning light turns off when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position again. . The brake system warning light may illuminate immediately after the engine is started. However, it is not malfunctioning if the warning light turns off after the electronic parking brake is released. . The brake system warning light may illuminate after the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turns off after a short period of time. . When the engine is started while the electronic parking brake is applied/ released, the system may judge an abnormal situation and the warning light may illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, turn the ignition switch once to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and then restart the engine. Then, apply/release the electronic parking brake. If the warning light turns off,

Warning and Indicator Lights 187

the system will be restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning This light illuminates when the brakse03afleu10i0d2 level has dropped to near the "MIN" level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the "ON" position and with the parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in "ON"), it could be an indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid level is below the "MIN" mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning
If the warning light remains on even ths0o3aue1g00h3 the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic parking brake system warning
The brake system warning light illumsi0n3aaet1e00s4 when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the warning light illuminates, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" FP366.
! Frequent operation warning s03ae100403
The brake system warning light illuminates and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.

& Electronic Parking

Brake Indicator Light

s03ae85

! Parking brake indicator The light illuminates with the parkingsb03raae8k50e1 applied while the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

! Electronic parking brake system warning
s03ae8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic parking brake while the engine is running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off. 3
However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe location immediately and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer. . If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. . If the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" FP366.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

188 Warning and Indicator Lights

NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the electronic parking brake applied, the electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off. . When the electronic parking brake switch is pulled to apply the electronic parking brake while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates, remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off. . Even if the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, if the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.
The indicator light turns off when the electronic parking brake is released. . The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash immediately after the engine is started. However, it is not malfunctioning if the indicator light turns off after the electronic parking brake is released. . The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash after the electronic

parking brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turns off after a short period of time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the indicator light flashes, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" FP366.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warning
s03ae850201
The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is operated when the parking brake cannot be applied.
! Frequent operation warning s03ae850202
The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Auto Vehicle Hold ON

Indicator Light

s03ae94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light does not illuminate even when "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" is touched to activate the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning.

This indicator light illuminates when the Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" FP368.

& Auto Vehicle Hold Operation Indicator Light s03ae95
This indicator light illuminates while the vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" FP368.

Warning and Indicator Lights 189

& Low Fuel Warning Light s03ae11
The low fuel warning light illuminates when the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

& Door Open Indicator

s03ae61

When any of the doors, the rear gate (Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not fully closed, the door open indicator appears. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position or the key is removed from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

The open door is indicated by the corresponding part of the door open indicator.

Always make sure this indicator does not appear before you start to drive.

& Engine Hood Open

Warning Light

s03ae98

The warning light illuminates if the engine hood is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.

& Windshield Washer

Fluid Warning Light

s03ae42

This light appears when the fluid level in the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& All-Wheel Drive Warn-

ing Light

s03ae13

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage. If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe location and then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason.

Instruments and Controls

NOTE If the temporary spare tire is used, the 3
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time necessary. Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires of different diameters fitted on its wheels or with the air pressure excessively low in any of its tires.

& Power Steering Warn-

ing Light

s03ae53

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering
CONTINUED

190 Warning and Indicator Lights

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating. . The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking. . The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time. At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently, that may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol Warning Light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

Operation Indicator

Light

s03ae14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
s03ae1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and ABS are inoperative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving in this condition, but drive carefully and have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully operational. . The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately. . The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. . The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal. . The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turns off

Warning and Indicator Lights 191

immediately and remains off. . The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns off while the vehicle is subsequently being driven. . The warning light illuminates during driving, but turns off immediately and remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
The indicator light flashes during actisv0a3atei1o40n2 of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon as the engine has warmed up. . The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light s03ae15
The light illuminates when "Vehicle Dynamics Control" is selected to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately. . The light does not illuminate while the system check. . The light does not turn off even after a period of approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the "ON" position.

& Warning Chimes and Warning Indicator of the Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System (If Equipped)
s03ae55
3
Access key warning indicator The keyless access with push-button start system is equipped with a warning chime and the access key warning indicator in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft. When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning indicator appears, take the appropriate action. You cannot turn the warning chimes off. However, the volume setting of the outside warning chime can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

192 Warning and Indicator Lights
dealer for details. WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel is not released and could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION . When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green, there could be a steering lock malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning for engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions. . When the access key fob is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key takeout warning or passenger access key takeout warning will not be provided.

! List of warnings CAUTION

s03ae5504

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warning indicator does not appear, take the appropriate action.

Warning and Indicator Lights 193

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button
ignition switch

Status

Action

Ding, ding ... (intermittent)

Ding

Short beep (2 seconds)

The driver's door is opened while the pushbutton ignition switch is "ACC" and the select lever is in the "P" position.

Switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF", or close the driver's door. When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".

The push-button ignition switch is switched to "OFF" while the driver's door is open.

Close the driver's door.

Lockout warning: The doors are locked by following methods when an access key fob is left in the car. . The door is closed when the lock lever of
the door is in the lock position. . The door is closed when the power door
locking switch is in the lock position.

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors. The doors cannot be locked while the access key fob is inside the vehicle. A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will be unlocked.

Instruments and Controls

Short beep (2 seconds)

Access key lock-in warning:

Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,

The door lock sensor is touched while the and lock the doors. push-button ignition switch is "OFF" and the If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

doors cannot be locked.

Beep, beep,

beep, beep,

beep (5 times)

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.

ignition switch is in the "OFF" position and If one of the doors including the rear gate is

one of the doors including the rear gate is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

opened.

Ding

Long beep (60 seconds max.)

Power warning:

Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,

The door lock sensor is touched while you or switch the push-button ignition switch to

are carrying the access key fob, the push- "OFF". button ignition switch is in a position other If the push-button ignition switch is not

than "OFF" and the select lever is in the "P" switched to "OFF", the doors cannot be

position.

locked.

Ding, ding ... (7 seconds)

Access key warning: The vehicle is driven while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.

CONTINUED

194 Warning and Indicator Lights

Inside warning chime Ding Ding Ding
Long beep (continuous)
Long beep (continuous)

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button
ignition switch

Status

Action

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch is pressed Carry the access key fob, and press the while the access key fob is not inside the push-button ignition switch.

vehicle.

Beep, beep, beep (3 times)

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access

key fob and closes the driver's door while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to push-button ignition switch is in a position "OFF", and get out of the vehicle.

other than "OFF" and the select lever is in the

"P" position.

Beep, beep, beep (3 times)

Passenger access key takeout warning:

A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the access key fob and closes a door other than the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than

Return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".

"OFF".

Long beep (continuous)

Access key takeout without "P" position

warning:

The driver exits the vehicle with the access Shift the select lever to the "P" position,

key fob and closes the driver's door while the switch the push-button ignition switch to

push-button ignition switch is in a position "OFF" and exit the vehicle.

other than "OFF" and the select lever is in a

position other than the "P" position.

Select lever position warning:

. .

Case 1: The engine is turned off by pressing the push-button ignition switch

while the select lever is in a position other

than the "P" position.

Case 2: The driver's door is opened

while the push-button ignition switch is in

a position other than "OFF" and the

select lever is in a position other than the

Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the pushbutton ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the "P" position, switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF" and exit the vehicle.

"P" position.

Warning and Indicator Lights 195

Inside warning chime

Outside warning chime

Operation indicator on push-button
ignition switch

Status

Action

Ding

The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding

Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning: The engine start procedure is performed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and left lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding

System malfunction warning: Flashes in orange A malfunction is detected in the power
system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and have the vehicle inspected.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

196 Warning and Indicator Lights

& Security Indicator Light s03ae16
This indicator light shows the status of the alarm system. It also indicates operation of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system It blinks to show the driver the operas0t3ioaen16a01l status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm System" FP141.
! Immobilizer system The security indicator light starts blsi0n3akei1n60g2 in the following conditions.
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system": . Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position. . Immediately after the driver's door is opened or closed when all of the following conditions are met.
The push-button ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is not switched to "ON" and the security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system": . Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. . Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunctioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to "Immobilizer" FP131.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.
Models with "keyless access with push-button start system": While the engine is running The push-button ignition switch has been turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position and the driver's

door has not been opened or closed
Models without "keyless access with push-button start system": While the engine is running For approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such as the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.

Warning and Indicator Lights 197

& SI-DRIVE Indicator Light (If Equipped)
s03ae52
SI-DRIVE indicator light 1) Intelligent (I) mode 2) Sport Sharp (S#) mode This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE mode. For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to "SI-DRIVE" FP353.

& Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator
s03ae43
1) Upshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator 3) Select lever/gear position indicator The select lever position is displayed on the indicator. ! Upshift/downshift indicator When the manual mode is selectesd03,aet4h30e5 gear position indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the available upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" FP351.

& Turn Signal Indicator

Lights

s03ae20

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to "Replacing Bulbs" FP518.

& High Beam Indicator Light

s03ae21

This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when operating the headlight flasher.

Instruments and Controls

& High Beam Assist Indi-

cator

s03ae83

This indicator appears when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to "High Beam Assist Function" FP251.

CONTINUED

198 Warning and Indicator Lights

& Automatic Headlight

Beam Leveler Warning

Light

s03ae33

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does not turn off approximately 3 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

& LED Headlight Warning

Light

s03ae76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF Indicator

Light

s03ae89

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight function is off. For details about the on/off setting, refer to "Car settings" FP220.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight Warning

Light

s03aeb2

The light flashes when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to "Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)" FP254.

& Headlight Indicator

Light

s03ae24

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions.
. The light switch is turned to the " " or " " position.
. The light switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

& Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Equipped) s03ae25
This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

& Auto Start Stop Warn-

ing Light (Yellow)

s03ae65

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning light is illuminated in yellow, there may be a

malfunction in the Auto Start Stop system. When starting the engine again after the Auto Start Stop warning light illuminates, if it is still illuminating, have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

The Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate in yellow if you open the engine hood when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine will not be automatically restarted, even if you release the brake pedal. Use normal operation to restart the engine.

& Auto Start Stop OFF

Indicator Light

s03aeb3

This light will illuminate when "Auto Start Stop" is touched to prevent the Auto Start Stop system from operating. It will turn off when "Auto Start Stop" is touched once more to enable operation of the Auto Start Stop system. For details about the setting, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Setting of the upper display" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

Warning and Indicator Lights 199

CAUTION If the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light does not illuminate when "Auto Start Stop" is touched, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

& Auto Start Stop Indica-

tor Light (Green)

s03ae66

This indicator light illuminates when the engine has been temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off when the engine is restarted.

& Auto Start Stop No

Activity Detected Indi-

cator Light

s03aea3

When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator light illuminates when the operating condition of idling stop are not meet. The light will turn off when the vehicle starts driving. Refer to "Non-operational conditions" FP373.

& X-MODE Indicator (Outback) s03ae68
X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1) X-MODE indicator
X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes) 1) DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator 2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

This indicator appears while the X-MODE is activated. It will disappear when the X-MODE is deactivated. Refer to "To Activate/Deactivate the X-MODE" FP361.

& Hill Descent Control

Indicator (Outback)

s03ae69

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in standby. It will

flash while the hill descent control function

is operating. It will disappear when the hill

descent control function is not available.

Instruments and Controls

& BSD/RCTA Warning In-

dicator (If Equipped)

s03ae80

This warning indicator appears on the combination meter display (color LCD) when the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) or RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) is not functioning for any reason. For further details, refer to "BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator" FP390. If this indicator remains displayed, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF Indica-

tor (If Equipped)

s03ae86

This indicator appears on the combination meter display (color LCD) when "BSD/ RCTA" is touched to deactivate the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear

CONTINUED

200 Warning and Indicator Lights

Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/ RCTA is suspended temporarily. For details, refer to "BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator" FP389.

& Icy Road Surface

Warning Indicator

s03ae82

When the outside temperature is 378F (38C) or less, the icy road surface warning indicator will illuminate to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature in the area around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
While parking or driving at low speeds When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel) When starting the engine after being parked for a certain period of time . The icy road surface warning indicator should be treated only as a guide. Be sure to check the condition of the

road surface before driving. . Once the icy road surface warning indicator appears, it will not disappear unless the outside temperature has increased to 418F (58C) or higher.

& RAB Warning Indicator (If Equipped)
This indicator illuminates if the Revse03rase9e1 Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System" FP393.

& RAB OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae92

This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is turned OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is suspended temporarily. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System" FP393.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Operation Indicator

Light (Green) (If

Equipped)

s03aea4

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is activated. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)" FP412.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Warning Light (Yel-

low) (If Equipped)

s03aeb6

This warning light illuminates if the Driver Monitoring System malfunctions. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)" FP412.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF Indicator Light

(If Equipped)

s03aea5

This indicator illuminates when "Driver Monitoring System" is touched to deactivate the Driver Monitoring System. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light" FP412.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem Temporary Stop In-

dicator Light (If

Equipped)

s03aea6

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light" FP412.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) 201

NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances. . The temperature of the Driver Monitoring System unit is high.

& Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF Indicator (If

Equipped)

s03ae93

This indicator illuminates when the sonar audible alarm is turned OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" FP220.

3-7. Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)
s03bn
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the combination meter display (color LCD) while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the combination meter display (color LCD) interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the combination meter display (color LCD). Also, a warning message will appear on the display if a malfunction is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed.

3
Combination meter display (color LCD) 1) Meter information screen (Refer to "Me-
ter Information Screen" FP203.) 2) Warning screen (Refer to "Warning
Screen" FP203.)/Basic screen (Refer to "Basic Screens" FP205.) 3) EyeSight screen*
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

202 Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

4) Digital speed screen (Refer to "Digital Speed Screen" FP208.)
5) Telltale screen (Refer to "Telltale Screen" FP204.)
6) Select lever/gear position indicator (Refer to "Select Lever/Gear Position Indicator" FP197.)
7) X-MODE indicator (Outback) (Refer to "X-MODE Indicator (Outback)" FP199.) SI-DRIVE indicator (if equipped) (Refer to "SI-DRIVE Indicator Light" FP197.)
8) O d o m e t e r ( R e f e r t o " O d o m e t e r " FP173.)/Double trip meter (Refer to "Double Trip Meter" FP174.)
*: For details, refer to the separate EyeSight Owner's Manual.

& Basic Operation

s03bn01

Control switches 1) 2) 3)
By operating or of the control switches, the screens can be changed.
If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with on the display, pull the switch on the steering wheel toward you.
& Welcome Screen (Opening Animation) and Good-Bye (Ending Animation) Screen
Welcome screen and Good-bye scsr0e3ben0n8 are motion graphic displayed on the combination meter display and center information display upon entering and exiting the vehicle.
When the driver's door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the welcome screen (opening animation) will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the combination meter display (color LCD) gradually turns off by showing good-bye screen (ending animation).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the goodbye screen may differ in the actual words and appearance. . The basic screen will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is displayed.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) 203

. Once the welcome screen appears, it takes a certain period of time to display it again. . If the ignition switch is operated after unlocking the driver's door, the welcome screen will not appear even when the driver's door is opened and closed. . The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the driver's door by using the remote keyless entry system (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the welcome screen is displayed. . The welcome screen including the audio/navigation unit can be set to on or off. . The welcome screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . The good-bye screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

& Warning Screen

s03bn05

Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear on combination meter display (color LCD). Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.
& Meter Information Screen
The meter information screen cans03bbn1e2 changed. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

! ECO gauge

s03bn1201

Instruments and Controls

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset and the current rate of fuel consumption.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

"+" side

"-" side

MPG

Better

Poorer

l/100km

Poorer

Better

CONTINUED

204 Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication. . After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption is not shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). Until that time, the ECO gauge does not operate.

! Clock and temperature

s03bn1202

! Compass (if equipped)

s03bn1203

NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

& Telltale Screen

s03bn09

The direction of the vehicle is displayed. ! Driving range on remaining fuel
s03bn1204

This screen displays the clock and outside temperature.
For details about clock setting, refer to "Clock" FP245.

1) Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs, the following telltales will be displayed on the telltale screen.
NOTE
. When there is warning information to display, it will be displayed in five warning indicators, starting on the left

in ascending order of severity. . If there are 6 or more warning messages to display, the indicators will be displayed in sequential order.

Mark

Name

Page

Door open indicator light

189

Engine hood open warning light

189

LED headlight warning light

198

High beam assist indicator light

197

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator 198 light

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light

198

Engine low oil level warning lndicator

183

RAB warning light (if equipped)

200

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)

200

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)

199

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) 205

Mark

Name BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)

Page 199

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)

198

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light

198

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)

199

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator 199 light Automatic headlight beam leveler warning 198 light

Windshield washer fluid warning light

189

Hill descent control indicator light (Outback)

199

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator light (green) (if

200

equipped)

Driver Monitoring System warning light (yel- 200 low) (if equipped)

Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light 200 (if equipped)

Mark

Name Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)

Page 200

Icy road surface warning light

200

& Basic Screens

By operating the or switch ons03tbhn0e6

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

Instruments and Controls

AVG: Average fuel consumption : Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.
CONTINUED

206 Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

Driving information screen:

Auto Start Stop screen:

: Current fuel consumption : Driving range on remaining fuel
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

: Journey time : Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position) and journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position).

: The total amount of time that the engine was stopped by means of the Auto Start Stop system
: The total amount of fuel saved due to the engine being stopped by the Auto Start Stop system
The indicated values are calculated from the most recent reset of the currently displayed trip meter to the current time. The indication ranges are as follows. . Total amount of time: from 00'00@ to 9999h59'59@ . Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 gal to 9999.999 gal
NOTE
. When the trip meter is reset, the corresponding accumulated time and the amount of fuel saving are also reset.

Combination Meter Display (Color LCD) 207

. The time spent with the engine stopped by means of the Auto Start Stop system is also added to the journey time. TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
This screen displays each tire pressure. When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire and the tire pressure will be displayed on the screen in yellow.
NOTE
. The tire pressure values are displayed several minutes after driving. . You can set the tire pressure units. For details about setting the units, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

. Once the tire pressure monitoring system detects the low tire pressure, the tire pressure values will display in yellow until the system detects the normal tire pressure. . Immediately adjust the tire pressure when the warning light illuminates. When the tire pressure monitoring system detects the adjusted tire pressure, the warning light will turn off and the tire pressure values will turn to white. . For information about the specified value of the air pressure, refer to "Tires" FP536. Compass screen (if equipped):
The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Navigation screen (if equipped):
3
When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information. For details about the navigation system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

208 Combination Meter Display (Color LCD)

Audio screen:

Clock and outside temperature screen:

& Digital Speed Screen

s03bn11

The audio screen shows the status of audio information. For details about the audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

This screen displays the clock and outside temperature.
For details about clock setting, refer to "Clock" FP245.

1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped) 2) Vehicle speed
This screen displays the current vehicle speed.

Center Information Display (CID) 209

3-8. Center Information Display (CID)
s03bs
WARNING
Always pay attention to safe driving when operating the center information display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the center information display is disturbing your awareness and ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing operations on the display. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so could result in an accident.
& Features
All information is displayed on the ces0n3btse0r1 information display, including vehicle settings, vehicle status, navigation system (if equipped) operation, audio operation, and air conditioning operation.

Items
Interruption screen Vehicle status and maintenance information Vehicle settings Climate control operations Front View Monitor (if equipped)/ Rear view camera Navigation system
Audio/telephone
EyeSight

Page for 11.6-inch display models

Page for dual 7.0inch display models

210

211

239

216

234/237

216

234

347/379
Refer to the navigation/ audio Owner's Manual. Refer to the navigation/ audio Owner's Manual.
Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The center information display can also be used to set and initialize the center information display itself.
NOTE
. When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available. . The language and units for both the center information display and the

combination meter display (color LCD) can be changed. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Setting of the upper display" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . The images displayed in this Owner's Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on 3
the region and vehicle specifications.
& Welcome Screen
Welcome screen and Good-bye scsr0e3bes0n2 are motion graphic displayed on the combination meter display and center information display upon entering and exiting the vehicle. When the driver's door is opened and closed, the welcome screen will appear for a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is shown. . The welcome screen can be turned on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . For a certain period of time after the
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

210 Center Information Display (CID)

welcome screen has once appeared, it may not appear again even when the driver's door is opened and closed. This does not indicate a malfunction.
& Good-Bye Screen
The good-bye screen will be displas0y3bes0d8 under the following conditions. . The driver's door is opened after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position. . 3 minutes have passed after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position with the driver's door closed. . 10 minutes have passed when the hands-free phone is used after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position. . The battery voltage is low when the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.
& Interruption Screen
Useful messages, such as reminds0e3brss03, weather information (if equipped) and traffic information (if equipped) may interrupt the current screen and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. Take the proper action according to the message.

& Touch Screen Operations
The center information display has a tos0u3bcs0h4 screen. Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly.

! Touch

s03bs0401

Quickly touch and release once.

! Drag

s03bs0402

Touch the screen and move the screen to the desired position.

! Swipe

s03bs0403

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

Center Information Display (CID) 211

your finger.
NOTE
Swipe operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

& 11.6-Inch Display Models (If

Equipped)

NOTE

s03bs05

For dual 7.0-inch display models, refer to "Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models"

FP232.

! Touch screen

s03bs0501

1) HOME icon (Refer to "HOME icon" FP216.)
2) Status bar (Refer to "Status bar" FP211.) 3) Information bar (Refer to "Information
bar" FP212.)

4) Main screen (Refer to "Main screen"

FP216.)

5) Driver profiles icon (Refer to "Driver

profiles icon" FP216.)

6) Climate control screen (Refer to "Climate

control screen" FP216.)

7) Car settings icon (Refer to "Car settings

icon" FP214.)

8) Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon (Refer to

"Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon" FP214.) While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or

"ON" position, the touch panel will activate.

Instruments and Controls

! Status bar s03bs050101
The outside temperature and clock are displayed on the status bar.

NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
While parking or driving at low speeds When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel) When starting the engine after being parked for a certain period of time
CONTINUED

212 Center Information Display (CID)

. The temperature unit cannot be changed. . The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" FP245. . Touch the clock on the status bar to display the clock setting screen. Refer to "Clock" FP245. . For details about Bluetooth device information, refer to the navigation/ audio Owner's Manual.
! Information bar s03bs050102
Swipe the information bar or touch or on the information bar to switch the item displayed.
Audio screen:

For details about how to use the audio set, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual. Navigation screen (models with navigation system):
The directions to the destination are displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When a destination is not set in the navigation system, the compass orientation, street name and speed limit remain displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen:

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items.

Item

Details

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil temperature

Average vehicle speed

The screen of the currently selected audio source is displayed.

Accelerator opening ratio Vehicle posture

Center Information Display (CID) 213

Item

Details

Direction of the vehicle*1

W e at h e r i n f o r m a t i o n s c r e e n ( i f X-MODE screen (Outback): equipped):

Weather information for the next three hours*2

Weather information for the

next six hours*2

Posted speed limit of the road you are currently driving on*1

Instruments and Controls

Calendar
Driver Monitoring System*1 information and the average fuel consumption of driver
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped *2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE
Some items may not be shown depending on the model and specifications. The items shown on the favorite screen can be changed. For details, refer to "Favorite Widgets" FP226.

NOTE
. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, weather information is displayed.
The vehicle is equipped with an audio and navigation system for SiriusXM satellite radio. The SiriusXM satellite radio subscription is active. . The weather forecast for the set destination remains displayed until a new destination is set or until the destination is reached. . Depending on the reception timing of XM, the weather information may be delayed.

Models with 1 mode
Models with 2 modes The X-MODE information is displayed on the screen.

CONTINUED

214 Center Information Display (CID)

Also, X-MODE can be switched to a different mode on the screen.
! Main screen s03bs050103
For details about the following menu, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual. . Radio . Media . Phone . Map . Apps . My Subaru . SUBARU STARLINK . Add to Shortcuts
! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon s03bs050108

Touching " " deactivates the Auto Start Stop system and turns off the Auto Start Stop indicator (green) on the screen. Touching " " again activates the Auto Start Stop system and turns on the Auto Start Stop indicator (green).

! Car settings icon

Touch

s03bs050104
to display the items that are

changeable while driving.

1) Auto Start Stop indicator (green)

Center Information Display (CID) 215

Item

1st menu

2nd menu

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system
operation

Page reference for the setting procedure

Vehicle Dynamics Control

ON/OFF

359

225

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

X-MODE*1

Models with 2 modes: Normal, Deep Snow/Mud, Snow/

361

225

Dirt

Vehicle Control

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH)

ON/OFF ON/OFF

368

225

254

225

Instruments and Controls

Cruise Control Acceleration Characteristics

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight sys-
tem.

Auto Start Stop

ON/OFF

375

225

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

Refer to the Owner's

Driving Assistance

Lane Departure Pre- All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function

vention Function

Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Manual supplement for the EyeSight sys-
tem.

BSD/RCTA*1

ON/OFF

389

225

Warning Volume

Min/Mid/Max

388, 402 and *2

Others

Units

km, km/h, Liter/ Miles, MPH, Gallon

173 and 201

225

Driver Monitoring System*1

ON/OFF

404

225

*1: If equipped *2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

CONTINUED

216 Center Information Display (CID)

! Driver profiles icon s03bs050105
Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm the driver's information. For details, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
! HOME icon s03bs050106
Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.
! Climate control screen s03bs050107
The climate control status is shown on the screen.

side) 9) Seat heater/seat ventilation indicator*1
(right-hand side) 10) Fan speed indicator 11) Seat heater/seat ventilation indicator*1
(left-hand side) *1: If equipped

When operating the climate control system, the main screen switches to the climate control screen. For details, refer to "Climate Control Panel" FP279.

! Main screen

s03bs0502

"Settings" ? "Car" "Car Info"
! General settings s03bs050201
Set the time and display general items.

1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "General" 4. Select the preferred menu.

1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side) 2) SYNC mode indicator 3) Climate control ON/OFF button 4) Airflow mode 5) Climate control mode 6) Air inlet selection 7) Customizable icon 8) Set temperature indicator (right-hand

To display the main screen, touch (HOME).
In this Owner's Manual, the following settings will be explained. For details about other items, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
"Settings" ? "General"

Center Information Display (CID) 217

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

Available settings

Page reference for Page reference for

the vehicle system the setting proce-

operation

dure

Time Setting*1*2

Auto/Manual

245

Time Setting*3

Sync With Phone/Manual

Clock

Time Zone*1

AUTO/Pacific/Mountain/Central/

Eastern/Atlantic/Newfoundland/

245

Hawaii/Alaska

225

Instruments and Controls

Daylight Saving Time*1

AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF

225

Clock Format

12H/24H

225

Display Off

Turn the screen on or off.

225

General

Display

Brightness Dial

ON/OFF

175

225

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the display.

225

Wi-Fi

ON/OFF

Connected to:

Select the registered devise.

Wi-Fi

Available Wi-Fi Networks

Add

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

PIN Setup/Push Button Setup

Registered Wi-Fi Networks

Wi-Fi Hotspot

ON/OFF

CONTINUED

218 Center Information Display (CID)

1st menu General

Item 2nd menu
Reminder Screen
Meter Screen
Camera Climate Control Language Tire Pressure Units*5 Home Screen Shortcuts Welcome Screen Goodbye Screen Favorite Widgets Birthday List Anniversary List

3rd menu Maintenance Birthday Anniversary Gauge Initial Movement
Meter Information Screen
Turn by Turn Screen Interruption*1 Rear Camera Delay Control Steering Angle Lines Customize Climate Button
-- --
--
-- -- -- -- --

Available settings
ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/ Compass*4/Gas Range

Page reference for Page reference for

the vehicle system the setting proce-

operation

dure

225

210

225

173

225

203

225

ON/OFF

205

225

ON/OFF

380

225

ON/OFF

382

225

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation

287

225

English/Français/Español

201 and 209

225

kPa/PSi

205

225

ON/OFF

225

ON/OFF

202

225

ON/OFF

202

225

Set a favorite widget from the list.

212

226

Set a birthday.

210

226

Set an anniversary day.

210

227

Center Information Display (CID) 219

1st menu General

Item

2nd menu

3rd menu

Periodic Rest Notification*1

Update

Software Update

Automatically Check for Updates

Automatically Download Updates

SUBARU STARLINK Apps Recovery

SUBARU STARLINK Auto Connect

Factory Data Reset

System Information

Free/Open Source Software Information

Available settings
ON/OFF Check if a new software update ON/OFF ON/OFF OK/Cancel ON/OFF Reset/Cancel
-- --

Page reference for Page reference for

the vehicle system the setting proce-

operation

dure

Instruments and Controls

*1: Models with navigation system *2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system *3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system *4: Models without navigation system *5: If equipped *6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system. *7: For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.

CONTINUED

220 Center Information Display (CID)
! Car settings s03bs050209
Perform the EyeSight system setting and vehicle setting.
1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "Car" 4. Select the preferred menu.

Center Information Display (CID) 221

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure

Pre-Collision Braking

Setting ON/Setting OFF

Instruments and Controls

EyeSight Car

Lane Departure Prevention Function

All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/ Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Cruise Control Acceleration Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3

Characteristics

(Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Select Drive on Left/Drive on Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

Refer to the

Owner's Manual

supplement for

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

ON/OFF

the EyeSight system.

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF

Red indicator

ON/OFF

EyeSight Assist Monitor

Yellow Indicator

ON/OFF

Green Indicator

ON/OFF

Reverse Automatic Braking*1 Sonar Audible Alarm

ON/OFF

393

225

CONTINUED

222 Center Information Display (CID)

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

Driver Monitoring System*1 Car
Keyless Entry System

3rd menu

Available settings

Driver Monitoring System Repeat Facial Scan User Recognition Automatically Retract Seat on Entry Register User Update Seat and Mirror Position
Delete Driver Position
Delete User Delete All Users Audible Signal*1*2 Hazard Warning Flasher Driver Door Unlock*1 Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*1

ON/OFF Perform the user recognition. ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Register the user. Re-register the driver's position. Delete the registered driver's position. Delete the registered user. Delete all registered users. ON/OFF ON/OFF Driver Door Only/All Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure
225 227 225

225

404

227

130 and 135

225

130 and 136

225

124

225

124

225

Item

1st menu

2nd menu

Defogger Interior Light

Auto Light Sensor

Welcome Lighting
One-Touch Lane Changer Car
Auto Door Lock/Unlock
Rear Seat Reminder Door Mirror Setting*1 Power Rear Gate*1 Vehicle Dynamics Control Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)

3rd menu
-- -- Light Sensitivity Wiper Link Approaching Time Set
Leaving Time Set --
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock --
Auto Electric Folding Reverse Tilt Power Rear Gate Memory
-- --

Center Information Display (CID) 223

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure

15 minutes/Continuous

261

225

10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/OFF

303

225

Min/Low/Mid/Max ON/OFF

248

225

249

225

Instruments and Controls

30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF

225

249

30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF

225

ON/OFF

257

225

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out of PARK.*1/OFF

225

140

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/ Shift into or out of PARK.*1/OFF

225

ON/OFF

225

ON/OFF

274

225

ON/OFF

272

225

ON/OFF

156

225

ON/OFF

359

225

ON/OFF

368

225

CONTINUED

224 Center Information Display (CID)

Item

1st menu

2nd menu

Auto Start Stop BSD/RCTA*1

X-MODE*1 Car
Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH) Warning Volume
Units

3rd menu -- -- --
-- -- --

Available settings
ON/OFF ON/OFF Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF Models with 2 modes: Normal, Snow/Dirt, Deep Snow/Mud

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion 375 389
361

Page reference for the setting
procedure 225 225
225

ON/OFF

254

225

Min/Mid/Max km, km/h, Liter/ Miles, MPH, Gallon

388, 402 and *3

225

173 and 201

225

*1: If equipped *2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.
However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc. *3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.

! How to select items on the screen s03bs0510

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs051001

! Selecting

Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON or OFF .

Example Touch the preferred item.

Center Information Display (CID) 225

s03bs051002

! How to set items on the screen s03bs0511 ! Brightness/Contrast s03bs051101
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.
NOTE
"Brightness" can only be adjusted
when "Brightness Dial" is off. Refer to 3
"General settings" FP216.
1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "General" 4. ? "Display" 5. ? "Brightness/Contrast"

Instruments and Controls

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and contrast.
CONTINUED

226 Center Information Display (CID)

Touch "Default" to revert to the factory setting.

! Favorite Widgets

s03bs051102

! Birthday List s03bs051103
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, a message will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on or off by "Reminder Screen". For details, refer to "General settings" FP216.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ? (Settings)
3. ? "General"
4. ? "Birthday List"

6. Enter the name. 7. ? "Next".

The menu on the favorite screen can be customized. 1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "General" 4. ? "Favorite Widgets" 5. Select the icon of the display position. 6. Select the display item.

5. ? "Add"

8. Enter the date. 9. ? "OK"

Center Information Display (CID) 227

NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be stored.
! Anniversary List s03bs051104
The procedure for setting an anniversary is the same as "Birthday List" FP226, except that in step 4 "Anniversary List" is selected.
! Driver Monitoring System (if equipped)
s03bs051105
The Driver Monitoring System settings can be changed. For setting method for the following menu on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to "ON/OFF setting" FP225. . Driver Monitoring System . User Recognition . Auto Retract Seat on Entry
Repeat facial scan: 1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "Car" 4. ? "Driver Monitoring System" 5. ? "Repeat facial scan"

6. ? "OK" 7. While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments. When the scan is completed, the completion screen is displayed on the combination meter (color LCD).
Register User: 1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle so that you are seated in the correct driving posture.
NOTE
. Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted.

Refer to "Power Seat" FP32 or "Out-

side Mirrors" FP271.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

"OFF" position before user registration

is complete, the information of the

adjusted seat position, outside mirror

angles, and reverse tilt-down outside

mirror angle will not be saved.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ? (Settings)

4. ? "Car"

5. ? "Driver Monitoring System"

6. ? "Register User"

Instruments and Controls

7. Select the preferred user from the list.

CONTINUED

228 Center Information Display (CID)
8. ? "Set" 9. While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments.

NOTE
. If user registration cannot be performed, turn your face forward as shown in the illustration, then turn to the display. . There are some cases where user registration cannot be registered properly. In those cases, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP404. . If "Unable to register. Try again." appears, repeat the procedure beginning from step 5.

When the screen changes, the registration of the facial scan is completed.

A) Forward direction B) Display direction 1) Face forward. 2) Do not lower your chin. 3) Face the display. *: Display

10. Enter the name. 11. ? "Next"

Update Seat and Mirror Position: 1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "Car" 4. ? "Driver Monitoring System" 5. ? "Update Seat and Mirror Position"

Center Information Display (CID) 229

is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be saved.

Delete Driver Position: 1. Touch (HOME).

2. ? (Settings)

3. ? "Car" 4. ? "Driver Monitoring System"

5. ? "Delete Driver Position"

Instruments and Controls

12. Select the preferred icon. 13. ? "Set"

NOTE
. An existing user can be overwritten by selecting a registered number. When a user is registered by overwriting, the individual fuel economy data is reset. . When "User Recognition" is set to OFF, user registration cannot be selected.

6. ? "Set"
NOTE
. Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power Seat" FP32 or "Outside Mirrors" FP271. . If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration

6. ? "Yes"

CONTINUED

230 Center Information Display (CID)
Delete User: 1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "Car" 4. ? "Driver Monitoring System" 5. ? "Delete User"
7. ? "Yes"
6. Select the preferred user from the list.

Delete All Users: 1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "Car" 4. ? "Driver Monitoring System" 5. ? "Delete All Users"
6. ? "Yes"

! Car information screen

1. Touch

s03bs0503
(HOME) to display the top

menu.

Center Information Display (CID) 231

! Driving Statistics screen s03bs050301

only due to the angle of the road surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt caused by the occupants, cargo, and acceleration or deceleration.
! Advanced Package screen s03bs050302

Instruments and Controls

2. ? (Car Info)

1) Driving Statistics 2) Steering angle 3) Running condition 4) Vehicle posture 5) Telltale screen
This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.
NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture. . For Outback, when X-MODE has been turned on, the screen of the center information display will be changed to the X-MODE screen. . The vehicle posture angle varies not

1) Advanced Package 2) Driver Monitoring System 3) Pre-Collision Braking 4) BSD/RCTA*1 5) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem*1 6) Information icon 7) Lane Departure Warning 8) EyeSight Assist Monitor 9) High beam assist 10) Front view monitor*1 *1: If equipped
This screen displays the advanced safety functions status of the vehicle.
CONTINUED

232 Center Information Display (CID)

Touch "Advanced Package" from the 2nd menu in the car info screen.
The advanced safety functions information can be shown on the screen. Touch the information icon on the screen.

NOTE
. Indicators and icons are not displayed for functions that are not equipped to the vehicle. . The indicators and icons of functions that are not operating are displayed in gray.

! Maintenance screen

s03bs050303

2. ? (Engine Oil) 3. Select "Notification Date" or "Notification Distance" of the reminder. 4. ? "Set" 5. ?
Oil Filter change reminder: The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Oil Filter" item in step 2. Tires rotation reminder: The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Tires" item in step 2. Maintenance Schedule setting: The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 2.
NOTE
. Touch "Reset" to reset each setting. . Touch "Update" to revert to the default value.

& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models

(If Equipped)

NOTE

s03bs06

For 11.6-inch display models, refer to "11.6-Inch Display Models" FP211.

Maintenance reminders can be set.
Engine oil change reminder: 1. Touch "Maintenance" from the 2nd menu in the car info screen.

Center Information Display (CID) 233

! Main screens

s03bs0601

A) Upper display B) Lower display 1) HOME button (Refer to "HOME button"
FP233.) 2) Status bar (Refer to "Status bar" FP233.)

3) Upper main screen (Refer to "Setting of the upper display" FP234.)
4) Lower main screen (Refer to "Setting of the lower display" FP237.)
5) Climate control screen (Refer to "Climate control screen" FP234.)
While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the touch panel will activate.
! HOME button Press (HOME) to display the top ms03ebsn06u09.
! Status bar s03bs060901
The driver profiles icon, outside temperature and clock are shown on the display.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.
While parking or driving at low speeds When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel) When starting the engine after being parked for a certain period of time

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

. The clock can be shown in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For

details about the setting, refer to

"Clock" FP245.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen. Refer

to "Clock" FP245.

Instruments and Controls

! Upper display s03bs060902
For details about items, refer to "Setting of the upper display" FP234.
For details about the following menu, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
. Radio
. Media
. Phone
. Apps
. SUBARU STARLINK
. Add to Shortcuts

! Lower display s03bs060903
For details about the setting items, refer to "Setting of the lower display" FP237.
If this screen changes to the climate control screen, refer to "Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models" FP279.

CONTINUED

234 Center Information Display (CID)

! Climate control screen

s03bs060904

! Setting of the upper display In this Owner's Manual, the settingsso03fbst0h60e2 "General" menu will be explained. For details about other items, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
! General settings s03bs060204
The "General" menu is used to set the display, language and time.
1. Press (HOME).

1) Airflow mode 2) Climate control mode 3) Air inlet selection 4) Set temperature indicator 5) Air conditioner ON indicator 6) Fan speed indicator 7) Climate control On/Off button
When operating the climate control system, the main screen switches to the climate control screen. For details about climate control operation, refer to "Climate Control Panel" FP279.

2. Touch (Settings). 3. ? "General" 4. Select the preferred menu.

Center Information Display (CID) 235

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure

Clock

Time setting Clock Format

Sync With Phone/Manual

245

12H/24H

246

Instruments and Controls

Display

Display Off Brightness Dial
Brightness/Contrast

Turn the screen on or off.

ON/OFF

Set and adjust the brightness

and contrast of the screen dis-

play and camera display.

242 242

242

General

Reminder Screen

Maintenance Birthday

ON/OFF ON/OFF

242

210

242

Anniversary

ON/OFF

242

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement

ON/OFF

173

242

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/ Gas Range

203

242

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control Steering Angle Lines

ON/OFF ON/OFF

380

242

382

242

CONTINUED

236 Center Information Display (CID)

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

General

Climate Control

Customize Climate Button

Language

Tire Pressure Units*1

Home Screen Shortcuts

Welcome Screen

Goodbye Screen

Birthday List

Anniversary List

SUBARU STARLINK Apps Recovery

SUBARU STARLINK Auto Connect

Factory Data Reset

System Information

Free/Open Source Software Information

Available settings
A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation English/Français/Español kPa/PSi ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Set a birthday. Set an anniversary day.
OK/Cancel

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure

287

242

201 and 209

242

205

242

202

242

202

242

210

243

210

243

ON/OFF Reset/Cancel
-- --

*1: If equipped *2: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.

! Setting of the lower display Touch (Car Settings). Refer to "Vse03hbsic06l0e5 setting icons" FP239. This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status of the functions. Refer to "Driving Statistics" FP243. Set the timing of the maintenance. Refer to "Maintenance" FP244.
! Vehicle settings while driving s03bs060502
Touch (X-MODE), (Vehicle Control), (Driving Assistance), (Others), or
(Auto Start Stop) to display the items that are changeable while driving.

Center Information Display (CID) 237 3
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

238 Center Information Display (CID)

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

Available settings

X-MODE*1

Vehicle Dynamics Control

Vehicle Con- Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)

trol

Cruise Control Acceleration

Characteristics

Driving Assistance

Pre-Collision Braking Lane Departure Prevention Function

Auto Start Stop

-- Warning Volume

Others

Units

Auto Start Stop

ON/OFF

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Setting ON/Setting OFF

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

ON/OFF

Min/Mid/Max

km, km/h, Liter/ Miles, MPH, Gallon

ON/OFF

*1: For Outback *2: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion 361 359 368

Page reference for the setting
procedure
242 242 242

375

242

173 and 201

242

375

242

! Auto Start Stop ON/OFF icon s03bs060503

! Vehicle setting icons

s03bs060501

Center Information Display (CID) 239

Instruments and Controls

1) Auto Start Stop indicator (green)
Touching " " deactivates the Auto Start Stop system and turns off the Auto Start Stop indicator (green) on the screen. Touching " " again activates the Auto Start Stop system and turns on the Auto Start Stop indicator (green).

1. Press 2. Touch

(HOME). (Car Settings).

CONTINUED

240 Center Information Display (CID)

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

3rd menu

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Pre-Collision Braking

Setting ON/Setting OFF

Lane Departure Prevention Function

All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/ Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

EyeSight

Cruise Control Acceleration Characteristics

Lv.1 (Eco)/Lv.2 (Comfort)/Lv.3 (Standard)/Lv.4 (Dynamic)

Select Drive on Left/Drive on Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

Car Settings

Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF

Red indicator

ON/OFF

EyeSight Assist Monitor

Yellow Indicator

ON/OFF

Green Indicator

ON/OFF

Keyless Entry System

Hazard Warning Flasher

ON/OFF

136

Defogger

15 minutes/Continuous

261

Interior Light

10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/OFF

303

Page reference for the setting
procedure -- --
-- -- 242 242
--
242 242 242

Center Information Display (CID) 241

1st menu

Item 2nd menu

Auto Light Sensor

Welcome Lighting
One-Touch Lane Changer
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Car Settings
Rear Seat Reminder Vehicle Dynamics Control Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) Auto Start Stop X-MODE*2 Warning Volume Units

3rd menu
Light Sensitivity Wiper Link Approaching Time Set
Leaving Time Set --
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Available settings

Page reference for the vehicle system opera-
tion

Page reference for the setting
procedure

Min/Low/Mid/Max

248

242

ON/OFF

249

242

30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF
249 30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF

242

Instruments and Controls

ON/OFF

257

242

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF

242

140

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/ Shift into or out of PARK/OFF

242

ON/OFF

242

ON/OFF

359

242

ON/OFF

368

242

ON/OFF

375

242

ON/OFF

361

242

Min/Mid/Max

242

km, km/h, Liter/ Miles, MPH, Gallon

173 and 201

242

*1: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system. *2: If equipped

NOTE
Touch to display the explanation of the items.

CONTINUED

242 Center Information Display (CID)

! How to select items on the screen s03bs0610

! ON/OFF setting

s03bs061001

! Selecting

Example
Touch the changing menu and select ON or OFF .

Example Touch the preferred setting.

s03bs061002

! How to set items on the screen s03bs0611 ! Brightness/Contrast s03bs061101
Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.
NOTE
"Brightness" can only be adjusted when "Brightness Dial" is off. Refer to "General settings" FP234.
1. Touch (HOME). 2. ? (Settings) 3. ? "General" 4. ? "Display" 5. ? "Brightness/Contrast"

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and contrast.

Touch "Default" to revert to the factory setting.
! Birthday List s03bs061102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, a message will be displayed when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on or off by the "Reminder Screen". For details, refer to "General settings" FP234.
1. Touch (HOME).
2. ? (Settings)
3. ? "General"
4. ? "Birthday List"

6. Enter the name. 7. ? "Next"

5. ? "Add"

8. Enter the date. 9. ? "OK"

Center Information Display (CID) 243

NOTE
A maximum of 5 birthdays can be stored.

! Anniversary List

s03bs061103
The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as "Birthday List" FP243, except

that in step 4 "Anniversary List" is selected. ! Driving Statistics

s03bs0603

Instruments and Controls

1) Steering angle 2) Vehicle posture 3) Running condition This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status of the functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.
CONTINUED

244 Center Information Display (CID)

NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture. . For Outback, when X-MODE has been turned on, the screen of the center information display will be changed to the X-MODE screen. . The vehicle posture angle varies not only due to the angle of the road surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt caused by the occupants, cargo, and acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance

s03bs0604

Tires setting: The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Tires" item in step 2. Maintenance Schedule setting: The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 2.
NOTE
. Touch "Reset" to reset each setting. . Touch "Update" to revert to the default value.

Maintenance reminders can be set. Engine oil setting: 1. Touch (Maintenance). 2. ? (Engine Oil) 3. Select "Notification Date" or "Notification Distance" of the reminder. 4. ? "Set" 5. ?
Oil Filter setting: The setting procedure is the same as "Engine Oil" setting, but touch the "Oil Filter" item in step 2.

Clock 245

3-9. Clock
s03af
For models with a genuine SUBARU navigation and/or audio system, the clock can be adjusted using either auto mode or manual mode.
& Setting the Clock Manually s03af03
! Dual 7.0-inch display models s03af0303
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

7. ? "Manual" 8. ? or 9. ? "OK"
NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be displayed by touching the clock on the status bar.

! 11.6-inch display models s03af0304
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3
2. Touch (HOME). 3. ? (Settings) 4. ? "General" 5. ? "Clock" 6. ? "Time Setting"

Instruments and Controls

2. Press (HOME). 3. Touch (Settings). 4. ? "General" 5. ? "Clock" 6. ? "Time Setting"

CONTINUED

246 Clock

& Setting the Clock Automatically
s03af02
! Dual 7.0-inch display models s03af0204
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

7. ? "Manual" 8. ? or 9. ? "OK"

NOTE
The clock setting screen can also be displayed by touching the clock on the status bar.

2. Press (HOME). 3. Touch (Settings). 4. ? "General" 5. ? "Clock" 6. ? "Time Setting"

7. ? "Sync With Phone"
The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook data. 1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. 2. Transfer phonebook data to the system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smartphone, the settings of the connected

Clock 247

smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notification settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones. ! 11.6-inch display models
s03af0205
1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
2. Touch (HOME). 3. ? (Settings) 4. ? "General" 5. ? "Clock" 6. ? "Time Setting" 7. Models with navigation system: ? "Auto"

Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system: ? "Auto" Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system: ? "Sync With Phone"
! Models with navigation system s03af020501
The clock will be set automatically where a GPS signal is available.
! Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system
s03af020507
The clock will be set automatically where a DCM (Data Communication Module in vehicle cellular connection) signal is available.
! Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system
s03af020508
The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook data. 1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. 2. Transfer phonebook data to the system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SET-

TINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

Instruments and Controls

248 Light Control Switch

3-10. Light Control Switch
s03ah
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery to discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the light control switch is turned to the off position. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the light control switch set to a position other than the off position, the battery may be discharged.
Models with "keyless access with push-button start system": The light control switch operates when the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.
Models without "keyless access with push-button start system": The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights), even under the following conditions. . When the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with "keyless access with push-button start system") . When the key is not inserted into the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")
If the driver's door is opened while the headlights are illuminated under such conditions, a chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illuminated.

& Headlights

s03ah01

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the light control switch.
" " position: The headlights are all off.
" " position: Instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.
" " position: Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

Light Control Switch 249

" " position: Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.
The light sensitivity of the auto on/off headlights can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights While the light control switch is isn03aht0h10e6 "AUTO" position, the headlights will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The headlights will automatically turn off approximately 1 minute after the wiper stops.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). Also, the setting

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Welcome lighting function The welcome lighting function turns so0n3aht0h10e3 low beam headlight for smooth approaching to or exiting from the vehicle at night or in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the "AUTO" position. . It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/ off headlights.
! When approaching s03ah010301
While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking the doors (for Outback, including the rear gate) by using the remote keyless entry system.
The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds*1 and then turn off. However, if any of the following operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off. . The doors are locked. . The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".

! When exiting s03ah010302
While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the "OFF" status (models with

"keyless access with push-button start system").

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without "keyless access

with push-button start system").

Instruments and Controls

The low beam headlights will turn off under any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed.*1
. The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
. The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

CONTINUED

250 Light Control Switch

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can change the setting by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0inch display models).
! Sensor for the auto on/off headlights
s03ah0101

CAUTION If any object is placed on or near the sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlights may not operate properly.
& High/Low Beam Change (Dimmer)
s03ah02

combination meter is also on.
NOTE
While the light control switch is in the " " position and the lever is the high beam position, the high beam assist function will be on standby.

& Headlight Flasher

s03ah03

The sensor is on the instrument panel as shown in the illustration.

1) High beam 2) Low beam
While the light control switch is in the " ", " ", or " " position in a dark place, the headlights will turn on. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light " " on the

CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold

Light Control Switch 251

the lever. The headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the off position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light " " on the combination meter also illuminates.

& High Beam Assist Function

NOTE

s03ah07

. The high beam assist function utilizes the stereo camera installed at the position of the front map lights. . For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to low beam. . When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h). . When the forward area of the vehicle is bright. . When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle. . When the EyeSight system is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
. Do not overestimate the capacity of the high beam assist function. The driver always has the responsibility to understand the surrounding situation, to drive safely, and to change the headlight mode manually if necessary. . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as "operational". This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
! How to use the high beam assist function
The high beam assist function ws0il3lah0b70e1 activated when all the following conditions are met. . The light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights are on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
3
High beam assist indicator When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator on the combination meter will illuminate.
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is malfunctioning or is temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed at low beam. ! Temporary stop of high beam assist
function If the high beam assist function s0s3taoh0p70s6 temporarily due to poor visibility or abnormal temperature, the message appears on the combination meter. Once the conditions have been remedied, drive the
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

252 Light Control Switch

vehicle for a while to restore the system.
NOTE
Even when the operation conditions of the high beam assist function are met, there may be a case in which the high beam assist indicator does not illuminate.
! How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function
The sensitivity of the high beam sa03sahs0i7s04t function can be lowered by using the following operations. 1. Before turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, set the light control switch to the "AUTO" position and push the signal lever forward (high beam position). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and within approximately 15 seconds, press the " / " (following distance setting) switch more than 10 times consecutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator light " " on the combination meter display (color LCD) will flash.

NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.
Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control indicator is illuminated. The EyeSight warning indicator (yellow) is illuminated. . The sensitivity of the high beam assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually Change to the low beam:

s03ah0702

When you return the turn signal lever to the

center position, the high beam assist

function will turn off and the high beam

assist indicator will turn off.

Change to the high beam:
When you turn the light control switch to the " " position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam.
At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

NOTE
. After manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the "AUTO" position. . When manually changing the headlight mode to the high beam, if you turn the light control switch to the " " position, the parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights will turn on.
! Tips for the high beam assist system
. The high beam assist function rse03caho07g0-3 nizes the condition surrounding the vehicle based on the brightness of illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the driver's sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected.
. Under the following situations, the brightness of ambient illumination may not be detected correctly and the high beam assist function may not work properly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode

Light Control Switch 253

may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.
In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.).
When the windshield glass is dirty or fogged.
When the windshield is cracked or damaged.
If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area.
When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is driven without its headlights and tail lights on.
If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly.
When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving.
When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
When driving on a road with many curves.
When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly.

When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty.
When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is being towed.
When the stereo camera is deformed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty.
Immediately after the engine has started.
. In the following conditions, the headlight mode will not be automatically changed from the high beam to the low beam.
When your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve.
When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle.
When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the stereo camera detects the light of the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal, illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.
Color or brightness of the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead. The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow, 3
etc. Movement and direction of an oncoming vehicle or a vehicle ahead. When the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead illuminate on only one side. When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle. Conditions of a road (slope, curve, road surface, etc.). Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo. Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

254 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

& Daytime Running Light System
s03ah04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are illuminated, the tail lights do not illuminate. When it becomes dark outside, turn the light switch to the " " position to illuminate the headlights and tail lights. This will improve visibility and allow other drivers to see your vehicle more easily.
The daytime running lights will automatically illuminate when the following conditions are fulfilled. . The engine is running. . The parking brake is fully released. . The light control switch is in the "AUTO", " " or off position. . The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the " " position, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illuminated.

3-11. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
s03bl
1) The target area of illumination when SRH is activated
2) The target area of illumination when SRH is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminating the road ahead at corners and intersections. You can turn the SRH function on or off. The settings can be changed by using the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220.

1) SRH OFF indicator light
The SRH OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) turns off when SRH is turned on. The SRH OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates when SRH is turned off.

Headlight Beam Leveler 255

1) SRH warning indicator
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates and a message appears on the warning screen when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
. The SRH function operative/non-operative status is kept when the engine is turned off, even if the engine is restarted. . When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position, the SRH OFF indicator light will illuminate and turn off after several seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

3-12. Headlight Beam Leveler

s03at

The LED headlights produce more light than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare. To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

Instruments and Controls

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the headlights may become misaligned, and the headlight beam leveler will not reset them to the proper angle. This may occur after transporting your vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the vehicle is parked and restarted on different angles. In such cases, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer.

256 Front Fog Light Switch
3-13. Front Fog Light Switch (If Equipped)
s03al

3-14. Turn Signal Lever
s03ai

1) Headlight switch 2) Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights: Turn the fog light switch to the " " position while the headlights are in either of the following conditions. . The headlight switch is in the " " position with the low beam mode selected. . The headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically.
To turn off the front fog lights: Turn the fog light switch back down to the " " position.

Indicator light
The indicator light located on the combination meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

1) Right turn 2) Lane change right signal 3) Lane change left signal 4) Left turn
If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

& One-Touch Lane Changer
To flash the turn signal and turn sisg03naai01l indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational setting of the one-touch lane changer can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. The setting can also be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

3-15. Wiper and Washer
s03am
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster. Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.
CAUTION . Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops. . Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.

Wiper and Washer 257
. In freezing weather, be sure that the blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blade rubbers frozen to the window glass could cause not only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause 3
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade rubbers are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper. . If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation. . Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

258 Wiper and Washer

Refer to "Windshield Washer Fluid" FP510. Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing temperatures, use non-freezing type wiper blades. . Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe location, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally. . Clean your blade rubbers and window glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window. . Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the blade rubbers results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield or rear window and the blade rubbers using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the window glass and blade rubbers with clean water. The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with water. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the wiper blades (or blade rubbers) with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to "Replacement of Wiper Blades" FP511.

& Windshield Wiper and Washer Switches
The wiper operates only when the igns0i3taiom0n1 switch is in the "ON" position.

! Windshield wipers

s03am0101

: Mist (for a single wipe) : Off : Intermittent : Low speed : High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the " " position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control s03am0103

! Windshield washer

Wiper and Washer 259

s03am0104

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light appears when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light appears,

refill the tank with fluid. For the tank

refilling method, refer to "Windshield

Washer Fluid" FP510.

Instruments and Controls

When the wiper switch is in the " " position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps from the shortest interval to the longest.

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fluid sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

CONTINUED

260 Wiper and Washer

& Rear Window Wiper and Washer Switch (Outback)
s03am02
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
: Continuous : Intermittent : Off : Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration) ! Rear wiper To turn the rear wiper on, turn thes03kamn0o20b1 switch upward. To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch to the " " position. With the switch turned to the " " position, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at

intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the "R" position, the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation. When you move the select lever from the "R" (reverse) position to another position, the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper: Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off " " position, if the front windshield wiper is operating continuously, the rear wiper will operate intermittently when you move the select lever to the "R" (reverse) position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as follows. . U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational . Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs the rear wiper operation on the rear gate. Doing so may damage the rear wiper when it operates.

! Washer To wash the rear window while thse03arme02a0r2 wiper is operating, turn the knob switch upward to the " " position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob. To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch downward to the " " position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob. The rear view camera washer also operates while the rear window washer is operating.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning light appears when the washer fluid level in the tank has dropped to the

Defogger and Deicer 261

lower limit. If the warning light appears, refill the tank with fluid. For the tank refilling method, refer to "Windshield Washer Fluid" FP510.

3-16. Defogger and Deicer
s03bi

vated only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Rear window and outside mirror (if equipped) defogger button (dual 7.0-inch display models)

Instruments and Controls

1) Rear window defogger 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) 3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is acti-

Rear window and outside mirror defogger button (11.6-inch display models)
CONTINUED

262 Defogger and Deicer

To activate the defogger and deicer system, press the rear window and outside mirror defogger button. The rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer are activated simultaneously. The indicator light on the button illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the button again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear window and outside mirrors have been cleared and the windshield wiper blade rubbers have been deiced completely before that time, press the button to turn them off. If defrosting, defogging or deicing is not complete, you have to press the button to turn them on again.
It is possible to set the defogger and deicer system for the continuous operation mode by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0inch display models).

CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield. . If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effectively. . While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation mode:
If the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops operating. However, the rear window defogger system and outside mirror

defogger system maintain continuous operation in this condition.
If the vehicle battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating. . The vehicle is equipped with a radio antenna on the upper part of the rear window. Therefore it is not possible to clear fog and frost on the upper part of the rear window.

Mirrors 263

3-17. Mirrors
s03ap
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.
& Inside Mirror (without AutoDimming Function) (If Equipped)
s03ap08

& Auto-Dimming Mirror/Compass with HomeLink® (If Equipped)
s03ap10

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature (if

equipped)

s03ap1002
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the " " switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle. 2. If the display reads "C", slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

Instruments and Controls

1) Normal position 2) Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use. To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the antiglare position.

1) Display 2) HomeLink® buttons 3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and help preserve your vision.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Feature
Press the " " switch to turn thes0a3aup1t0o0-1 dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch's green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition

Compass calibration zones (U.S.) CONTINUED

264 Mirrors

Compass calibration zones (South America)
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the " " switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the " " switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. Within a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.
4. If the vehicle's magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the " " switch for more than 9 seconds or until a "C" appears in the display. Once a "C" appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.
! HomeLink® Wireless Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control Ssy0s3atpe10m03 provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink® website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink. com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink® to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage. . Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. . It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training. . Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" or "ACC" position before programming and/or operating HomeLink®. . Keep the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons

be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink® buttons" FP267. ! Programming a New HomeLink®
button s03ap100301

Mirrors 265 3

Instruments and Controls

1) Indicator Light 2) HomeLink® buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink® button that you would like to program. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to "Erasing HomeLink® buttons" FP267).

1) Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button that you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

3. While the HomeLink® indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the handheld remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace this "Programming a New HomeLink® button" step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section. Refer to "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" FP267.

CONTINUED

266 Mirrors

1) Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink® button that you would like to program and observe the indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.

1) "Learn" button
5. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

Mirrors 267

1) Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to "Garage Door Two-Way Communication" FP268.
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink® website.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
s03ap100302
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming a New HomeLink® button" step 3 with the following:
While the HomeLink® indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote every two seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink® button" step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink® s03ap100303
To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activa-
tion will now occur for the trained device 3
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/ office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held remote of the device may also be used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink® buttons s03ap100304
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink® is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a New HomeLink® button" - step 1.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

268 Mirrors

! Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® button
s03ap100305
To program a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink® button can be released at this point. Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink® button" - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the programming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored programming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Communication
s03ap100306
HomeLink® has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink® can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink® can also recall and display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".
HomeLink® has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Communication
s03ap100307
1) Status Indicators Within 5 seconds after programming a new HomeLink® button, both of HomeLink's garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete. If the garage door status indicators do not flash, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
! Using Two-Way Communication s03ap100308
1) Status Indicator Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink® by simultaneously pressing HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink® will display the last recorded status for 3 seconds. If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink® will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators (see below).

. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)
! Certification s03ap100309
In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink® information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

Mirrors 269 3
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

270 Mirrors
. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING
. When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink® website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

. Mexico-spec. models

Mirrors 271

& Outside Mirrors s03ap03
! Convex mirror (passenger side) s03ap0301 WARNING Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mirror.
CAUTION Make sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.

! Remote control mirror switch s03ap0302
3
: Select side to adjust : Direction control The remote control mirrors operate when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. 1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. "L" is for the left mirror, "R" is for the right mirror. 2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror. 3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

272 Mirrors

NOTE
. The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
For models with memory function: . The outside mirror can be adjusted for approximately 45 seconds after the following conditions are met.
The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position. The door is unlocked using the access key fob. . The outside mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" FP33. . The outside mirror angle can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227.
! Reverse tilt-down feature (if equipped)
s03ap030201
When backing the vehicle up, the right and/or left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. 2. Move the select lever to the R (Reverse) position. 3. The outside mirror surface moves downward.
The outside mirror surface will return to its original position when the following condition are met. . Approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse). . The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position. . The vehicle is running.
NOTE
. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" FP33. . The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227. . The operational/non-operational setting can be changed by operating

the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. . The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the front passenger's side mirror. The setting of driver's side mirror operation can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal during the reverse tilt-down mirror angle adjustment.
To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror angle, adjust the outside mirror using the remote control mirror switch while the reverse tilt-down operates. For details about how to adjust the outside mirror angle, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" FP271. Memory function: The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be registered. Register the position with button "1", "2" or each of the access key fobs and retrieve the position. For details about registration or retrieval of a position, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" FP33.

Mirrors 273

NOTE
If the seat is moved forward or backward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the reverse tilt-down will move to the factory default position or the last position hold.
Hold last position function: The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be set to the latest adjusted angle. The hold last position function operates when the following condition are met. . The memory function is not used. . The seat is moved forward or backward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as "non-operational". This setting can be changed to "operational" at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer. . If the hold last position function setting is "non-operation", the reverse tilt-down will move to the factory default position.

! Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)
s03ap0304
The power folding mirror switch operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. To fold the outside mirrors, press the power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors, press the switch again.
NOTE
. If the outside mirrors have been operated (folded or unfolded) manually, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position, the outside mirrors may be adjusted automatically depending on the status of the power folding mirror switch.

. If the outside mirrors have been manually folded slightly forward of the regularly unfolded position, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position, the outside mirrors may automatically fold further forward depending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch. When this hap- 3
pens, press the power folding mirror switch. By doing so, the outside mirrors which have been folded to the furthest forward position will extend to the regularly unfolded position and then fold rearward in the usual way. In order to unfold the outside mirrors, press the switch again. . When you fold the outside mirrors manually, the mirrors may not unfold when the switch is pressed, even though the motor operating sound is heard. When this happens, operate the power folding mirror switch again. . When you unfold the outside mirrors manually, the mirrors may become wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors by operating the switch. If the outside mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors again and then unfold them by operating the switch again. . When the temperature is low, the outside mirrors may stop during operation. Push the switch again. When the
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

274 Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel

outside mirrors do not work by operating the switch, move the outside mirrors several times manually. This makes it possible to operate them by switch operation. . When you operate the power folding mirror switch continuously, it may not work. This is not a malfunction. Operate after waiting for a short period of time. . The outside mirrors can be operated (folded or unfolded) manually for approximately 45 seconds after the following conditions are met.
The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position. The door is unlocked using the access key fob.
! Power folding door mirror function (if equipped)
s03ap030401
The mirrors are automatically folded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position, the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the doors are locked.
The mirrors are automatically unfolded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position and the doors are unlocked.

NOTE
. The power folding door mirror function does not operate when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position. . The setting of the power folding door mirrors function can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220. Also, the setting can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-18. Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel
s03bf
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

Heated Steering Wheel System 275

1) Tilt adjustment 2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to "Front Seats" FP28. 2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. 5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down, and forward and backward.

3-19. Heated Steering Wheel System (If Equipped)
s03bm
The Heated Steering Wheel system warms the steering wheel at a constant temperature.
1) Heated Steering Wheel switch 2) Indicator light 3) Heated area To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch when the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Then the steering wheel will be warmed and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the switch again. Then the indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION . Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the engine running. Otherwise, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and it may not be possible to start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people 3
with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated Steering Wheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned. . Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 1048F (408C) when the Heated Steering Wheel system is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate.

Instruments and Controls

CONTINUED

276 Horn

. The Heated Steering Wheel system 3-20. Horn

will automatically turn off approxi-

s03ar

mately 30 minutes after the system

has been turned on.

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

4-1. Ventilator Control............................................ 278 Center Ventilators .....................s.0.4........................ 278 Side Ventilators .................................................. 278 Rear Ventilators (If Equipped) ............................. 278
4-2. Climate Control Panel .................................... 279 Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models .............................. 279 11.6-Inch Display Models .................................... 282
4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation........... 285 Sensors.............................................................. 286
4-4. Manual Climate Control.................................. 287 Airflow Mode Selection ....................................... 287 Temperature Control ........................................... 288 Fan Speed Control.............................................. 288
Air Conditioner Control....................................... 289 Air Inlet Selection ............................................... 289 To Turn Off the Climate Control System .............. 289 4-5. Front Seat Heater and Ventilation
(If Equipped).................................................. 290 Front Seat Heater ............................................... 290

Climate Control
Front Seat Ventilation......................................... 290 4-6. Defrosting ........................................................291 4-7. Operating Tips for Heater and Air
Conditioner ....................................................292 Cleaning Ventilator Grille.................................... 292 Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct
Sunlight ........................................................... 292 Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant
Circuit.............................................................. 292 Checking Air Conditioning System before
Summer Season............................................... 292 4
Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and Low Temperature Weather Condition ......... 292
Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily Loaded ................................. 292
Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System ...... 293 4-8. Air Filtration System .......................................293
Replacing the Cabin Air Filter............................. 293

Climate Control

278 Ventilator Control
4-1. Ventilator Control & Center Ventilators

s04af s04af01

& Side Ventilators

& Rear Ventilators (If Equipped)

s04af02

s04af04

Move the tabs to adjust the flow direction.
To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way down.

1) Open 2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. To open the ventilator, turn the side grille open/close wheel upward to the " " position. To close it, turn the wheel downward to the " " position.

1) Open 2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction. To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille open/close wheel upward to the " " position. To close it, turn the wheel downward to the " " position.

4-2. Climate Control Panel
s04ag
& Dual 7.0-Inch Display Models s04ag11

Climate Control Panel 279

1) Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting"

FP291.)

2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger

button (if equipped) (Refer to "Defogger

and Deicer" FP261.)

3) Climate control screen (lower display)

Temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" FP288.)

Climate Control

CONTINUED

280 Climate Control Panel
! Climate control screen

s04ag1101

Climate control screen (lower display)

: Touch the climate control mode indicator 1) Climate control mode indicator 2) Climate control ON/OFF button 3) Fan speed indicator 4) Customizable icon* 5) Airflow mode selection screen 6) Climate control mode select button 7) Fan speed control screen
*: The customizable icon can be changed to the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" FP234.

! Temperature control screen s04ag1102 Climate control screen (lower display)

Climate Control Panel 281

: Touch the set temperature indicator

1) Set temperature indicator

2) Climate control ON/OFF button

3) Fan speed indicator

4) Customizable icon*

5) Temperature control screen

6) Temperature control bar

*: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" FP234.

Climate Control

CONTINUED

282 Climate Control Panel
& 11.6-Inch Display Models s04ag12

1) Climate control screen 2) Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" FP261.) 3) Passenger's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" FP288.) 4) Driver's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature Control" FP288.) 5) Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting" FP291.)

! Climate control screen

s04ag1201

Climate Control Panel 283
: Touch the climate control mode indicator 1) Climate control ON/OFF button 2) Climate control mode indicator 3) Customizable icon*1 4) Fan speed indicator 5) Airflow mode selection screen 6) Climate control mode select button 7) Fan speed control screen
*1: The customizable icon can be changed to 4
the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" FP216.

Climate Control

CONTINUED

284 Climate Control Panel
! Temperature control screen s04ag1202

: Touch the temperature control screen 1) Climate control ON/OFF button 2) Climate control mode indicator 3) Customizable icon*1 4) Fan speed indicator 5) Temperature control bar 6) Temperature control screen 7) Seat heater/ventilation control screen*2 8) SYNC mode indicator 9) Set temperature indicator (right-hand
side) 10) Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation
indicator*2 11) SYNC button 12) Driver's seat heater/ventilation indica-
tor*2 13) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)
*1: The customizable icon can be changed to the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" FP216.
*2: For details, refer to "Front Seat Heater and Ventilation" FP290.

Automatic Climate Control Operation 285

4-3. Automatic Climate Control Operation
s04ai
Climate control screen (dual 7.0-inch display models)

Climate control screen (11.6-inch display models) 1) Airflow distribution 2) Air inlet selection 3) Air conditioner compressor 4) Fan speed
When the full auto mode is selected, the following functions are automatically controlled. . Fan speed . Airflow distribution . Air inlet selection . Air conditioner compressor operation
To activate this mode, perform the following. 1. Touch the climate control mode indicator. 2. Touch "AUTO".

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to "Temperature Control" FP288.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner compressor will

automatically turn on if the temperature

is set much lower than the current

outlet air temperature. Even in this case, the "A/C" indicator light on the

Climate Control

climate control screen illuminates.

. The air conditioner may not operate

in the following cases:

When the cabin temperature is

low

When the ambient temperature

decreases close to 328F (08C)

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. If something other than temperature

control is operated while the display is

in full auto mode, the "FULL" indicator

will turn off and the "AUTO" indicator

light will remain illuminated. You can

then manually control the system as

desired using the climate control

screen. To change the system back to

full auto mode, touch "AUTO".

CONTINUED

286 Automatic Climate Control Operation

To turn off the climate control system, touch the climate control ON/OFF button.
At this time, the air inlet selection mode will differ depending on the auto mode and manual mode.
Auto mode: Changes to the outside air circulation mode.
Manual mode: Continues the mode when the climate control mode is set to OFF.

& Sensors

and become damaged, the system may s04ai03 not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the sensors to impact.
Keep water away from the sensors.
Do not cover the sensors.

1) Solar sensor 2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly

Manual Climate Control 287

4-4. Manual Climate Control
s04ab
& Airflow Mode Selection
Select the preferred airflow mode bys04tahb0e4 following operation. Via the climate control screen: 1. Touch the climate control mode indicator. 2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.
Airflow modes are as follows.

A) Models with rear ventilators
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

foot outlets
4
A) Models with rear ventilators Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the instrument panel and some through windshield defroster outlets (A small amount of air flows to the windshield and both side windows to prevent fogging.)

Climate Control

A) Models with rear ventilators Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

A) Models with rear ventilators Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the

CONTINUED

288 Manual Climate Control

A) Models with rear ventilators
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel

& Temperature Control
Perform the following operation to regus0l4aabt0e5 the temperature of airflow from the air outlets. Temperature control buttons: Press the temperature control button to the blue side (cool) or the red side (warm). Temperature control screen: 1. Touch the set temperature indicator. 2. Touch and move the temperature control bar.
! Max A/C mode For quicker cooling, touch "MAX A/sC04a"b0o50n3 the climate control mode select button or customizable icon. When the Max A/C mode is on, the following settings will be changed automatically. . The air conditioner will turn on. . The temperature will be set on the lowest. . The fan speed will be set on the maximum speed. . The air inlet will be set to the recirculation mode. . The airflow mode setting will be set to the ventilation mode.
To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to the previous setting, touch "MAX A/C"

again.
! SYNC mode (11.6-inch display models)
When the SYNC mode is turned ons,04babo05t0h5 the driver's and passenger's side temperatures are synchronized using the driver's side temperature control button and temperature control display.
1. Touch the set temperature indicator.
2. Touch "SYNC" to turn the SYNC mode on or off.
The SYNC mode indicator will turn white.
Touch "SYNC" again, press the passenger's side temperature control button or operate the passenger's side temperature control bar to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC mode indicator will be grayed out. In this case, temperature control on the driver's side and passenger's side will be separated. The temperature will be controlled individually using the driver's and passenger's temperature control button and the driver's and passenger's temperature control bar.
& Fan Speed Control
Select the preferred fan speed bys04tahb0e6 following operation.
Via the fan speed indicator: Touch or on the climate control screen.

Manual Climate Control 289

Via the fan speed control screen: 1. Touch the climate control mode indicator 2. Touch the preferred fan speed. It is also possible to change the fan speed by dragging.
& Air Conditioner Control
The air conditioner operates only whens04tahb0e7 engine is running. Perform the following operation while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner. . If "A/C" is displayed on the customizable icon, touch "A/C". When the air conditioner is on, the "A/C" indicator illuminates. . If a customizable icon other than "A/C" is displayed, touch the climate control mode indicator. Then touch "A/C" on the climate control mode select button. When the air conditioner is on, "A/C" will turn blue.
To turn off the air conditioner, touch "A/C" again. The indicator light will turn off or it will be grayed out.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approximately 328F (08C), the air conditioner and dehumidification system may not work properly.

& Air Inlet Selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the airs0in4albe08t selection button.

Recirculation mode: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. This mode is used for the following cases.
. When driving on a dusty road
. When you want cooling performance to increase (for example, in particularly hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select

this mode.

is displayed on the customizable

icon:

(1) Touch .

is not displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode

indicator.

(2) Touch on the climate control

mode select button.

will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. This mode is used for the following cases. . When the road is no longer dusty . When the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature
Perform the same operation as the recirculation mode to change the mode.
will be displayed on the climate control 4
mode indicator.
WARNING
Continued operation in the recirculation mode may fog up the windows. Switch to the outside air circulation mode as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.
& To Turn Off the Climate Control System
To turn off the climate control sysst0e4amb10, touch the climate control ON/OFF button.

Climate Control

290 Front Seat Heater and Ventilation

4-5. Front Seat Heater and Ventilation (If Equipped)
s04al
& Front Seat Heater
The seat heater operates when the ignsi0t4ioal0n1 switch is in the "ON" position.
1) Front seat display 2) Seat heater selector icon 3) Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation
indicator 4) Driver's seat heater/ventilation indicator 1. Touch the seat heater/ventilation indicator on the climate control screen. 2. Touch the seat heater selector icon on the driver/passenger climate screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

HIGH: 3 indicator lights are illuminated. MID: 2 indicator lights are illuminated. LOW: 1 indicator light is illuminated. OFF: All indicator lights turn off.
When in LOW mode, touch the icon again to turn all indicators OFF. Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker. Holding and releasing the seat heater icon turns the seat heater OFF in any mode.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

& Front Seat Ventilation
The front seat ventilation operates ws0h4eal0n2 the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
1) Front seat display 2) Seat ventilation selector icon 3) Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation
indicator 4) Driver's seat heater/ventilation indicator 1. Touch the seat heater/ventilation indicator on the climate control screen. 2. Touch the seat ventilation selector icon on the driver/passenger climate screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

Defrosting 291

4-6. Defrosting
s04ah
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows, perform the following procedures. . To select the " " mode, press the defroster button. . To select the " " mode, touch " " on the airflow mode selection screen.
NOTE
. When the " " or " " mode is selected, the air conditioner compressor operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner button to defrost the windshield more quickly. However, the indicator on the air conditioner button may not illuminate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the outside air circulation mode. . After defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button " ", pressing the button again returns the system to the setting that had been selected before the defroster was activated.
4

Climate Control

292 Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner

4-7. Operating Tips for Heater and Air Conditioner
s04ad
& Cleaning Ventilator Grille s04ad01
1) Front ventilator inlet grille 2) Condenser Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

& Efficient Cooling after Parking in Direct Sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drives0w4aidt0h2 the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.
& Lubrication Oil Circulation in the Refrigerant Circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressso04rada03t a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking Air Conditioning System before Summer Season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrsi0g4aedr0-4 ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and Dehumidifying in High Humidity and Low Temperature Weather Condition
Under certain weather conditions (sh04iagd0h5 relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.
& Air Conditioner Compressor Shut-Off When Engine Is Heavily Loaded
To improve acceleration and gas milesa04gade06, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.

Air Filtration System 293

& Refrigerant for Your Climate Control System
s04ad07
1) Air conditioner label Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf). Before adding, changing or checking the refrigerant, check the air conditioner label in the location shown in the illustration to confirm which type of refrigerant is used in your vehicle. Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

4-8. Air Filtration System
s04ae
Your vehicle's air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the cabin air filter according to the replacement schedule found in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter's dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter. . Reduction of the airflow through
the vents. . Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing the Cabin Air Filter

1. Remove the glove box.

s04ae01

(1) Open the glove box.

Climate Control

4
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the glove box.

CONTINUED

294 Air Filtration System

doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

(3) Push both sides of the glove box inward to unlock the stoppers and then pull down the glove box as far as it will go.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one and then reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally and remove the hinge portion. When

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.

Air Filtration System 295 4

Climate Control

5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 298 Printed Antenna........................s.0.5........................ 298

Audio
Roof Antenna..................................................... 298 5-2. Audio Set .........................................................298

Audio

298 Antenna

5-1. Antenna & Printed Antenna
CAUTION

s05aa s05aa01

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna is printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.

any other material over the antenna portion of the rear window glass.

& Roof Antenna

s05aa03

5-2. Audio Set
s05ac
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/ audio Owner's Manual for details.

The satellite radio antenna and telematics antenna (if equipped) are installed in the center of the roof at the rear.

The antenna is printed on the inner surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate significantly if you apply tinting film or

6-1. Interior Light ................................................... 302 Dome Light...............................s.0.6........................ 302 Map Lights ......................................................... 302 Cargo Area Light (Outback) ................................ 303
OFF Delay Timer................................................. 303 6-2. Sun Visors....................................................... 303
Vanity Mirror with Light....................................... 304
6-3. Storage Compartment .................................... 304 Glove Box .......................................................... 305 Center Console................................................... 305
Overhead Console .............................................. 305 6-4. Cup Holder ...................................................... 306
Front Passenger's Cup Holder ............................ 306
Rear Passenger's Cup Holder ............................. 307 6-5. Bottle Holders ................................................. 307 6-6. Accessory Power Outlets .............................. 308 6-7. USB Power Supply ......................................... 310
How to Use the USB Power Supply ..................... 310

Interior Equipment
6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option) ..................................311 6-9. Assist Grip .......................................................312 6-10. Coat Hook ......................................................312 6-11. Shopping Bag Hook ......................................313
Legacy............................................................... 313 Outback ............................................................. 313 6-12. Floor Mat ........................................................314 6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback
If Equipped) ...................................................314 To Install the Cover Housing .............................. 315 Using the Cover ................................................. 315 To Remove the Cover Housing ........................... 317 To Stow the Cover.............................................. 318
To Take Out the Stowed Cover ........................... 319 6
6-14. Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback) ......319 6-15. Adjustable Storage Net (Outback) ...............320 6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment..............320

Interior Equipment

302 Interior Light

6-1. Interior Light
s06aa
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

& Dome Light

s06aa01

DOOR: The dome light illuminates automatically when any of the doors (for Outback, including the rear gate) is opened. Several seconds after all of the doors (including the rear gate) are closed, the dome light gradually turns off. For details, refer to "OFF Delay Timer" FP303.

& Map Lights
! Map light switches

s06aa06 s06aa0606

CAUTION Do not keep watching the light source because they use LEDs. Doing so could damage your eyes.

! Door interlock switch

s06aa0602

1) ON 2) DOOR 3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following positions:
ON: The light turns on. OFF: The light turns off.

To turn on the map light, press the lens. To turn it off, press the lens again.

1) Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate automatically in conjunction with a door opening. However, the lights can be turned on manually by pressing the map light lens. DOOR: The map lights illuminate automatically when any of the doors (other than the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened even

Sun Visors 303

while the map light is off. Several seconds after all of the doors (other than the rear gate or trunk lid) are closed, the map lights gradually turn off. For details, refer to "OFF Delay Timer" FP303.
& Cargo Area Light (Outback) s06aa02
1) ON 2) OFF 3) DOOR The cargo area light switch has the following positions. ON: The light turns on. OFF: The light turns off. DOOR: The light illuminates only when the rear gate is opened. The light gradually turns off several seconds after the rear gate is closed. For details, refer to "OFF

Delay Timer" FP303.
& OFF Delay Timer
The following lights have an automs0a6atai0c7 illumination function. . Dome light . Map lights . Trunk (Legacy) . Cargo area light (Outback)
When the interior light switch is set to the "DOOR" position, the light will automatically turn on and off depending on the locking and unlocking of the doors, the opening and closing of the doors, as well as the position of the ignition switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in which the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, the setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).

6-2. Sun Visors
s06ac
6
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.
With the sun visor positioned over the side CONTINUED

Interior Equipment

304 Storage Compartment

window, you can slide the sun visor toward the rear to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. To slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. When you have finished sliding it, push it toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION Do not slide the sun visor over the windshield. The slided sun visor would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

& Vanity Mirror with Light s06ac02 CAUTION Keep the vanity mirror cover closed while the car is being driven to avoid being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.

6-3. Storage Compartment
s06ad
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an accident.
. Do not store the following items in the storage compartment. Otherwise, it may cause a fire or accident. Spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items. Plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter.

& Glove Box

Storage Compartment 305

s06ad01

& Center Console
The center console box provides a stosr0a6agd0e2 space.

& Overhead Console

s06ad04

1) Lock 2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid firmly upward. To lock the glove box, insert the key and turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box, insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.

1) Upper lid opening lever 2) Upper and lower lid opening lever (dotted
surface)
The center console box has a two-layer structure consisting of an upper compartment and lower compartment.

To open the console, push on the lid lightly 6
and it will automatically open. WARNING
Do not use the overhead console while driving. Doing so may distract you from the road conditions ahead and cause an accident that may result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION . Before operating this vehicle, en-
sure that the overhead console is closed.

Interior Equipment

CONTINUED

306 Cup Holder
. When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.
. Do not pull the lid when opening the overhead console. There is the risk that the overhead console may be damaged.

6-4. Cup Holder
s06ae
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery, carpets or audio equipment.

& Front Passenger's Cup Holder
s06ae01
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
. Take care not to spill a beverage on the select lever or any switch(es) in the adjacent area. If the beverage is spilled, it may cause a malfunction of the select lever and/or switch(es).

1) Spacer
The dual cup holder is built into the center console. Place a spacer in it before putting in a small cup or can.

Bottle Holders 307

& Rear Passenger's Cup Holder s06ae02
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest. CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage is in the cup holder, do not fold down or recline any seat. Otherwise, the beverage could spill while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

6-5. Bottle Holders
s06av
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, if the beverage is hot, it could burn you and/or your passengers.

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items.
6

Interior Equipment

The bottle holder equipped on each door

308 Accessory Power Outlets
6-6. Accessory Power Outlets
s06af

Power outlet in the glove box Power outlet in the center console (if equipped)

Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)
Accessory power outlets are provided in the glove box, center console and cargo area. Electrical power (12 V DC) from the battery is available at any of the outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W.

CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not in use.
. Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12 V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet. When using appliances connected to two or more outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly. . Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge. . Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord on your electrical appliance will not interfere with your shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while driving.

Power outlet in the glove box

Accessory Power Outlets 309
when the lid is closed, because there are gaps that allow the cords to come out. Pass the cord of the electrical appliance through this gap.
6

Interior Equipment

Power outlet in the center console (if equipped)
NOTE
The power outlets in the center console and the glove box can be used even

310 USB Power Supply

6-7. USB Power Supply
s06ay
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB terminal that can be used is the Atype. If a different specification of terminal is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible, or the device may malfunction.
. There is a risk that a connected device may malfunction or data may be damaged. The connection of a device shall be performed at your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a malfunction, observe the following precautions. Do not connect a USB hub. Do not insert any metal or other foreign object into the USB terminal. Do not spill water or other liquid on the USB terminal.
. Be careful not to pull the connected cable. Doing so could break the USB terminal and the connected device.

. If a device is connected for a long time when the engine is not running, doing so may cause the risk of a discharged battery. Even when the engine is running, we recommend that you do not connect a device for an unnecessarily long time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning device. Doing so may cause the risk of smoke and fire.
NOTE
. The rated voltage of each USB terminal is 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A). For details about the maximum rated power, refer to "How to Use the USB Power Supply" FP310. Before connecting a device, be sure to read the instruction manual of the device and check whether or not this specification of the output is supported by the device. If a device that requires power exceeding the maximum rating is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if charging could be completed, the time required for charging may be longer than when the genuine charger for that device is used. . Depending on the device, charging may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to connect the device using the special cable. . When a device that communicates with a PC is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. . When connect a device for charging, disconnect the device promptly after charging is completed.
& How to Use the USB Power Supply
s06ay01
Front seat USB power supply (an audio device can be connected and used)

Ashtray (Dealer Option) 311

Console USB power supply (charge only) (if equipped)
Use the USB terminal to use or charge an electronic device.
When using the USB, open the USB power supply cover. After use, close it.
When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, the power can be supplied to the electronic device. Up to 5 V/2.1 A can be supplied from each terminal (total of 4.2 A).

6-8. Ashtray (Dealer Option)
s06ag
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close the ashtray securely. If you keep the ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ashtray's inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the 6
locations of the cup holders, refer to "Cup Holder" FP306. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to "Bottle Holders" FP307.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Interior Equipment

312 Assist Grip 6-9. Assist Grip

CAUTION

6-10. Coat Hook

s06bd

s06ah

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it

and damage the object.

1) Assist grip
The assist grip is to be held to support the body of the passengers when they are in the seat and the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not hold the assist grip when getting up from the seat. Holding and pulling the assist grip in the wrong way could break the grip and possibly cause injury.

WARNING
Obey the following instructions. . Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers. . Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets. If these instructions are ignored, the following may occur in sudden stops or in a collision.

. Serious injuries by the items thrown through the cabin
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag deployment
CAUTION Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driver's view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Shopping Bag Hook 313

6-11. Shopping Bag Hook

& Legacy

s06ai s06ai01

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

& Outback CAUTION

s06ai02

Do not hang items on the shopping bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or more.

Interior Equipment

A shopping bag hook is attached to each inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk lid opening.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Store the hook after using it.

The coat hook is attached to each rear passenger's assist grip.

314 Floor Mat 6-12. Floor Mat

. Do not use more than one floor 6-13. Lifting Cargo Cover

s06aj

mat.

(Outback If Equipped)

s06ak

The Lifting Cargo Cover is provided to cover the cargo area and to protect its contents from direct sunlight.

The cover also has the practicability of its easy lift-up function, eliminating the need to rewind the cover all the way when accessing the cargo.

This cover can be detached to make room for additional cargo.

CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward. . Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with grommets in the correct locations. . Make sure that the driver's floor mat is placed back in its proper location and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

Retaining pins are located on the driver's side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

1) Cargo area cover 2) Cover housing 3) Front cover 4) Front cover rod

Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback If Equipped) 315

& To Install the Cover Housing s06ak05

that the cover is not damaged

1. Insert the left side cover housing end into the retainer, then insert the right cover housing end into the right retainer. Make sure both ends are clicked into the retainers.
NOTE
If the label on the cover housing is placed on the top, the cover housing will be installed in reverse and it will not be affixed to the vehicle body.

2. Align the right side of the front cover rod end with a triangle mark on the cargo area trim.
NOTE
When the rear seatbacks are reclined, align the front cover rod to the rear triangle mark.
3. Push the front cover rod on the right side against the cargo area trim to shorten the front cover rod. 4. Once the right side is aligned, align the left side to a triangle mark on the cargo area trim to fix the front cover in place.
CAUTION
When reclining the rear seatback, move the front cover backward so

& Using the Cover WARNING

s06ak01

Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and the object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.
6

Interior Equipment

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and rewinding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

CONTINUED

316 Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback If Equipped)

! To extend the cover

s06ak0101

center and pull it toward you, then slightly lower it to free the stoppers in the catches.

A Stopper 1) Tilt up 2) Pull out
1. Hold the cover by the handle in the center, tilt it up and pull it out to free the stoppers.

2. Pull out the cover by the handle in the center to extend it. Then insert the stoppers into the catches as shown.

! To rewind the cover

s06ak0103

A) Stopper 1) Rewind 2) Tilt up
2. Slowly rewind the cover completely. Then tilt the cover up by the handle to hook the stoppers.

1. Hold the cover by the handle in the

Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback If Equipped) 317
catches.
& To Remove the Cover Housing
s06ak02
1. Slowly rewind the cover completely. Then tilt the cover up by the handle to hook the stoppers. 2. Push the front cover rod on the right side against the cargo area trim to shorten the front cover rod.

Interior Equipment

CAUTION

1. Push down the handle in the center to lift the cover up.

Do not leave the cover dangling. Make sure the stoppers are hooked

The stoppers will slide up the grooves and stop at the top.

on to the cover housing. Otherwise

the cover may be torn and damaged.

! To lift the cover CAUTION

s06ak0102

Do not drive with the cover lifted up. Doing so could obstruct the rearward view.

3. Remove the front cover and place it on the cover housing.

2. To lower the lifted cover, hold the cover by the handle and pull it back into to the

CONTINUED

318 Lifting Cargo Cover (Outback If Equipped)
& To Stow the Cover
The cover can be stowed in the under-sf0l6oaok1r1 storage.

4. Hold down the button on the right-hand cargo area trim and lift up the right-hand cover housing end.
5. Gently slide the left-hand cover end out to the right then remove the cover housing.

1. To open the cargo floor lid, pull the handle up.

2. Use the hook provided on the back to hang the cargo floor lid open.
The hook can be hanged onto the opening of the rear gate.

3. Remove the left and right corners of the cargo floor lid.

Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback) 319

& To Take Out the Stowed Cover s06ak10

6-14. Convenient Tie-Down Hooks (Outback)
s06am
CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 110 lbs (50 kg) per hook.

4. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area under-floor storage.

1. Raise the cover.

NOTE

2. Take out the cover housing by lifting it

To make enough room for the cover toward you.

when stowing, first insert the right-

hand side into the ditch on the cargo

area trim.

Interior Equipment

The cargo area is equipped with several tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.
CONTINUED

320 Adjustable Storage Net (Outback)

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses. When not in use, put the hooks up into the storing recesses.

6-15. Adjustable Storage Net (Outback)
s06be

6-16. Under-Floor Storage Compartment
s06an
The subfloor storage compartment is located under the floor of the trunk or cargo area and can be used to store small items. To open the lid, pull the tab or handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor storage in the trunk or cargo area.

There is an adjustable storage net in the cargo area. Push the net downward to expand the cargo area.

CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the subfloor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the subfloor storage compartment.

Legacy

Under-Floor Storage Compartment 321
NOTE
The lid cannot be hooked while the Lifting Cargo Cover is being used. Rewind the cover completely to open the lid.
6

Interior Equipment

Outback
For Outback, hang the hook provided on the underside of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to keep the lid open.

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 326 Fuel Requirements....................s.0.7........................ 326 Fuel Filler Lid and Cap........................................ 328
7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only) ............... 332 7-3. Preparing to Drive .......................................... 333 7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models
without Push-Button Ignition Switch) ......... 334 General Precautions When Starting/Stopping
Engine.............................................................. 334
Starting Engine................................................... 334 Stopping the Engine ........................................... 335 Steering Lock ..................................................... 336 7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models
with Push-Button Start System) .................. 336 Safety Precautions.............................................. 336 Operating Range for Push-Button Start System... 336 Starting Engine................................................... 336 Stopping Engine ................................................. 338 When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate
Properly ........................................................... 338 Steering Lock ..................................................... 338
7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) .............................................. 339 Remote Engine Starter Transceiver (Fob) ............ 339 Alternate Operation Method for Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System" ........................................................... 343 Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models without "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System")....................... 343

Starting and Operating
Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System") ...................... 344
Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown ................................................ 344
Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of the Vehicle ....................................................... 344
Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter Transceiver).......................................... 344
System Maintenance .......................................... 345 Certification for Remote Engine Starter .............. 346 7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission .............347 Continuously Variable Transmission Features..... 347 Select Lever ....................................................... 348 Shift Lock Function............................................ 349 Selection of Manual Mode .................................. 351
Driving Tips ....................................................... 352 7
7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped) ....................................353 Intelligent (I) Mode ............................................. 353 Sport Sharp (S#) Mode ....................................... 353 SI-DRIVE Switches ............................................. 353
7-9. Power Steering ................................................354 7-10. Braking ...........................................................355
Braking Tips ...................................................... 355 Brake System..................................................... 355 Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators............ 356 7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ....................356 ABS Self-Check.................................................. 357 ABS Warning Light............................................. 357

Starting and Operating

Starting and Operating
7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System ........................................................... 357 EBD System Malfunctions................................... 357
7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System .............. 358 Vehicle Dynamics Control System Monitor .......... 359 To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System ............................................................. 359
7-14. X-MODE (Outback)........................................ 360 To Activate/Deactivate the X-MODE ..................... 361 Hill Descent Control Function ............................. 362
7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models) ...................................... 363 TPMS Screen...................................................... 365
7-16. Parking Your Vehicle .................................... 365 Electronic Parking Brake .................................... 366 Parking Tips ....................................................... 371
7-17. Auto Start Stop System ............................... 372 System Operation ............................................... 372 Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status..... 375 System Warning ................................................. 375
7-18. Front View Monitor (If Equipped) ................ 376 How to Access the Front View Monitor................ 377 How to Cancel the Front View Monitor ................ 377 Range of Image on Screen.................................. 377 Guiding Line....................................................... 378 Handling of Camera ............................................ 378
7-19. Rear View Camera ........................................ 379 How to Use the Rear View Camera ...................... 380 Viewing Range on the Screen ............................. 381 Help Lines .......................................................... 382

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped) ...............................384 System Features ................................................ 384 System Operation .............................................. 386 BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer ............................................................. 388 BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator.................................... 389 BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator.............................. 390 To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA ............................ 390 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 391 Handling of Radar Sensors................................. 392
7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped) ....................................393
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview.......................................................... 394
Operating Conditions ......................................... 396 Object Detection Warning Function .................... 399 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
Function Operation .......................................... 400 Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) System Operation .................................. 402 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System
ON/OFF Setting ................................................ 402 RAB Warning Indicator....................................... 403 Handling of the Sonar Sensors........................... 403 7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped) ......404 User Recognition Function ................................. 408 Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning .................... 410 Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning ....... 411 Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 412 Registering and Deleting a User ......................... 414

Registering and Deleting Driver Position Personalization ................................................. 414
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF Settings ......... 414

Starting and Operating Certification for Driver Monitoring System
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 415

Starting and Operating

326 Fuel

7-1. Fuel
s07aa
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of those fuels are not recommended.
& Fuel Requirements
The engine is designed to operate us0s7iana0g1 unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
NOTE
When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to reduce the risk of engine overheat.

! Fuel octane rating Using a gasoline with a lower octanesr0a7atai0n10g3 can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON s07aa010301
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI s07aa010302
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline The neck of the fuel filler pipe is dess0ig7ana0e10d4 to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Reformulated gasoline SUBARU supports the use of reformsu0l7aaat0e12d8 gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
! MMT Some gasoline contains an octane-esn07haaa01n0-6 cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.4 L model)
Your use of gasoline with detergesn0t7aaa01d2-9 ditives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

Fuel 327

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than 15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.5 L model)
Your use of gasoline with detergesn0t7aaa01d0-7 ditives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than 10% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, 7
you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

328 Fuel

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel Filler Lid and Cap s07aa02
! Locations of the fuel filler lid s07aa0202
! Refueling Only one person should be involvs0e7daa02i0n1 refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress. Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station. 1. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below.
Press the " " button on the key fob. Press the unlock side of the power door locking switch. Turn the ignition switch to "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF". 2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically. Open it further by hand.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any static electricity that may be present on your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

Fuel 329

1) Open 2) Close
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position first and then close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it firmly and turn it slowly to the left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING . When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard. . Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard.

Starting and Operating

6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel. 7. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-

wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be

certain not to catch the tether under the

cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

8. Close the fuel filler lid completely. CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

CONTINUED

330 Fuel

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
NOTE
. You will see the " " sign in the fuel gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle. . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is caught under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to "CHECK ENGINE Warning Light/Malfunction Indicator Light" FP182. . To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one of the operations below. However if these operations are performed when the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid will not lock when it is subsequently closed.
Press the " " button on the key fob. Press the lock side of the power door locking switch. . When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock

system, the fuel filler lid will be locked or unlocked at the same time.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.
! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Legacy)
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened sd0u7aea02t0o4 a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the trunk.
1. Remove the access cover at the rightside of the trunk trim.

! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened (Outback)
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened sd0u7aea02t0o3 a malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the cargo area.

Fuel 331

1) Clip 2. Remove the yellow clip from the trim.

1) Clip 2. Remove the yellow clip from the trim.
7

1. Remove the access cover at the rightside of the cargo area trim using a flathead screwdriver.

Starting and Operating

3. Pull the yellow clip to unlock the fuel filler lid.

332 State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)

7-2. State Emission Testing (U.S. Only)
s07ab
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model. Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
CAUTION . At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or service station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result. . Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicle's emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicle's registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engine's emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an examination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to a burned out bulb) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicle's computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors "NOT READY" is greater than one. If the vehicle's battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU Dealer for service.
Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicle's wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in one place. Prior to your vehicle being put on a dynamometer, tell your emission

Preparing to Drive 333

inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicle must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. Preparing to Drive
s07ac
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy) and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops. . When towing a trailer, refer to "Trai-
ler Hitch (Outback If Equipped)" 7
FP436.

Starting and Operating

334 Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

7-4. Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)
s07bd
& General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine
s07bd06
WARNING
. Never start the engine from outside the vehicle (except when using the remote engine start system). It may result in an accident.
. Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation, such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poisoning.
. Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flammable substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can create a fire hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION . If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn. . When starting the engine, be sure to sit in the driver's seat (except when using the remote engine start system).
NOTE
. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine has started. . Until the engine is warmed up sufficiently, the engine speed is maintained high. The engine speed will gradually drop as the engine warms up. . On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel used and the driving condition (repeated short trips when the engine is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a case, it is recommended to switch to a different brand of fuel. . On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when the accelerator is operated rapidly such as a rapid start-up and a rapid acceleration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and rear window defogger are turned off.

& Starting Engine CAUTION

s07bd01

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

NOTE
. It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle's self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the "ON" position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine. . Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

335 Starting and Stopping the Engine (Models without Push-Button Ignition Switch)

CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the "N" position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the "P" position.
1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. 3. Shift the select lever to the "P" or "N" position (preferably "P" position). The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to "Warning and Indicator Lights" FP177. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. If the engine does not start, perform the following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is applied, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the "LOCK" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the "START" position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the "LOCK" position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position and that the parking brake is applied.

& Stopping the Engine
The ignition switch should be turnesd07bod0f2f only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental activation of the "LOCK" position on the ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.
7
1. Stop the vehicle completely. 2. Move the select lever to the "P" position. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK/ OFF" position.
The engine will stop, and the power will be switched off.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

336 Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

& Steering Lock
After stopping the engine and the kes0y7bdi0s7 removed from ignition switch, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering lock will be automatically released.
! When the steering lock cannot be released
When you cannot unlock the stes0e7brdi0n70g1 wheel, perform the following steps.
1. Check that the parking brake is applied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in the "P" position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position while turning the steering wheel left and right.
If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by doing the steps, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-5. Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with PushButton Start System)
s07be
& Safety Precautions
Refer to "Safety Precautions" FP116s.07be06

& Operating Range for PushButton Start System
Refer to "Operating Range for Psu07sbeh0-1 Button Start System" FP170.

& Starting Engine WARNING

s07be03

. There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine" FP334.
. If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in orange, there may be a malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green after the engine has started, it means that the steering is still locked. While moving the steering wheel right and left, depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch.
. Do not continue pressing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing so could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop pressing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the pushbutton ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to "OFF". Wait 10 seconds, and then press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

337 Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

NOTE
. When pressing the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal:
The engine starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds and after starting the engine, the starter stops automatically. The engine can be started regardless of the power status. . If the engine does not start, check the security indicator light. Then press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power to "OFF". If the light had illuminated, try to start the engine again. If the light had been off, press the push-button ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal more forcefully. . The engine start procedures may not function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such a case, refer to "Starting Engine" FP466. . If the vehicle battery is discharged, the steering cannot be unlocked. Charge the battery. . Until the engine is warmed up sufficiently, the engine speed will be maintained high. The engine speed will

decrease as the engine warms up. . Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.
1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows. 1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the driver's seat. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 3. Make sure the select lever is in the "P" position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the "N" position, however, for safety reasons, start in the "P" position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the "N" position, the indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the "P"

position.

. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the "P" posi-

Starting and Operating

tion, and switch the power to "ACC".

Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

CONTINUED

338 Starting and Stopping Engine (Models with Push-Button Start System)

& Stopping Engine
1. Stop the vehicle completely.

s07be04

2. Move the select lever to the "P"

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving. When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop. The switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer. The switch is pressed briefly 3 times or more in succession. When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal. The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION . Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other than the "P" position. . If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position, the power will be in "ACC". If the vehicle is left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.
& When Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
Refer to "Access Key Fob If Accesss0K7bee0y5 Fob Does Not Operate Properly" FP465.

& Steering Lock
After stopping the engine and any sd07obeo0r7 including the rear gate is opened, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. When the engine is restarted, the steering lock will be automatically released. ! When the steering lock cannot be
released s07be0701
1) Operation indicator 2) Push-button ignition switch When you cannot restart the engine due to the steering lock, check the status of operation indicator and perform the following steps.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) 339

! Operation indicator flashing in green
s07be070101
1. Check that the select lever is set in the "P" position. 2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.
! Operation indicator flashing in orange
s07be070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-6. Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)
s07az
WARNING
. There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General Precautions When Starting/Stopping Engine" FP334.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of carbon monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.

mote engine start system.
NOTE
. The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by local laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system. . When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that you inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

& Remote Engine Starter

Transceiver (Fob)

s07az21

Starting and Operating

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the re-

1) Fob button

CONTINUED

340 Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

! Starting the engine
NOTE

s07az2101

All vehicle doors (including rear gate)

and the engine hood must be closed prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point will

prevent starting or cause the engine to stop.

The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on your remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within operating range of the system and the start request is received, the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.
If the fob is not within range (the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will indicate two long flashes without beeping.
The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following will occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to restart the engine if it determines a vehicle malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine Press and hold the fob button for at lse07aasz2t1022 seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request is not received (for example, if the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety features For safety and security reasonss0,7azt2h10e3 remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. A key is in the ignition switch.
. The engine hood is open.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 rpm.
. The security alarm is triggered.
. The select lever is not in the "P" position.
If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it will prevent starting or stop the engine, and sound the horn and flash side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the vehicle's engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to a vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle. . If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob confirmation
Your remote engine starter fobs07iasz210a4 bidirectional transceiver that can confirm system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fob's LED-backlit button and internal piezo buzzer will indicate the status of the system using the following the flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within operational range of the system.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) 341 7
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

342 Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

Precondition Fob start button is being pressed User attempts to start engine by pressing fob button twice within 3 sec
Engine idling by remote engine start operation User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 2 sec

Fob Indication

Flash

Beep

Continuous while button is held down

1 flash

1 beep

2 flashes

2 beeps

1 flash every 3 sec

3 flashes

3 beeps

2 long flashes

1 flash every 3 sec

3 flashes

3 beeps

3 flashes 1 flash every 3 sec

3 beeps --

Meaning
The fob is transmitting an RF signal
Engine start request received Engine started successfully Engine idling Vehicle is in range but engine not started Vehicle not in range (engine not started) Engine idling Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety reasons (see sections above) Engine stopped by user request Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) 343

& Alternate Operation Method for Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System"
s07az22
Access key fob 1) Lock button An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the engine as follows. ! Before starting the engine Before using the remote engines07sazt2a2r01t system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions. . The select lever is in the "P" position. . All doors including the rear gate are closed.

. The engine hood is closed. . The push-button ignition switch is in the "OFF" position.
! Starting the engine To start the engine with remote esn07gazi2n20e2 start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once. 2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again. 3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once. 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, release the lock button. The engine will then start successfully.
! Stopping the engine Press and hold the lock button to stos0p7azt2h20e3 engine with remote engine start system.
! Remote start safety features For detailed information, refer to "Res0m7azo22t0e4 start safety features" FP340.

& Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models without "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System")
s07az03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm System"

FP141.

Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn it to the "ON"

position.

Press any button on the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

Starting and Operating

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is opened.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "START" position to restart the engine.

CONTINUED

344 Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

& Entering the Vehicle While It Is Running via Remote Start (Models with "Keyless Access with Push-Button Start System")
s07az24
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function and remote keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm System" FP141.
Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press any button on the access key fob.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will remain running provided the access key fob is present and detected by the vehicle.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch once while depressing the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. The remote engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash

and beep 3 times to indicate that the remote start system has been shut down.
& Entering the Vehicle Following Remote Engine Start Shutdown
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehics0l7eazi1s0 opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immediately following remote engine start shutdown.
& Pre-heating or Pre-cooling the Interior of the Vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the st0e7amz0-4 perature controls to the desired setting and operation. After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to your setting.
& Remote Transmitter Program (Remote Engine Starter Transceiver)
New transmitters can be programmes0d7azt1o3 the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are desired (the system will accept up to eight transmitters). New remote engine start transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver's door (the driver's door must remain open throughout the entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/ "OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", then back to "ON" again and leave the ignition "ON" throughout the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode.
5. Press and release the " " button on the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter learn mode if the key is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the door is closed

Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option) 345

or after 2 minutes.

& System Maintenance

NOTE

s07az09

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle's battery is replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the vehicle a minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to resynchronize.

! Changing the battery CAUTION

s07az0901

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery.
. Battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
For models with "keyless access with push-button start system": Perform the procedure described in "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" FP526.
For remote engine starter transceiver: The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side lower left corner of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start 7
transmitter halves apart using a small flathead screwdriver.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

346 Remote Engine Start System (Dealer Option)

3. Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with new one. Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery "+" should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

& Certification for Remote Engine Starter
s07az23
! U.S.-spec. models s07az2301 CAUTION
FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

! Canada-spec. models

s07az2302

Continuously Variable Transmission 347

7-7. Continuously Variable Transmission
s07bg
WARNING
Do not shift from the "P" or "N" position into the "D" or "R" position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION . Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to observe these precautions could cause damage to the transmission. Shift into the "P" or "R" posi-
tion only after the vehicle has completely stopped. Do not shift from the "D" position into the "R" position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped. . Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the "N" or "P" position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat. . Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set in a forward driving position or move the vehicle forward by inertia with the select lever set in the "R" position. Doing so may result in an unexpected accident or malfunction. . When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever in the "P" position. Do not park for a long time with the select lever in any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.
& Continuously Variable Transmission Features
The continuously variable transmissios0n7bgi0s6 electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission will shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability.

The gearshift timing will automatically

shift to the normal timing after the

engine has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous hea-

vy load conditions such as towing a

camper or climbing a long, steep hill, the engine speed, vehicle speed and air

Starting and Operating

conditioning system cooling perfor-

mance may automatically be reduced.

This is not a malfunction. This phenom-

enon results from the engine control

function maintaining the cooling per-

formance of the vehicle. The engine

and vehicle speed will return to a

normal speed when the engine is able

to maintain the optimum cooling per-

formance after the heavy load de-

creases. Driving under a heavy load

must be performed with extreme care.

Do not try to pass a vehicle in front

when driving on an uphill slope while

towing.

CONTINUED

348 Continuously Variable Transmission

. The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating noise may be heard that is characteristic of this type of system. . Place the shift boot to the original position after it is lifted. If the select lever is operated with the shift boot in the rolled up position, the shift boot may have tension and it may disturb the select lever operation.

& Select Lever

s07bg01

1) Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever button
The select lever has four positions, "P", "R", "N", "D" and also has a manual gate for using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine while the select lever is in the "P" or "N" position, the engine is controlled so that the engine speed may not become too high even if the accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

! P (Park) This position is for parking the vehicsle07bag0n10d1 starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake, then shift into the "P" position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the "P" to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse) This position is for backing the vehics0le7b.g0T10o2 shift from the "N" to "R" position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the "R" position while pressing the select lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned to the "ACC" position, the movement of the select lever from the "N" to "R" position is only possible by depressing the brake pedal. For details, refer to "Shift Lock Function" FP349.
! N (Neutral) This position is for restarting a ss0t7ablgl0e10d3 engine. In this position, the transmission is

Continuously Variable Transmission 349

neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the "N" (neutral) position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
! D (Drive) This position is for normal drivings.07bTg0h10e4 transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in "D" position, depress the accelerator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
If one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the "D" position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift to any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" FP351. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission will switch from the manual mode back to the "D" position for normal driving.
! While climbing a grade s07bg010401
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is prevented from taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerating again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting resulting in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, depending on the way the accelerator pedal is depressed to accelerate the vehicle again.

& Shift Lock Function
The shift lock function helps prevenst07tbhg0e4 improper operation of the select lever. . The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed. . The select lever cannot be moved from the "P" position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and then operate the select lever. . Only the "P" position allows you to turn the key from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder (models without 7
"keyless access with push-button start system"). . Only the "P" position allows you to turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system"). . If the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position while the select lever is in the "N" position, the select lever may not be moved to the "P" position without depressing the brake pedal and pressing the select lever button.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

350 Continuously Variable Transmission

! Shift lock release If the select lever cannot be operateds0,7btgu04r0n1 the ignition switch back to the "ON" position, then move the select lever to the "P" position with the select lever button pressed and the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, check and confirm the following and release the shift lock accordingly.
. When the select lever cannot be shifted from "P" to "N": Refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release portion" FP350.
. When the select lever cannot be shifted from "N" to "R" or "P": Place the ignition switch in the "ACC" position, then move the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever still does not move, refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release portion" FP350.
If the shift lock cannot be released without using the shift lock release button in the above cases, there may be a malfunction in the shift lock system or the vehicle control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible. ! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion Perform the following procedure to res0le7bag0s40e2 the shift lock. 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine.
1) Hole 2. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.

3. Remove the grip portion of the screwdriver.
4. While depressing the brake pedal, insert the screwdriver into the hole, press the shift lock release portion using the screwdriver, and then move the select

lever.
If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.
& Selection of Manual Mode s07bg02

Continuously Variable Transmission 351
Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the "D" position to the "M" position to select the manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate. The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gearshift is possible. When the upshift indicator " " is on, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator " " is on, downshifting is possible. When both indicators are on, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has "+" indicated 7
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has "-" indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the "D" position from the "M" position.
While driving with the select lever in the "D" position, if you change gears by operating the shift paddle, the gear position indicator light illuminates and shows the current gear condition.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

352 Continuously Variable Transmission

CAUTION Do not place or hang anything on the shift paddles. Doing so may result in accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode. . If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the downshift is not possible. . If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond. . You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rapid succession. . The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving. . If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light will illuminate. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the

warning light turns off. For models with SI-DRIVE, by selecting Sport Sharp (S#) mode, upshifting will not occur automatically. According to the road conditions, shift change manually so that the tachometer needle does not enter the red zone. Also, if the engine revolutions reach the specified number, the fuel supply will be cut. In this case, perform shift up operation.

& Driving Tips NOTE

s07bg05

If the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

. On a road surface where there is a risk of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or gravel-covered road), you can pull away from a standstill safely and easily by first selecting the 2nd gear of the manual mode.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the "D" or "R" position.

. Make sure to apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by using the "D" position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This phenomenon does not indicate a malfunction.

SI-DRIVE 353

7-8. SI-DRIVE (If Equipped)
s07bc
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) works to maximize engine performance, control and efficiency. This system consists of two modes: Intelligent (I) and Sport Sharp (S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the character of the power unit changes.
& Intelligent (I) Mode s07bc02
! For smooth, efficient performance driving
s07bc0201

efficiency and smooth driveability without stress. Power delivery is moderate during acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency. This is ideal for around-town driving and situations that do not require full power output. It provides better control in difficult driving conditions, such as slippery roads or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle response.
& Sport Sharp (S#) Mode s07bc04
! For maximum performance driving s07bc0401

ideal for tackling twisting roads and for merging or overtaking other vehicles on the freeway with confidence.

& SI-DRIVE Switches

s07bc01

Starting and Operating

The linear acceleration characteristic of the Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normal driving usage.
The Intelligent (I) mode provides wellbalanced performance with greater fuel

For sports-minded drivers, the Sport Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating level of engine performance and control. The throttle becomes more responsive regardless of the engine speed. Delivering maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is

. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press the "I" switch. . To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, press the "S#" switch.
NOTE
. While the engine is cool, you cannot change to Sport Sharp (S#) mode. . The next time you turn on the engine, after you turned off the engine in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Intelligent (I) mode.
CONTINUED

354 Power Steering

. While the engine is running, if the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates, the SI-DRIVE mode changes to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. In this case, it is not possible to change to another mode. . If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer.

7-9. Power Steering
s07aj
Power steering warning light The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.
CAUTION While the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering

Braking 355

assist limitation to occur too frequently, this may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

7-10. Braking & Braking Tips
WARNING

s07ak s07ak01

Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads.

! When the brakes get wet When driving in rain or after washins0g7akt0h10e1 vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking Remember to make use of engine brs0a7kaki0n10g2 in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suds0d7eakn01l0y3 when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

& Brake System

s07ak02

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit sb07raak0k20e1

system. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

Starting and Operating

! Brake booster The brake booster uses engine mas0n7iafko02l0d2 vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance will increase.

CONTINUED

356 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

! Brake assist system WARNING

s07ak0203

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following phenomena occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly. . You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force. . You might hear the sound of ABS operating from the engine compartment.
& Disc Brake Pad Wear Warning Indicators
s07ak03
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle inspected by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-11. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
s07al
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION . The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe following distance from other vehicles. . When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy road, or over newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. When driving under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles. . When you feel the ABS operating, you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not

357 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System

pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
& ABS Self-Check
You may feel a slight shock in the brs0a7kal0e1 pedal and hear the operating noise of the ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS Warning Light
Refer to "ABS Warning Light" FP185.s07al02

7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) System
s07am
The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle's loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD function fails, the EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

& EBD System Malfunctions s07am01

Starting and Operating

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If the both warning light remains on even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an SUBARU dealer.

CONTINUED

358 Vehicle Dynamics Control System
WARNING . Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately. . If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control System
s07an
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION . Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation. . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road being travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably. . Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. . The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating properly. All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires. Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. When replacing a flat tire, use only the specified temporary

Vehicle Dynamics Control System 359

spare tire. However, even with the specified temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be reduced.
. If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate correctly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engine's output and the wheels' respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels on slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is indicated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels' tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt. The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree. An operating noise from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine. The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting the engine. . In the following circumstances, the vehicle may be less stable than it feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction. On gravel-covered or rutted roads On unfinished roads When the vehicle is towing a trailer (Outback) When the vehicle is fitted with snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for normal conditions. . It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control. . Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

System Monitor
Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control Ws0a7arnn0-1

ing Light/Vehicle Dynamics Control Op-

eration Indicator Light" FP190 and "Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control OFF Indicator Light"

FP191.

Starting and Operating

& To Turn On/Off the Vehicle Dynamics Control System
To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Contros0l7aon0n7 and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by

CONTINUED

360 X-MODE (Outback)

deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control system temporarily may help to escape from the following situations. Turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when necessary. . A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface . Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. You should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unless it is abso-

lutely necessary. If you must turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted. . When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle's running performance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely necessary. . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light flashes.

7-14. X-MODE (Outback)
s07bi
WARNING . Always use the utmost care in
driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with X-MODE could easily lead to a serious accident. . Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicle's speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.
CAUTION . Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should be used when driving on snowcovered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having

X-MODE does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation. . Activate the X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface at low speed. However, having X-MODE is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably. . Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer. . Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that the X-MODE is operating properly: All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all four tires. Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicle's door pillar.

X-MODE (Outback) 361

Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the X-MODE is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator will disappear. When the hill descent control indicator disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics Control system, etc. for driving with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and downhill.

X-MODE has the following functions.
. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enabling smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

& To Activate/Deactivate the

X-MODE

s07bi01

Starting and Operating

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1) X-MODE indicator
CONTINUED

362 X-MODE (Outback)

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes) 1) DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator 2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator
To activate or deactivate the X-MODE, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate the X-MODE when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be activated. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice. . If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is activated, a buzzer will sound once and the X-MODE will be deactivated.

. While the engine is running, if any of the following conditions is met, the X-MODE will be deactivated. In this case, it is not possible to activate the X-MODE.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates. The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes. The ABS warning light illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates. . If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it may not be possible to activate the X-MODE. Even while the X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases. . The Auto Start Stop system will be stopped while the X-MODE is activated.
Models with 2 modes: . SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow-covered road where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are visible, or for driving on an unpaved road.

. D.SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving on a road covered with deep snow where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are not visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
& Hill Descent Control Function
The hill descent control function will bs0e7bii0n3 standby mode when the X-MODE is activated and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h). The function will operate when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%. The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

363 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary the vehicle speed using the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. . During braking by the hill descent control function, the hill descent control indicator will flash. . The hill descent control function is operable regardless of the gradient of the road. . The hill descent control function may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.
An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent control function is operating. The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.

! Hill descent control indicator s07bi0301
This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in the standby mode. It flashes while the function is operating. It will disappear when the function is in the disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-operational, it will disappear when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-15. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.Spec. Models)
s07ao
7
Low tire pressure warning light The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

364 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)

WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur. (1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. (2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place. (3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver's side. Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard values shown on the tire placard. Refer to "Tires and Wheels" FP502. The tire pressure monitoring system does not function when the vehicle is sta-

tionary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

Parking Your Vehicle 365

CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal parts under the driver's seat. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.
FCC ID: CWTD1G141
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

& TPMS Screen

s07ao05

This screen displays each tire pressure. Refer to "Basic Screens" FP205.

7-16. Parking Your Vehicle
s07ap
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry 7
grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust system parts. . Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

366 Parking Your Vehicle
& Electronic Parking Brake s07ap03
1) Parking brake switch 2) Indicator light 3) Release the electronic parking brake 4) Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING . Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine. Otherwise, the parking brake may be released and an accident may occur. . If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. . If the electronic parking brake is operated under the following conditions, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. The brake is overheated. The vehicle is on a steep
slope. In such cases, the vehicle may start to move which may lead to an accident. Always use the tire stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking brake cannot be applied due to a malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure. Stop your vehicle in a flat location. Shift the select lever in the "P" position. When the select lever cannot be shifted into the "P" position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to "Shift Lock Function" FP349. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving. . Never drive with the parking brake applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary brake pad wear. Before driving off, always make sure that the parking brake has been released and the brake system warning light has turned off. . The braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when parking on a steep slope while towing a trailer (Outback)).
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic parking brake. You can apply/release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch. To release: Press the parking brake switch firmly while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed.

Parking Your Vehicle 367

Electronic parking brake indicator light
When the parking brake is applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the following indicator lights illuminate.
. The indicator light on the parking brake switch
. The electronic parking brake indicator light on the combination meter (for details, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake Indicator Light" FP187.)
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be released under the following conditions even if the parking brake switch is pressed.
The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position. The brake pedal is not depressed.

. The electronic parking brake system uses motors to apply the parking brake. Therefore, operating sounds from the motors will be heard when applying or releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the motor sounds are heard when applying or releasing the parking brake. . When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction or the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily, if the parking brake switch is operated, a chirp sound is heard and the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes. . When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the parking brake. . If the operation of the electronic parking brake switch is stopped midway or performed extremely slowly, the system may detect an error and turn on the brake system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the warning light turns off after operating the switch. . When the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period of time, the electronic parking brake may operate automatically after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF"

position. This occurs due to checking

the proper operation of the electronic

parking brake and does not indicate a

malfunction.

. If the electronic parking brake

switch is malfunctioning and the elec-

tronic parking brake cannot be re-

leased, refer to the instructions de-

scribed in "Automatic release function

by accelerator pedal" FP368.

. After activating the electronic park-

ing brake, you may hear a short sound

several minutes after the electronic

parking brake indicator light and the

indicator light on the electronic parking

brake switch illuminate as the system

confirms proper engagement. This sound is different from the apply and

release sound.

This can occur:

If the brakes are extremely hot.

If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned OFF.

Starting and Operating

This is a normal operating sound under any of these conditions. . The Auto Start Stop system is deactivated while the electronic parking brake is applied.

CONTINUED

368 Parking Your Vehicle

. If you operate the electronic parking brake switch while the Auto Start Stop system is activated, the Auto Start Stop system will be deactivated. The electronic parking brake will activate after the engine is restarted. After the electronic parking brake indicator light is illuminated, release your foot from the brake pedal. . When starting the engine or restarting the engine using the Auto Start Stop system, if you operate the electronic parking brake switch, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash temporarily. However, this is not a malfunction if the light turns off after the electronic parking brake is deactivated.
! Automatic release function by accelerator pedal
The electronic parking brake systems07ahp0a30s1 an automatic release function. The parking brake will be automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does not operate under the following conditions. . Any door (other than the trunk lid or rear gate) is open. . The driver's seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking brake, the parking brake will be automatically released when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
! Auto Vehicle Hold function The Auto Vehicle Hold function wills0a7aup0t3o0-5 matically keep the vehicle stopped even after releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle is at a complete stop, such as at traffic signals.
WARNING
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function on a steep hill or slippery road. The vehicle may move even when using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, causing serious injury or accidents.
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function to park the vehicle. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. Make sure to shift the select lever to the "P" position and apply the electronic parking brake in the following cases.

When you are going to park your vehicle.
When passengers are getting in or out of the vehicle.
When you are loading or unloading.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, do not release the brake pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator illuminates. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function in the following cases. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. When washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash When being towed
CAUTION
. When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function turned on, the electronic parking brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking brake indicator light will

Parking Your Vehicle 369

flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. . When being towed, turn off the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto Vehicle Hold function when stopping on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned off, the vehicle may roll backward when driving off.
! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function
s07ap030501
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned OFF, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off.
NOTE
. When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light will turn off and the brake system warning light will turn on. . Every time when starting the engine, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be set to "OFF".
! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold function
s07ap030503
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal when all of the following conditions are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold function will operate. . Driver's door is closed. . The driver's seatbelt is fastened. . The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light
While the vehicle is kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto
Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will 7
illuminate.
! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold function
s07ap030504
Perform any of the following operations to release the Auto Vehicle Hold function. . Depress the accelerator pedal. . Depress the brake pedal again. . Apply the electronic parking brake. . Shift the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal pressed. . Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function operating with the center information display while depressing the brake pedal.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

370 Parking Your Vehicle

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will turn off.
Under any of the following conditions, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be automatically released and the electronic parking brake will be automatically applied.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has been in operation for 10 minutes.
. The driver's seatbelt is unfastened.
. The ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep slope.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is malfunctioning.
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light will turn off and the electronic parking brake indicator light will illuminate.
! Tips s07ap030505
. When the electronic parking brake is automatically applied with the vehicle kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, release the electronic parking brake by either of the following operations before starting off. Then make sure that the electronic parking brake indicator light is off.

Depress the accelerator pedal with the driver's seatbelt fastened and with the doors closed.
Press the electronic parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
. Under certain conditions, including a malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning message will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD). All warning messages should be strictly observed.
. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal.
. When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake may automatically applied after stopping, then the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then apply the electronic parking brake.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light does not illuminates even after touching "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" with the operating conditions met, the function may have a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is keeping your vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does not represent a malfunction.
. While the vehicle is kept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, depress the brake pedal firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not operate.

! Emergency brake

s07ap0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used, the brake parts will wear down faster or the brake may not work sufficiently due to brake overheating.

NOTE
. While using the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds. . While using the emergency brake, a sound may be heard from the engine

Parking Your Vehicle 371

compartment. This is the operating sound of the brake that is activated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, and does not indicate a malfunction.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can stop the vehicle by pulling the parking brake switch continuously. While applying the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system warning
s07ap0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in the nearest safe location and contact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system, the brake system warning light turns on. Refer to "Electronic parking brake system warning" FP187.

& Parking Tips
When parking your vehicle, always s0p7aepr0-2 form the following items. . Apply the parking brake. . Place the select lever in the "P" (Park) position. Never rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel as described here. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.
7

Starting and Operating

372 Auto Start Stop System

7-17. Auto Start Stop System
s07bh
The Auto Start Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine when the vehicle is stationary for a short period of time (while waiting for a traffic light or in a traffic jam) after the engine has warmed up. The system operates in order to reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and undesired idling noise.

& System Operation CAUTION

s07bh01

The Auto Start Stop system is designed to automatically stop and restart the engine for a short period of time during idling. Do not use the system when parking the vehicle normally.

So that it can be used safely and comfortably, in addition to driver operations, the Auto Start Stop system is designed to constantly monitor the vehicle conditions as well as the environment inside and outside the vehicle, in order to control stopping and restarting of the engine.
After the vehicle has been completely stopped by depressing the brake pedal with the select lever in the "D" position, the

engine will be automatically stopped. If you release the brake pedal with the select lever kept in the "D" position, the engine will be automatically restarted. However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light illuminates, the engine will not restart.
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) If the engine is temporarily stopped by the system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate in green. This indicator light will turn off when the system restarts the engine.
NOTE
. After starting the engine, if the vehicle is left idling without being driven, the Auto Start Stop system will not operate.

. Your vehicle is equipped with a special high-performance battery. When replacing the vehicle battery, be sure to replace it with a genuine SUBARU battery (or equivalent) designed specifically for use in a vehicle equipped with the Auto Start Stop system. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.
! Operational conditions The engine can be automatically stos0p7bph0e10d5 by the Auto Start Stop system when all of the following conditions are met. . The engine is sufficiently warmed up. . The engine hood is closed. . The driver's door is closed. . The driver's seatbelt is fastened. . The malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light) is off. . The airflow mode selection is set to a mode other than " " mode. . The rear window defogger is not in use. . The X-MODE has been turned off (if equipped). . The power rear gate has been turned off (if equipped).
After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will be automatically stopped when the following conditions are met.

Auto Start Stop System 373

. The steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
. The steering wheel is not being operated.
NOTE
. After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop under the following conditions.
The vehicle is stopped on a road with a steep slope. The vehicle is stopped by hard braking. Negative pressure in the brake booster is not sufficient. . After the vehicle is stopped, the engine may not automatically stop if the brake pedal is not fully depressed. Make sure to depress the brake pedal firmly when stopping the vehicle. . In the following cases, it may take some time for the Auto Start Stop system to operate. When the battery is discharged because the vehicle has not been used for a long period of time, etc. The coolant temperature is low. When the battery terminals have been reconnected after replacing the battery, etc.

! Non-operational conditions In any of the following cases, thes07Abhu01t0o6 Start Stop system will not operate.
. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/ Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light is illuminating.
. When the malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light) is illuminating.
. The electronic parking brake is applied.
. When the engine hood is opened.
. When the vehicle is at an altitude of more than approximately 10,000 ft (3,000 m).
. When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently warmed up.
. When the temperature of the CVT fluid is abnormally high.
. When the vehicle battery is not in good condition.
. When using the climate control system, the temperature difference between the setting temperature and the temperature inside the vehicle is significant.
. When using the climate control system, the amount of air flow is significant.
NOTE
The Auto Start Stop system may not operate if the malfunction indicator light (Check Engine light) or other warning lights on the combination

meter are illuminating.

! Engine restart operational conditions
In any one of the following casess0,7bht0h10e7

engine will be automatically restarted even

if the brake pedal is kept depressed.

. When slightly releasing the brake pedal

on road with a steep slope and the vehicle

begins rolling.

. When further depressing the brake

pedal.

. When depressing the accelerator ped-

al.

. When you move the select lever to the

"R" position. . When turning the steering wheel.

Starting and Operating

. When operating the electronic parking

brake switch.

. When activating the X-MODE (if

equipped).

. When the air flow mode selection set to

" " mode.

. When the climate control system can

no longer maintain the set temperature.

. When unbuckling the driver's seatbelt.

. When opening the driver's door.

. When activating the rear window de-

fogger.

. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold

CONTINUED

374 Auto Start Stop System

function" FP368.
! Engine restart non-operational conditions
To ensure safety, the engine will ns0o7bth0b10e8 automatically restarted if the engine hood is opened when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation, even if the brake pedal is released. In this case, check the surrounding area and restart the engine by normal operation.
Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light is illuminated, the engine will not restart.
To ensure safety, the engine will not be automatically restarted if you open the engine hood when the Auto Start Stop system is in operation, even if you release the brake pedal. In this case, check the surrounding area and restart the engine by normal operation.
NOTE
. When the Auto Start Stop system is in operation, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction. . In the following conditions, the engine will be automatically restarted even if you keep the brake pedal depressed.
When the battery is discharged. When the negative pressure in the brake booster has lowered

. In the following cases, the length of time that the engine is temporarily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system may be shorter.
When the climate control system is in operation. When the outside temperature is high, or when it is low (because the climate control system can no longer maintain the set temperature). When consumption of electricity by electrical components is high. . When the engine is automatically restarted by the Auto Start Stop system, the power provided via the accessory power outlet will be reduced. Depending on the connected appliance, the power of the appliance may temporarily turn off.

! Auto Start Stop warning light s07bh0109
Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow) The Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate in yellow when initially turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position. The light will turn off after the engine has started.
CAUTION If the Auto Start Stop warning light does not turn off after the engine has started, the Auto Start Stop system may be malfunctioning. We recommend that you contact your authorized SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

Auto Start Stop System 375

! To turn on/off the Auto Start Stop system
s07bh0111
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light To turn the Auto Start Stop system on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models). When the Auto Start Stop system is turned OFF, the Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate. While the engine is temporarily stopped by the system, if the Auto Start Stop system turns off, the engine will be restarted even if you do not release the brake pedal.

NOTE
. If the engine is restarted when the Auto Start Stop system is not operational and the ignition switch has been turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the Auto Start Stop system will turn on again. . Be sure to turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position when leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in the battery discharging. ! Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
indicator light s07bh0110
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator light If the operational conditions are not met when the vehicle is stopped, the engine will not stop and the Auto Start Stop No

Activity Detected indicator light will illuminate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins to drive.

& Displaying the Auto Start Stop System Status
Approximate indications of the times0t7hbha02t the engine has been stopped by the Auto Start Stop system and/or the amount of fuel saved can be displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to "Basic Screens" FP205.

& System Warning

So that it can be used safely and coms07fbohr0-3 tably, the Auto Start Stop system is

Starting and Operating

designed to constantly monitor the vehicle

conditions as well as the environment

inside and outside the vehicle in addition

to driver operations, and to provide various

warnings to the driver via the warning light

and/or indicator light illuminating and a

buzzer sounding. For details about the

warning light and indicator light, refer to

"Auto Start Stop Warning Light (Yellow)"

FP198.

CONTINUED

376 Front View Monitor

! Warning buzzer The buzzer will sound when the es0n7gbhi0n30e1 hood is opened while the engine is stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
When this occurs, the buzzer will stop sounding when the following operations are performed.
. The engine is restarted by normal operation. (Refer to "Preparing to Drive" FP333.)
. The ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
! Display of warning messages If a warning message is displayed os0n7bht0h30e2 combination meter display (color LCD) while driving, a malfunction may have occurred in the Auto Start Stop system. In this case, the Auto Start Stop warning light will illuminate. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

7-18. Front View Monitor (If Equipped)
s07bq
The image from the camera mounted inside the front grille is displayed in the center information display.
WARNING . Never rely on only the Front View
Monitor when driving the vehicle. The image on the monitor screen may be different from the actual situation. If you drive the vehicle by viewing only the monitor image, a collision or an unexpected accident may occur. When driving the vehicle, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly

with your eyes and the mirrors. . Always operate the vehicle as
you would without the Front View Monitor. . Do not use the Front View Monitor in the following situations. You are driving on a dirt road
or a road covered in snow. The camera malfunctions (e.g.
the lens or bracket is broken). . If the outside temperature is low,
the monitor screen may become dark or the image may become dim. In particular, the image of a moving object may be distorted or disappear from the screen. You must always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving it.
NOTE
If there is a malfunction on the center information display, refer to "Malfunctions of the Center Information Display" FP468.

Front View Monitor 377

& How to Access the Front View Monitor
s07bq01
1) Front view monitor switch To change over to the camera screen, make sure the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, then press the front view monitor switch under the following conditions. . The vehicle speed is below 12 mph (20 km/h). . The select lever is in except "R".
NOTE
The screen will change over to the rear view image when the select lever is moved to "R". Refer to "Rear View Camera" FP379.

& How to Cancel the Front View Monitor
s07bq02
! Manual cancellation The Front View Monitor will be cancesl0e7bdq0b20y1 either of the following operations.
. Press the front view monitor switch again.
. Touch (car settings icon).
. Touch (HOME).
. Touch (driver profiles icon).
! Automatic cancellation If any of the following conditions ares07mbq0e20t2, the Front View Monitor is canceled automatically.
After accessing the Front View Monitor by pressing the front view monitor switch: . Approximately 3 minutes have passed since the last operation.
. The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
. The select lever is shifted to the "P" position.
. Pulling up the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed to apply the parking brake.

& Range of Image on Screen s07bq03
7
A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibility view
B) Parking facing a wall 1) Range of displayed image 2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or
other vehicles) CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

378 Front View Monitor

WARNING
Because the range of the image captured by the camera is limited, always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes when driving the vehicle.
NOTE
. The range of the displayed image may differ depending on the vehicle status or the road surface status. . Because the Front View Monitor system uses a specially designed lens, the sense of distance in the displayed image is different from the actual distance. . The camera image may be difficult to view in the following situations. This is not a malfunction.
Dark place (at night) High or low temperature around the lens Water contacts lens or in high humidity (rainy weather) There is foreign materials (such as mud) around the camera Sunlight or headlight beam directly shines towards the camera lens

. Under an artificial light such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted portion may look like it is flickering (flicker phenomenon). . While the display has cooled down, the image may leave traces or become darker than usual, causing a difficulty in viewing the screen. Always check the traffic around the vehicle directly with your eyes while driving the vehicle. . The following incidents should not be deemed a malfunction.
The camera lens may become foggy when the humidity is high on a rainy day. The light from a vehicle or building located ahead may be reflected towards the camera image while driving at night. In a dark place or while driving at night, the camera image may be adjusted to make noises less visible. Therefore, the image may look like a monochromatic image or the image colors may differ from the actual colors. The camera image may be deteriorated in regard to sharpness at the center and four corners of the screen. This is not a malfunction.

& Guiding Line

s07bq04

1) Guiding line 2) Warning message
The guiding line that indicates the width and the front end of your vehicle is displayed on the display.

& Handling of Camera CAUTION

s07bq05

Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, the system may malfunction. . Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera such as banging it or hitting it with an object. The mounting angle may change.

. The camera unit is a waterproof structure. Do not attempt to remove, disassemble or modify the unit.
. Do not rub strongly or polish the camera lens with a hard brush or abrasive compounds. The lens may be scratched resulting in an adverse effect to the camera image.
. The camera lens is made of glass or plastic. Do not allow any organic solvent, body wax, oil film remover or glass coating agent to become attached on the lens surface. If any becomes attached, remove it immediately.
. Do not expose the camera lens to any sudden temperature change, for example, spraying hot water on it in cold weather.
. Do not apply the water jet of a high pressure washer to the camera or the surrounding area when cleaning the vehicle. The impact by the strong water pressure may cause the camera to come off. Also, water may enter inside the camera and cause a malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any impact, it may lead to malfunction

Rear View Camera 379

of the camera. Have the camera inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. . Do not use a steam cleaner under any circumstances. Some types of steam cleaners inject hot steam. . The camera surface may be damaged by a flying stone.

7-19. Rear View Camera
s07br

NOTE
If the camera lens is contaminated, no sharp image is available. When the camera is contaminated with water drops, snow or mud, wash it with water and wipe away any moisture with a soft cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with a neutral detergent.

A rear view camera is attached to the trunk
lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback). When 7
the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is set to "R", the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the center information display.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses a wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on the monitor is limited, always check the rear view and the
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

380 Rear View Camera
surrounding area with your eyes and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the camera could cause an accident. . Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
CAUTION . When washing your vehicle with
a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to touch the camera directly. Entry of water in the camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or electric shock. . Since the camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, fire or electric shock may occur. . If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it. Otherwise, damage to the camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. . Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur. . When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction. . If you use the rear view camera for a long time while the engine is not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. . When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the camera. If it comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax. . The camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate. . Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is not a malfunction. . Under the fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction. . The image of the rear view camera may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects. . If there is a malfunction on the center information display, refer to "Malfunctions of the Center Information Display" FP468.
& How to Use the Rear View Camera
When the select lever is set to "R", thesr0e7bar0r1 view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other positions, the image before setting to "R" is displayed.

Rear View Camera 381

1. Set the ignition switch to "ON". 2. Set the select lever to "R".
NOTE
. The image of the rear view camera is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle inside mirror or the outside mirror. . When "Rear Camera Delay Control" is on, the rear view image will be displayed on the center information display for a certain period of time after the select lever is shifted to a position other than the "P" position from "R". To turn the function on and off, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models). . It may be difficult to see the image of the rear view camera in the following cases. This is not a malfunction of the camera.
The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.). The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place. An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rear view camera sticks to the lens of the camera.

Strong light is shining directly on the camera lens (occasionally, there are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing Range on the Screen s07br02 CAUTION The range that can be viewed with the rear view camera is limited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.
Range of view

Range of view
7
Image from camera The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

382 Rear View Camera

Also, the image from the rear view camera looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

projection on its upper part such as a sign pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help Lines
The help lines are a guide to help s0y7obr0u3 realize the actual distance from the screen image.
NOTE
If you shift to the "R" range within several seconds after turning on the ignition switch, the warning message may not be displayed. Wait for several seconds after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the "R" range. Then, the warning message will be displayed.

Help lines 1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) 2) Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) 3) Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) 4) Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line) 5) Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line) 6) Vehicle centerline 7) Dynamic guidelines
When the select lever is set to "R", the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always check the back with your eyes without relying on the help lines.

Rear View Camera 383

Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury. . The actual position may be different from the indication of the help lines. . Differences may occur due to the number of passengers or the loaded cargo. . When the vehicle is on a slope or inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual position.

! When there is an upward slope at the back
s07br030101

! When there is a downward slope at the back
s07br030102

NOTE
When "Steering Angle Lines" is off, the dynamic guidelines will be disappear on the center information display. To turn the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer to "General settings" FP216 (11.6-inch display models) or "General settings" FP234 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
! Difference between screen image and actual road
The distance markers show the disst0a7bnr0c30e1 for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.

1) 3 ft (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance.

1) 3 ft (1 m) The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

384 BSD/RCTA

! Feature of distance marker s07br0302
1) 3 ft (1 m) line 2) 10 ft (3 m) line The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or another object close behind, distance cannot be correctly displayed.

7-20. BSD/RCTA (If Equipped)
s07bm
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner radar with Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross Traffic Alert. These functions of BSD/RCTA are the systems that detect objects and vehicles to the rear and draw attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle. The system is designed to assist the driver in changing lanes or reversing safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this system alone in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is present in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side. The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.
& System Features
BSD/RCTA consists of the following sf0u7nbmc0-1 tions. . To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind Spot Detection) . To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries, Canada and Mexico. When driving in other countries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S. and other FCC compli-

ant countries, Canada and Mexico, refer to "Certification for the BSD/ RCTA" FP391. ! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
s07bm0101

BSD/RCTA 385

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

s07bm010101

s07bm0103

1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light (s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the system warns the driver of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.

1) Operating range

Starting and Operating

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the center information display.

CONTINUED

386 BSD/RCTA

! Limitations of the detectability of RCTA
s07bm010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.
Example 1 1) The detection range of the radar sensors 2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors A) Vehicle that may not be detected B) Parked vehicle
WARNING An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehicle (B). Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle.
Example 2 1) The detection range of the radar sensors C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings with your eyes when reversing the vehicle.

& System Operation

s07bm02

! Operating conditions The BSD/RCTA will operate when alsl0o7bfmt0h20e1

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the "ON"

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7

mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The select lever is in the "R" position

(RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator does not appear (except when reversing).

NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/ RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/ RCTA warning indicator will appear.
When a malfunction occurs in the system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light . If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, exercise proper caution. For details, refer to "BSD/RCTA Warning

BSD/RCTA 387

Indicator" FP390. . In the following cases, the BSD/ RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
When the radar sensor becomes significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the radar sensor is shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sensor adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) When a large amount of snow or ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a prolonged period of time When the temperature around the radar sensors increases excessively due to long driving on uphill grades in the summer, etc. When the temperature around the radar sensors becomes extremely low When the vehicle battery voltage lowers When the vehicle voltage exceeds the battery voltage rating

The BSD/RCTA will resume operation once these conditions are corrected, and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears for a prolonged period of time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The detectability of the radar sensors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly under the following conditions.
When the rear bumper around the radar sensors is distorted When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow or fog When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads and through puddles . The radar sensors may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the following vehicles and objects. Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc.

Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles with lower body height such as a trailer with no cargo and sports cars) Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the rear or beside your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the radar sensors.) Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds
Vehicles driving in parallel at al- 7
most the same speed as your vehicle for a prolonged time Oncoming vehicles Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane Vehicles travelling at a significantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake . On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

388 BSD/RCTA

& BSD/RCTA Approach Indicator Light/Warning Buzzer
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the fosl0l7obmw0-3 ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver: . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light (when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes). . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side while your vehicle is reversing) ! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
s07bm0301
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light It is mounted on each side of the outside mirrors. The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected. The indicator light will flash to warn the driver of dangers under the following conditions. . While the indicator light is illuminating, if the turn signal lever is operated toward the side in which this light turned on . When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function
s07bm030101
When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.
When sunlight shines directly on it When the headlight beams from a vehicle traveling behind shines directly on it . While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial, refer to "Illumination Brightness Control" FP175.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)
A warning buzzer sounds alongs07bwm0i3t0h2 flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer
. In the following cases, operations0o7bfmt0h30e3 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.
When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades When going beyond a pass When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

BSD/RCTA 389

are driving on the far side of each lane.
When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row
In low radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an intersection)
When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane
Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by touching "BSD/RCTA"
Immediately after the select lever is shifted to the "R" position
When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the trunk or cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/ RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.
When backing out of an angled parking space
When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)
When reversing on sloped roads
When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or road side (such as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
. When turning at an intersection in urban areas, or a multilane intersection, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.
When your vehicle drives on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle
When the vehicle driving two lanes

away drives on the near side of its lane from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA OFF Indicator s07bm08
! System temporary stops s07bm0801
7
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message 2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator This display appears when the system is used at extremely high or low temperatures or when abnormal voltage exists. Once these conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

390 BSD/RCTA

! System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensitivity
s07bm0802

& BSD/RCTA Warning Indicator s07bm04
! System malfunction s07bm0403

& To Turn On/Off the BSD/RCTA s07bm09

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectability of the radar sensors is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message 2) At first, this message will appear 3) Then this message will appear 4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220 (11.6-inch display models) or "Vehicle setting icons" FP239 (dual 7.0-inch display models).
When the BSD/RCTA system is turned OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.
NOTE
. In the following cases, turn off the BSD/RCTA system. The system may not operate properly due to blocked radar waves.
When towing a trailer (Outback) When a bicycle carrier or other

BSD/RCTA 391

item is fitted to the rear of the & Certification for the BSD/

. Canada-spec. models

vehicle

RCTA

When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, etc. When running the engine and

. The U.S. and other FCC compsl0i7abmn0t6 countries

making the wheels rotate while FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

CAUTION

"LOCK"/"OFF" position, the last known status of the system is maintained. For

FCC WARNING

example, if the ignition switch is turned Changes or modifications not ex-

to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the pressly approved by the party re-

BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA sponsible for compliance could void

remains deactivated the next time the the user's authority to operate the

ignition switch is turned to the "ON" equipment.

position.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

392 BSD/RCTA

. Mexico-spec. models

& Handling of Radar Sensors s07bm07

Radar sensors (Outback)
The radar sensors, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

Radar sensors (Legacy)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 393

CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following precautions. . Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean. . Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near the radar sensors. For details, consult your SUBARU dealer. . Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors. . Do not paint the bumper near the radar sensors. . Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong im-

pacts. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock is applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection. . Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System (If Equipped)
s07bn
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a system designed to help avoid collisions or reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warning sound and may activate the vehicle's brakes automatically.

WARNING

Starting and Operating

. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is not a system intended

to replace the driver's responsi-

bility to check their surroundings

for vehicles or obstacles to avoid

a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.

. There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may

CONTINUED

394 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present. . Make sure to set the Automatic Braking System to OFF when the vehicle is on the free roller or on the chassis dynamometer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident. . Make sure to set the Automatic Braking System to OFF when towing a trailer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident. . The system is not designed to detect people (including children), animals or other moving objects. . Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensor's ability to detect objects may become unstable.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio

data. . Distance from the object . Vehicle speed . Accelerator pedal operation status . Brake pedal operation status . Select lever position . Outside temperature . The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development. SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or provide the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions. . The vehicle owner has given his/her consent. . The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request. . Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Overview
The Reverse Automatic Braking (Rs0A7bBn0)1 system will operate the following 2 functions using 4 sonar sensors.
. Object detection warning function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce damage.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 395
WARNING If your vehicle is trapped on a railroad crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. To cancel the system, refer to "Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation" FP402.
7

Starting and Operating

1) When reversing 2) When either strong automatic braking or
torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)

3) When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)
4) Object (e.g., a wall)

CONTINUED

396 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

& Operating Conditions
The Reverse Automatic Braking (Rs0A7bBn0)2 system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.
1) EyeSight warning indicator 2) RAB warning indicator 3) RAB OFF indicator . The ignition switch is in the "ON" position. . The EyeSight warning indicator is off. . The RAB warning indicator is off. . The RAB OFF indicator is off. . The select lever is in the "R" position. Object detection warning function . The object detection warning function is set to "ON". . The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0

to 15 km/h).
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function . The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function is set to "ON". . The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated. The RAB warning indicator is illuminated. . In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system cannot be operated. The (EyeSight Temporary Stop indicator: White) is illuminated, and the messages corresponding to the EyeSight temporary stop are displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system. The RAB OFF indicator is illuminated.

. In the following cases, the functions may not be able to properly work. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor. The rear bumper is modified. The rear bumper has been removed and attached. The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicle's loading condition or modification. There is damage to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor. The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed. . On a steep hill, the system's automatic braking ability will be reduced. . The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicle's reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation. . If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver's operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not oper-

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 397

ate. . The system may not be able to detect and apply the brake with the following objects.
Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor. Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the "R" position. Objects with a surface which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence. . Objects the system is not designed to detect and apply brake. Pedestrians. Moving objects including moving vehicles. Objects which absorbs sound waves such as cloth or snow. Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle. Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks. Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging from above. Objects that are out of range of the center of the vehicle in the horizontal direction.

Objects that are not in a vertical direction. . When reversing the vehicle, the functions may not be able to work properly or may cause a system malfunction if the following conditions exist.
High frequency sound from other sources are nearby: Horn sound from another vehicle. Engine sound from other vehicles. Sound of an air brake. Vehicle detection equipment or a sonar from another vehicle. A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicle's system is transmitted near by. A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction.
Weather conditions: Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate. The sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensors are exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water.

Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc. Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor: Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached. Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker, are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bum-

Starting and Operating

per near the sonar sensor.

The vehicle is significantly in-

clined.

The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle's

loading condition, etc.

When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident.

Surrounding environment: A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direction.
CONTINUED

398 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

When reversing on a gravel or grassy area. When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages. Wheel track or hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction. When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover).

The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a steep uphill. When reversing downhill.

A curb or step is present in the reversing direction. Reversing in a garage with a low ceiling or a tunnel. There is a patch of snow rearward. There is a puddle of water. There is an obstacle that is next to an object. Going back along a wall. The area where the road starts touching dirt and snow When reversing on an uneven road.
. In circumstances such as the following, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system operates normally.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 399

Roads are slippery. The tire air pressure is not correct. The tires have become worn. Tire chains are installed. Tires which are not the designated size are installed. Emergency repairs were performed using a puncture repair kit. The suspension was modified. Vehicle driving is unstable due to accident or malfunction. The brake warning light is illuminated.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level

Range of detected object* Distance indicator

Long proximity (object detected)

28 in (70 cm) or more

Green

Medium proximity alert (approaching the 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Yellow object)

Short proximity alert (approaching closer 12 to 20 in (30 to 50 cm) Orange to the object)

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the 12 in (30 cm) or less

Red

object)

Alarm pattern No warning sound Short beeps Rapid short beeps Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

Starting and Operating

& Object Detection Warning

Function

When Reverse Automatic Braking (Rs0A7bBn0)3

system is in operation, an audible warning

beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the

driver of a potential collision.

NOTE
It may take time to display the wall and sound warning beeps after the object was recognized by the object detection warning function.

CONTINUED

400 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

! Obstacle detected and alert level s07bn0301
Long proximity alert (object detected) 1) Green: 28 in (70 cm) or more

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer) 1) Orange: 12 to 20 in (30 to 50 cm)

When an object is detected in the reversing direction, the range of detected object will be shown on the center information display. A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.
& Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Function Operation
s07bn08
! Object close behind warning s07bn0801

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object) 1) Yellow: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the object) 1) Red: 12 in (30 cm) or less

Automatic braking warning 1) Warning message
If the system determine the risk of collision with the object. Short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 401

either strong automatic braking or torque control will be applied to prevent collision.
At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE
The object detection warning function and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function are different in operation conditions. Therefore there are cases in which only one of these functions will activate.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the system
s07bn0802

Depress brake pedal warning 1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the center information display and the continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

WARNING Depress the brake pedal immediately after the system stops the vehicle by automatic braking. Depending on the conditions of the road surface and tires, the vehicle may not remain stopped, possibly leading to an accident.

After the brake pedal is depressed, the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the

system will temporarily stop operating.

Starting and Operating

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the select lever is shifted to a position other

than the "R" position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to the "R"

position.

In circumstances such as the following, the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

automatically stops operating and the RAB

OFF indicator illuminates.

There is ice, snow, mud, or other

substance on the sonar sensors.

The select lever was shifted to "R"

CONTINUED

402 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System

when there was an obstacle located close to the rear bumper.
A sound with a frequency close to that of the sonar used by the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system was detected.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the vehicle has been stopped by the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, brake control is released and the electronic parking brake operates. For details about releasing the parking brake, refer to "Electronic Parking Brake" FP366.
When 2 minutes pass after the vehicle is stopped When any door is opened . The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system may stop operating temporarily in the following cases and the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate. Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor Objects are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the "R" position The system detects sounds of a similar frequency to the RAB sonar

& Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System Operation
The Reverse Automatic Braking (Rs0A7bBn0)4 system can be temporarily canceled by any of the following operation. . While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the brake pedal is depressed. . While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the accelerator pedal is depressed. . The accelerator pedal is depressed continuously (In this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehicle will continue reversing.) . The select lever is shifted to a position other than the "R" position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.
& Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System ON/OFF Setting
While the select lever is shifted to thes07"bRn0"5 position, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be set by operating the center in-

formation display.
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function
3) ON setting key of the object detection warning function
4) OFF setting key of the object detection warning function
When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON. Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn the setting OFF. When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF. Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn the setting ON. When the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system function are turned OFF,

the following indicator(s) will illuminate.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System 403
& RAB Warning Indicator s07bn07

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the corresponding function is turned ON.
NOTE
When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out.
Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the center information display. . Warning volume . Sonar audible alarm
For details, refer to "Car settings" FP220.

1) RAB malfunction message 2) RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
& Handling of the Sonar Sensors
The 4 sonar sensors are located in thes0r7ebna0r6 bumper. To ensure the proper operation of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, observe the following precautions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the 7
rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.
. Do not modify rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors.
. Do not apply high pressure water to the sonar sensors with a high pressure carwashing machine.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversing direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

404 Driver Monitoring System

have the system inspected. . Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or replacement, or if the area of the rear bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-22. Driver Monitoring System (If Equipped)
s07bp
Driver Monitoring System is introduced as DriverFocus in some countries. The Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases when the driver is not paying attention to the forward direction, and also recognizes individual users. This system warns the driver of inattentive/ drowsy driving, and can support safe and comfortable driving by automatically retrieving the following settings. Driver's position Climate control setting Meter setting Center information display setting
When a user is registered, various settings are automatically retrieved when the user enters the vehicle.

1) Camera
CAUTION . Always use the utmost care in
driving Overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the Driver Monitoring System could easily lead to a serious accident. . This system cannot detect if the driver is feeling drowsy or is concentrating on safe driving. . It cannot judge if the driver is awake or asleep, if their driving abilities have diminished, or if they are concentrating on safe

Driver Monitoring System 405

driving. . In some circumstances, the sys-
tem may not be able to correctly detect the driver state.
NOTE
. The user recognition camera does not save images, audio, or video. . The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when sunlight is shining into the vehicle in the following ways.
Sunlight is shining directly (or through glass) onto the user recognition camera. There are shadows on the driver's face caused by sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component). There are large momentary fluctuations in the strength of the sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component) shining on the face. . Correct detection may not be possible when a device that includes an infrared light source (such as a commercially available Driver Monitoring System) is installed in the vehicle interior.

. The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly at the following times when the driver is wearing glasses or sunglasses.
The sunglasses do not allow the easy passage of infrared light. The surrounding scenery is reflected strongly in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses. The eyes are hidden by the frame of the glasses and the user recognition camera cannot detect the eyes. The light from an infrared light source (LED) is reflected in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses. The driver is wearing an eyepatch. The driver is wearing a hat set deeply over the eyes. . Depending on the type of mask, correct detection of inattentive/drowsy driving may not be possible. . Correct user recognition is not possible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is covered with a mask, muffler, sunglasses, or other item. . The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when the eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden due to item that is between the face and the system.

. If a thick cover is attached to the

steering wheel, then depending on the

position set for the tilt/telescopic steer-

ing wheel, the cover may block the

system's view of the face, and the

system and the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem may not operate correctly.

. Do not attach any stickers to the

user recognition camera or the infrared

light source (LED). If the user recogni-

tion camera or infrared light source

(LED) is covered by an obstruction, it

will not be possible to correctly monitor

the driver.

. If an accessory is hung from the

inside mirror, correct detection may not

be possible. . Do not touch the user recognition

Starting and Operating

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) directly with your fingers. If there

is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, it

will not be possible to correctly monitor

the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint

on these parts, either wipe them with a

soft dry cloth, or wipe gently with a

damp cloth after first firmly wringing

the water out.

. If the surface of the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) becomes scratched, correct de-

tection may not be possible. Be careful

that hard objects do not contact these

parts.

CONTINUED

406 Driver Monitoring System

. If there is condensation on the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED), correct detection may not be possible. If there is condensation on these parts, wipe it away with a soft dry cloth. . When registering a user for user recognition, avoid closing your eyes as much as possible. . If the user recognition success rate is low, it is possible that the user is not correctly registered. Delete the registered data and perform registration again. . If a user frequently drives both with glasses and contact lenses, it is recommended that registration be performed both when wearing glasses and when wearing contact lenses. . User recognition starts immediately after entering the vehicle, however if the user looks downward or at the driver side mirror for a long time, the user may not be recognized. . When one person among twins or another pair of persons with similar facial features is registered, the other person may be incorrectly recognized as the registered user when entering the vehicle. . If the person in the passenger's seat leans into the driver's seat, or in other cases when there are two or more faces

near the driver's seat, the system may not operate correctly. . There are cases when the system concludes that the user's eyes are closed when the user is looking downward during driving, such as when checking instruments or the navigation screen. In such cases, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly. . If the eyes are narrowed when laughing or when there is a dazzling outside light, the system may judge that the eyes are closed and the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly. . The drowsy driving or asleep warning states are recognized from the length of time and percentage of time that the eyes are closed. The drowsy driving warning buzzer will not sound simply when the driver feels sleepy or yawns. . Even when the driver does not feel sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound. . The inattentive driving warning buzzer may sound if the driver leans forward or puts his or her head out of the window while driving.

. The inattentive driving warning buzzer will not sound when the vehicle is stopped or travelling at slow speed even if the driver is not looking ahead. . The Driver Monitoring System collects and stores data regarding drivers' facial features. Facial recognition data is stored locally and does not leave the vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver Monitoring System may be disabled and any stored driver data may be deleted by following the instructions below. If the Driver Monitoring System is disabled, it will be unable to provide any of its safety or convenience functions.

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

User recognition function*2

Inattentive/drowsy driving warning ON User recognition function Inattentive/drowsy driving warning OFF User recognition function

Driver Monitoring System*1

OFF

Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Driver Monitoring System 407 7

Starting and Operating

CONTINUED

408 Driver Monitoring System

Available function items

User recognition function*2

ON OFF

Register User Delete User Delete All Users Update Seat and Mirror Position Delete Driver Position Register User Delete User Delete All Users Update Seat and Mirror Position Delete Driver Position

Driver Monitoring System*1

OFF

Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Available

Not available

Available
Not available Available Available
Not available

Not available
Not available Not available Not available
Not available

Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings. Refer to "Car settings" FP220.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is registered.

Available functions User recognition function

The user is registered. Available

The user is not registered. Not available

& User Recognition Function s07bp01
WARNING
Perform registration, retrieving, or delete of the seat position and outside mirror angle before beginning driving. There is the risk of an accident if registration, retrieving, or delete is performed while driving.
When a user is registered, it is possible to retrieve the following settings.
! Driver position personalization . Seat position and outside mirror sa07nbgp0l1e01 Retrieves the registered seat position and outside mirror angle. . Reverse tilt angle Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle.
! Meter personalization . Combination meter display (colors0L7bCp0D10)2 basic screen Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

Driver Monitoring System 409

! Center information display personalization
. Center information display sb07abps01i0c3 screen
Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

! Changing the personalization settings s07bp0106 Item

Driver's position personalization

Seat position/outside mirror angle Reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle

Change the setting by using the center information display customization function. Refer to "Car settings" FP220.

. Fuel consumption screen
Displays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user.

! Air conditioner personalization

. Air conditioner settings

s07bp0104

Meter personalization* Center information display personalization*

Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen Center information display basic screen Customization linked with synchronized user function

When the customization screen linked with the synchronized user function is selected and the setting is changed, it is automatically stored.

Retrieves the air conditioner temperature, outlet mode, and other settings which the

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the screen was selected and the setting was changed.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the vehicle with the air conditioner set to maximum cool or maximum heat, then the setting which preceded maximum cool or maximum heat is stored.

Starting and Operating

! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status
Retrieves the Driver Monitoring Ssy0s7btpe01m05 ON/OFF status which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

CONTINUED

410 Driver Monitoring System

& Inattentive/Drowsy Driving Warning
While driving, the Driver Monitoring sS07ybps0-2 tem monitors possible cases of driver inattention or drowsiness and warns the driver.
When the inattentive/drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.
NOTE
. The inattentive/drowsy driving warning operates regardless of the status of the user recognition function. . The inattentive driving warning does not activate when the turn signal is operating or when the select lever is in the "R" position. . When the pre-collision brake system OFF indicator is illuminated on the combination meter display (color LCD), the inattentive driving warning activates at the same timing as usual even when a vehicle ahead or obstacle is detected. For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

! Inattentive driving warning s07bp0201
When the system monitors that the driver may be inattentive, it warns the driver. When the inattentive driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears on the combination meter display (color LCD). When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward direction, the inattentive driving warning may activate at earlier timing than usual. Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Driver Monitoring System 411

! Drowsy driving warning Possible drowsiness is detected froms07tbhp0e202amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

Center information display

Warning chime

Drowsy driving

Beep, beep... (Continues until the driver's
eyes open.)

Very drowsy

Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)

& Driver Monitoring System Indicator/Warning
s07bp03

Slightly drowsy

Not drowsy

Beep

Starting and Operating

Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)

2) Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator

light

3) Driver Monitoring System temporary stop

indicator light

4) Driver Monitoring System warning light

(yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/ warning indicates the status of the Driver Monitoring System on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE
When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illumi-
CONTINUED

412 Driver Monitoring System

nated, the Driver Monitoring System function cannot be used. In addition, the following items cannot be selected. . Register User . Delete User . Delete All Users . Update Seat and Mirror Position . Delete Driver Position . Automatically retract seat on entry
! Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)
This indicator illuminates when the sD07rbipv03e0r1 Monitoring System is operating.
! Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light
This indicator illuminates when thes07ubps03e0r2 has turned off the Driver Monitoring System and the Driver Monitoring System is not operating.
! Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light
This indicator illuminates when the sD07rbipv03e0r3 Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.
NOTE
The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances. . When the temperature of the main unit of the Driver Monitoring System is

high or low. . When the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver's eye movement. . When the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver's eyebrows, eyes, nose or mouth. . When the camera and the infrared light source (LED) are covered and the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver correctly.
! Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)
This warning illuminates when therse07bips030a4 problem with the Driver Monitoring System. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
& Using the Driver Monitoring System
s07bp04
! User recognition When a user is registered with thes07ubps04e0r1 recognition function, the Driver Monitoring System performs the following.

1. When the door is opened and the push-button ignition switch is OFF, the user recognition screen appears and the Driver Monitoring system starts user recognition.
The user recognition screen may not appear when the door is opened in some cases, such as when only a short time has passed after the push-button ignition switch was turned OFF. In such cases, user recognition starts when the door is closed however the user recognition screen does not appear.

Driver Monitoring System 413

2. Sit in the driver's seat and face forward for a few moments. 3. When user recognition is completed, the Hello screen appears on the center information display.
At this time, the seat position, outside mirror angle, air conditioner settings, combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen, center information display basic screen, and customization settings all change based on the user information.
NOTE
. When a center information display operation switch is pressed, the user recognition screen is canceled, however user recognition continues.

. When the select lever is not in the "P" position, the seat position will not change even when user recognition is completed. . If user recognition fails, perform recognition again following the instructions, refer to "When a user is not recognized" FP413. . User recognition is not performed while driving. . If the seat position or outside mirror angle are in motion at the time when user recognition is completed, then it is not possible to retrieve the seat position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. . If any of the following operations is performed while retrieving of the seat position or outside mirror angle, retrieving of the seat position and outside mirror angle is canceled.
The power seat adjustment switch was operated. The outside mirror adjustment switch was operated. The "SET" button was pressed. The "1" or "2" button was pressed. The select lever was moved to a position other than "P" position.

! When a user is not recognized In the following case, user recognitiosn07mbp0a40y2 not be possible and "User recognition stopped" may be displayed. . There is an object blocking the camera. Remove the obstacle and follow the reference procedure to perform user recognition again. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227.
7
1) Camera
NOTE
. User recognition may not be possible when there is dirt or fingerprints on the user recognition camera. To clean, either wipe using a soft cloth or else wipe gently using a moistened cloth
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

414 Driver Monitoring System

that has been thoroughly wrung out. . When the synchronized user function is turned OFF, manual repeat facial scan is not possible.
& Registering and Deleting a User
Users can be registered in the Dsr0i7vbpe0r5 Monitoring System, and registered users can be deleted. For the user registration and delete procedures, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227.
NOTE
. When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.
Register User Delete User Delete All Users . User information can also be deleted by resetting the center information display to the factory default settings. When the settings are reset to the factory default settings, all user information is deleted. The settings cannot be reset to the factory default settings when the Driver Monitoring System is OFF.

& Registering and Deleting Driver Position Personalization
At the time when a user is registereds,07tbhp0e6 seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are registered at the same time. To change the setting for the seat position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" FP227.
NOTE
. Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power Seat" FP32 or "Outside Mirrors" FP271. . If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be saved. . When the user recognition setting is OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.

Update Seat and Mirror Position
Delete Driver Position . The driver position can be registered or deleted only when a registered user is sitting in the driver's seat and user recognition is completed.

& Driver Monitoring System

ON/OFF Settings

NOTE

s07bp07

. When the vehicle is stopped and the

driver's door is opened and closed, the Driver Monitoring System automatically turns ON regardless of the pushbutton ignition switch status. . After the Driver Monitoring System

was turned OFF, if the Driver Monitoring System is turned ON while the driver's door is open, user recognition may not occur correctly. . When the Driver Monitoring System

is turned OFF after user recognition was completed, the user recognition function stores the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF state.

! To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring System
To turn the Driver Monitoring Systes0m7bp0o70n1 and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" FP220.

Driver Monitoring System 415

When the Driver Monitoring System is turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.
! User recognition settings The Driver Monitoring System User rse07cbpo07g0-2 nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" FP220.
NOTE
. The user recognition function setting cannot be changed for each individual user. . The default setting for the user recognition function is ON. . When the user recognition function is turned OFF, the following items cannot be selected.
Repeat facial scan Register User Update Seat and Mirror Position Delete Driver Position
! Automatically retract seat on entry The automatically retract seat ons0e7bnp0t7r0y4 which automatically slides back the driver's seat when the driver's door is unlocked and opened.
This function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" FP220.

CAUTION Sit in the seat after the power seat movement backward has been completed. Not doing so could result in injury.
NOTE
. If the seat position is not registered in the access key fob memory, the automatically retract seat on entry function can be used. . Even when the automatically retract seat on entry setting is ON, the automatically retract seat on entry function automatically turns OFF when the user recognition function is OFF. . Automatically retract seat on entry cannot be selected when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated. . This function will operate if the seat is in front of the center of the seat sliding mechanism.

& Certification for Driver Monitoring System (U.S.-Spec. Models)
s07bp08
CAUTION FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the 7
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CONTINUED

Starting and Operating

416 Driver Monitoring System
Canada-spec. models

Mexico-spec. models

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km) .........s.0.8....................... 418
8-2. Fuel Economy Hints ....................................... 418 8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)...... 418 8-4. Catalytic Converter ......................................... 419 8-5. Periodic Inspections....................................... 420 8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries ......................... 420 8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles ...................... 421 8-8. Off Road Driving ............................................. 422
Legacy ............................................................... 422
Outback.............................................................. 423 8-9. Winter Driving ................................................. 424
Operation during Cold Weather........................... 424
Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads ........................ 426
Corrosion Protection .......................................... 427
Snow Tires ......................................................... 427
Tire Chains ......................................................... 428
Rocking the Vehicle ............................................ 428

Driving Tips
8-10. Loading Your Vehicle ....................................428 Vehicle Capacity Weight ..................................... 429 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 430 Roof Molding and Crossbar (Legacy).................. 430 Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars (Outback) ......................................................... 432
8-11. Trailer Hitch (Outback If Equipped) ..........436 Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 436 If Not Towing a Trailer ........................................ 438
8-12. Trailer Towing (Legacy).................................438 8-13. Trailer Towing (Outback)...............................438
Warranties and Maintenance............................... 439 Maximum Load Limits ........................................ 439 Trailer Hitches.................................................... 442 Connecting a Trailer ........................................... 442 Trailer Towing Tips............................................. 444
8

Driving Tips

418 New Vehicle Break-In Driving the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

8-1. New Vehicle Break-In Driving the First 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
s08aa
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly installed or overhauled engine or when brake pads are replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel Economy Hints
s08ab
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire placard, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge shows a reference for saving fuel. For details, refer to "ECO gauge" FP203.

8-3. Engine Exhaust Gas (Carbon Monoxide)
s08ac
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a long time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

Catalytic Converter 419

. If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear gate (Outback) closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off. This sound is normal.

8-4. Catalytic Converter
s08ad
WARNING . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures. . Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L models

2.4 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: 8
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an
CONTINUED

Driving Tips

420 Periodic Inspections

authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

8-5. Periodic Inspections
s08ae
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet" performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

8-6. Driving in Foreign Countries
s08af
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to "Fuel Requirements" FP326.
. Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.

8-7. Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles
s08ag
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items. (a) Size (b) Speed symbol (c) Load index (d) Circumference (e) Construction (f) Manufacturer (g) Brand (tread pattern) (h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar. If all four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings. Ride Handling Braking Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration Clearance between the body
and the tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.

Driving Tips for AWD Vehicles 421
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By
shifting power between the front and rear 8
wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration, and added engine braking force during deceleration. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind: . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery
CONTINUED

Driving Tips

422 Off Road Driving

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."
Engine oil
Brake fluid
Rear differential gear oil
Continuously variable transmission fluid
Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to "Towing" FP461.

8-8. Off Road Driving
s08ah
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
. Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because you are driving an AllWheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. You the driver and all your passengers should fasten the seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns or quick maneuvers unless absolutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or serious injury.

. Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.
& Legacy
Your AWD vehicle is neither a consv08eahn0-3 tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situations in which the driving surface is relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your SUBARU off road, you should review the common sense precautions in the next section (applicable to the Outback) for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicle's off-road capabilities are more limited than those of the Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water.

Off Road Driving 423

Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall.

& Outback CAUTION

s08ah02

Frequent driving of an AWD model under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." . Engine oil . Brake fluid Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is not eligible for warranty coverage.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher ground clearance which enables them to be used for wide applications including offroad driving. But please keep in mind that your vehicle is neither a conventional off-

road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity in relation to the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes vehicles of this type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of this vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road and allowing you to anticipate problems earlier. However, remember that your utility vehicle is not designed for highspeed cornering comparable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you make a sharp turn at high speed. If you do take your SUBARU offroad, certain common sense precautions such as those in the following list should be taken.
! Before driving . Make certain that you and all osf08yaho02u0r1 passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause

injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this manual.

! During driving General precautions:

s08ah0202

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more 8
easily tip over sideways than it can end

Driving Tips

over end. Avoid driving straight up or down

slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead,

drive with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

CONTINUED

424 Winter Driving

exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:
. If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams:
First, check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firmness.
Next, ensure that the bed of the stream is flat.
Then, drive slowly and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it does not reach the vehicle's undercarriage.
. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never drive through rushing water. Regardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" FP351.
! After driving . Always check your brakes for effes0c8taihv02e0-3 ness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicle's underbody after offroad driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-9. Winter Driving
s08ai
& Operation during Cold Weather
Carry some emergency equipment, ss0u8cai0h1 as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of the vehicle.

Winter Driving 425

If you fill the windshield washer tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the windshield washer tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the windshield washer tank.
. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blades or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle Before entering the vehicle, removes08aai0n10y1 snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

s08ai0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.

CAUTION . Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.

. Under either of the following conditions, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action.

When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily covered with snow

When the vehicle has been left parked during a snowstorm

Check for snow or ice buildup on

the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the ve-

hicle. If there is caked snow or

ice, remove it, being careful not

to damage the disc brakes and

brake hoses and ABS harness.

Driving Tips

When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following tips.
1. Place the select lever in the "P" position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

CONTINUED

426 Winter Driving

! Refueling in cold weather To help prevent moisture from formsi0n8gai01i0n3 the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather. Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on Snowy and Icy Roads
s08ai02
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine's intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, highspeed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads. Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking. To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.) Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle's braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For information about braking on slippery surfaces, refer to "ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)" FP356 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control System" FP358.
! Wiper operation when snowing Before driving in cold weather, makes08saui02r0e1 the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow selection in " " and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blade rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to "Climate Control" FP277.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" FP261.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, use the rear window defogger. Refer to "Defogger and Deicer" FP261.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow selection in " " and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer. Refer to "Windshield washer" FP259.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer to "Hazard Warning Flasher" FP172.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, nonfreezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE
When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion Protection
Refer to "Corrosion Protection" FP47s608.ai03

& Snow Tires

s08ai04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.

Winter Driving 427

(a) Size (b) Speed symbol (c) Load index (d) Circumference (e) Construction (f) Manufacturer (g) Brand (tread pattern) (h) Degrees of wear For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar. If all four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings. Ride Handling Braking Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration Clearance between the body
and the tires It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with "all season tires" which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions. If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should 8
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.
CONTINUED

Driving Tips

428 Loading Your Vehicle

& Tire Chains

s08ai05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.
Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the Vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it fsr0o8ami06 snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st.
For information on holding the transmission in 2nd position, refer to "Selection of Manual Mode" FP351.

8-10. Loading Your Vehicle
s08aj
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback, in the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.

WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.
. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can

Loading Your Vehicle 429

shorten the life of your vehicle. . Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback (Legacy) or the extended cargo area cover (Outback if equipped). Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

& Vehicle Capacity Weight s08aj01

CAUTION Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.

Driving Tips

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's
CONTINUED

430 Loading Your Vehicle

side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)
s08aj02
Certification label The certification label attached to the driver's side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof Molding and Crossbar (Legacy)
s08aj06
CAUTION . For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof molding must be used together with a roof crossbar kit and the appropriate carrying attachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a road hazard due to loss of cargo could result. . When using the roof crossbar kit, make sure that the total weight of the crossbars, carrying attachment and cargo does not exceed the maximum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety

Loading Your Vehicle 431

hazard.
. Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from use of a roof tent.
Cargo can be carried after securing the roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and installing the appropriate carrying attachment. When installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
When carrying cargo on the roof using the roof crossbar kit and carrying attachments, never exceed the maximum load limit as explained below. You should also be careful that the vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information about loading cargo into or onto your vehicle, refer to "Loading Your Vehicle" FP428. The maximum total load on the roof (including crossbars, carrying attachments and cargo) must not exceed 88 lbs (40 kg). Refer to the crossbar installation instructions for the maximum crossbar capacity. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, close to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachms08eajn06t0s1 such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc., follow the manufacturer's instructions for the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of the crossbars
s08aj0602

Each of the two roof moldings has two

mounting points for crossbars. Each

mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use a screwdriver to open the covers. When

installing the crossbars on the roof mold-

ing, follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Driving Tips

CONTINUED

432 Loading Your Vehicle

& Roof Rails with Integrated Crossbars (Outback)
s08aj08
1) Integrated crossbars
CAUTION . For cargo carrying purposes, the
crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails. Cargo must be attached to the crossbars using genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments. The crossbars must never be used independently to carry cargo on the roof. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint or a dangerous road hazard due to loss of cargo could result.

. When loading cargo on the crossbars, using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments, make sure the total weight of the crossbar attachments, and loaded cargo, does not exceed the maximum load limit of 150 lbs (67.5 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle and create a safety hazard.
. Be careful not to damage the vehicle body when passing the rope through the front and rear holes of the roof rails.
. Do not install a roof tent on the vehicle. Doing so may damage the vehicle and create a safety hazard. SUBARU warranties do not cover vehicle damage resulting from use of a roof tent.
The crossbars must be extended across the roof and locked into the roof rails to carry cargo on the roof. Cargo can only be carried on the crossbars using the genuine SUBARU accessory crossbar attachments.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the crossbars and a carrying attachment, never exceed the maximum load limit explained in the following. You should also

be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). For information on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle, refer to "Loading Your Vehicle" FP428. The maximum load limit of the cargo and carrying attachment must not exceed the allowable load limit described in the Owner's Manual of a genuine SUBARU carrying attachment. Place the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachms08eajn08t0s1 such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo basket, etc., follow the manufacturer's instructions of the load capacity and make sure that the attachments are securely installed. Use only attachments designed specifically for the crossbars. Before operating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics. Drive carefully,

Loading Your Vehicle 433

avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be increased. . Restore the bars to the original position when the bars are not used as crossbars.

! How to use as crossbars CAUTION

s08aj0802

. Do not raise the bar higher than necessary. The base of the bar may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars while sliding them. Otherwise, the bars may be scratched or the latch portions may be damaged.
. Do not slide the bar more than necessary when sliding the bar. The base of the bar may be damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or contact the roof panel or the moonroof when sliding the bar. Otherwise the roof panel may be dented or the glass of the moonroof may be damaged.
. Be careful hands do not become pinched when operating the cross bar. Hands becoming

pinched could result in injury.
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from the roof rail holders by pulling up the covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in

the illustration.
3. Install the bars into the holders. 4. Make sure that the latches are fitted securely.
! How to change the position of the 8
crossbar s08aj080201 WARNING
Carefully read the warning label attached to the roof rail. You can change the position of the rear crossbar. To change the position, perform the following procedure. 1. Take out the torque wrench from the under-floor storage compartment.
CONTINUED

Driving Tips

434 Loading Your Vehicle

2. Remove the plastic plug of the roof rail holder by using the torque wrench.

4. Pull out the other side of the crossbar from the roof rail holder by pulling up the cover.
5. Install both ends of the crossbar into the other holders.

3. Remove the bolt of the crossbar by using the torque wrench and pull this side out.

1) Guide plate 2) Torque wrench
6. Using the torque wrench, tighten the crossbar bolts until the torque wrench hits the guide plate.

NOTE
The tightening torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12 + 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).

Loading Your Vehicle 435

2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail holders by pulling up the covers.

4. Install the bars into the holders.
5. Make sure that the latches are fitted securely.

7. Install the plastic plug by pushing it into the hole until it is fully seated.

Driving Tips

! How to re-stow bars CAUTION

s08aj0803

Do not use the bars as roof rails when the bars are stowed.

1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed in the front side holder.

3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in the illustration.

436 Trailer Hitch (Outback If Equipped)

8-11. Trailer Hitch (Outback If Equipped)
s08ak
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to "Trailer Towing (Outback)" FP438.
. Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. . Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch only as a weight carrying hitch. Do not use with any type of weight distributing hitch. . The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard bumper beam if you do not have the original. . If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table.

Maximum

gross trailer gross tongue

weight

2.4 L models

3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)

2.5 L models

2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

270 lbs (122 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to "Trailer Towing (Outback)" FP438.

& Connecting a Trailer s08ak01
1. Remove the receiver cover from the hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.

Trailer Hitch (Outback If Equipped) 437
WARNING Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.

3. Insert the safety pin through the provided hole on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point 2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely installed on the ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. The chains should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

8
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness's black four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer's wire harness. 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a

Driving Tips

CONTINUED

438 Trailer Towing (Legacy)

watercraft.
& If Not Towing a Trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hs0i8tack0h2 receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube. . Place the dust cap over the four-pin connector of the hitch wire harness to protect against possible damage. . Occasionally lubricate terminals of the four-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-12. Trailer Towing (Legacy)
s08ar
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that may result from trailer towing, from any trailer towing equipment or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment. SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing.

8-13. Trailer Towing (Outback)
s08al
Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy and air conditioning system cooling performance.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle. Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and always consider the following conditions.
. Road conditions
. Weather conditions
. Vehicle load weight
. Trailer load weight
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions on correct installation and use provided by SUBARU.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and Maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not applys08atl0o1 vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to "Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions" in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.") Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum Load Limits s08al02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

CAUTION Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weight

s08al0201

Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum total trailer weight. The maximum total trailer weight is indicated in the following tables.

Trailer Towing (Outback) 439 8
CONTINUED

Driving Tips

440 Trailer Towing (Outback)

2.4 L models Conditions
When towing a trailer without brakes. When towing a trailer with brakes.
2.5 L models Conditions
When towing a trailer without brakes. When towing a trailer with brakes.

Maximum total trailer weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)
Maximum total trailer weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)

Maximum tongue weight 100 lbs (45 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
Maximum tongue weight 100 lbs (45 kg) 270 lbs (122 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
s08al0202

Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by SUBARU is shown on the certification label located on the driver's door of your

Trailer Towing (Outback) 441

vehicle.
Certification label ! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) s08al0203

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also shown on the certification label.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

! Tongue load

s08al0204

WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer's axle than in the front, the load is taken off the rear axle of the towing vehicle. This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in oversteer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value. For details about the trailer tongue load, refer to "Total trailer weight" FP439.
8

Driving Tips

Gross Axle Weight

Tongue load

1) Jack 2) Bathroom scale

CONTINUED

442 Trailer Towing (Outback)

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the following illustration. When weighing the tongue load, be sure to position the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than in the front; approximately 60% of the trailer load should be in the front and approximately 40% in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

& Trailer Hitches s08al03 WARNING Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.
CAUTION . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equipment. . Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine SUBARU hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.

& Connecting a Trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING

s08al04 s08al0401

Do not directly connect your trailer's hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicle's brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

Check that your trailer's brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU's brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer's hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer's brake system.

Trailer Towing (Outback) 443

! Trailer safety chains WARNING

s08al0402

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other to the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

! Side mirrors

s08al0403

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle's standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/ or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

s08al0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction of your vehicle's lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle's electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle's lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the stop lights each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

! Tires

s08al0405

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the tempor-
ary spare tire when towing can result 8
in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Driving Tips

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. Refer to "Tires" FP536.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

CONTINUED

444 Trailer Towing (Outback)

road service representative or professional to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer Towing Tips s08al05
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing a trailer, touch "BSD/ RCTA" to deactivate the system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about how to turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer to "Car settings" FP220.
. For models equipped with Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.
. Towing a trailer in high temperatures, or on long or steep grades, may cause the vehicle to overheat. Refer to "Engine Overheat-

ing" FP460.
. When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be different when compared to normal operation. You should never drive at excessive speeds but always employ extra caution when towing a trailer. You should also keep the following tips in mind.
. When parking on a steep slope with a trailer attached to your vehicle, the braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.
! Before starting out on a trip . Check the towing regulations for st0r8aali0l5e0r1 or caravan vehicles that vary by state/ region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations. . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-tohitch mounting are in good condition. If any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that
The trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.
The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer's stop lights illuminate when the vehicle's brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer's turn signal lights flash when the vehicle's turn signal lever is operated.
The safety chains are connected properly.
All cargo in the trailer is secured safely in position.
The side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn the "feel" of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.

Trailer Towing (Outback) 445

. When using the 2.4 L turbo engine model to tow a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or higher to reduce the risk of engine overheat.
! Driving with a trailer . You should allow for considerablys0m8aol05r0e2 stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace.
. When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can be difficult and requires experience. Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the opposite direction to the way you want to turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing around, straighten the steering wheel.
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direction.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line with the trailer, then straighten the steering again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

! Driving on grades . Before going down a steep hill,s0s8allo05w03

Driving Tips

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle's brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather,

because the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating, pay atten-

tion to the following items.

CONTINUED

446 Trailer Towing (Outback)

Engine coolant temperature gauge AT OIL TEMP warning light . If any of the following conditions occur, immediately turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. Refer to "If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency" FP448 and "Engine Overheating" FP460. Engine coolant temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to "Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge" FP175. AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to "AT OIL TEMP Warning Light" FP184.
. Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade Always block the wheels under s0b8aol05t0h4 vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into "P" and shut off the engine.

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency ... 448 9-2. Temporary Spare Tire............s.0.9....................... 448 9-3. Maintenance Tools.......................................... 449
Legacy ............................................................... 450 Outback.............................................................. 451 9-4. Flat Tires ......................................................... 452 Changing a Flat Tire ........................................... 452 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 456 TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models) ....................... 457 9-5. Jump Starting ................................................. 457 How to Jump Start.............................................. 458 9-6. Engine Overheating ........................................ 460 If Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 460 If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine
Compartment.................................................... 460
9-7. Towing ............................................................. 461 Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes ............ 461

In Case of Emergency
Using a Flat-Bed Truck ....................................... 464 Towing with All Wheels on the Ground ............... 464 9-8. Electronic Parking Brake If the Electronic
Parking Brake Cannot Be Released ............465 9-9. Access Key Fob If Access Key Fob
Does Not Operate Properly ..........................465 Locking and Unlocking....................................... 466 Switching Power Status ..................................... 466 Starting Engine .................................................. 466 9-10. Rear Gate (Outback) If the Rear Gate
Cannot Be Opened........................................467 9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information
Display ...........................................................468 9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in
an Accident....................................................470 To Restart the Engine When Involved in
an Accident...................................................... 470 Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation
When Involved in an Accident .......................... 470
9

In Case of Emergency

448 If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency

9-1. If You Park Your Vehicle in an Emergency
s09aa
The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch position. Turn on the hazard warning by pressing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pressing the switch again. When the hazard warning flasher are flashing, the corresponding turn signal indicator will also flash.

NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Temporary Spare Tire
s09ab
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
. U.S.-spec. models, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

Maintenance Tools 449

CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is stored under the under-floor storage compartment.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. For the correct tire pressure, refer to "Tires" FP536.
When using the temporary spare tire, note the following precautions. . Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). . Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly. . Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar 2) Indicator location mark . When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire. . The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-3. Maintenance Tools
s09ah
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools. . Jack . Jack handle . Screwdriver . Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback) . Wheel nut wrench . Torque wrench (Outback)
CAUTION
The torque wrench is designed to be used only when changing the position of the crossbar. Do not use the torque wrench in other cases. Otherwise, the torque wrench may be deformed.
9

In Case of Emergency

CONTINUED

450 Maintenance Tools

& Legacy

NOTE
To use the jack handle, insert the jack handle into the hole of the wheel nut wrench.

s09ah10

5) Jack
The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment. For the method to use the jack, refer to "Flat Tires" FP452.

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" FP320.)
2) Wheel nut wrench 3) Screwdriver 4) Jack handle

& Outback
! Type A

s09ah11 s09ah1103

3) Wheel nut wrench 4) Towing hook (eye bolt) 5) Jack 6) Jack handle 7) Screwdriver
The maintenance tools are stored in the under-floor storage compartment. For the method to use the jack, refer to "Flat Tires" FP452.

! Type B

Maintenance Tools 451
s09ah1104

In Case of Emergency

1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" FP320.)
2) Torque wrench for roof rails

9
1) Torque wrench for roof rails 2) Wheel nut wrench 3) Jack 4) Jack handle 5) Towing hook (eye bolt) 6) Screwdriver
CONTINUED

452 Flat Tires

For the method to use the jack, refer to "Flat Tires" FP452.

9-4. Flat Tires
s09ac
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

& Changing a Flat Tire WARNING

s09ac01

. Use only the jack and the jack handle provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in serious injury or death.
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be sure that there are no occupants or cargo on board.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an object on or underneath the jack. The jack can be unstable and this

can result in a severe accident. . Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in serious injury or death. . All passengers must exit the vehicle before you raise it with the jack. Raising the vehicle with someone inside of it could result in serious injury or death. . Do not start the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Doing so could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION Do not hit and bend the disc rotor backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

Flat Tires 453

NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the select lever in the "P" (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and unload all occupants and luggage from the vehicle.

NOTE
. Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it. . To take out the tools and spare tire, store the cargo area cover to the original position and open the underfloor storage. Refer to "Under-Floor Storage Compartment" FP320.

In Case of Emergency

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the cargo area (Outback). Refer to "Maintenance Tools" FP449.

6. Take out the under-floor storage compartment and turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
NOTE
Carefully read "Temporary Spare Tire" FP448 and strictly follow the instructions.

1) Notch 2) Valve hole 7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on the opposite side of the valve hole and pry the wheel cover to remove it.
9
CONTINUED

454 Flat Tires

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

11. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.
12. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

9. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.

10. Insert the jack handle into the hole of the wheel nut wrench.

Flat Tires 455

WARNING Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

In Case of Emergency

13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

16. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer to "Tires" FP536. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

1) Support holder 17. Store the flat tire in the spare tire compartment. Install with the support holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt. 9 NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try turning the support holder upside down. 18. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations.
CONTINUED

456 Flat Tires

WARNING Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place. & Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
s09ac02
Low tire pressure warning light The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur. (1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. (2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place. (3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the vehicle placard on the door pillar on the driver's side. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. . When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. . When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off.

Jump Starting 457

If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
& TPMS Screen (U.S.-Spec. Models)
s09ac05
This screen displays each tire pressure. Refer to "Basic Screens" FP205.

9-5. Jump Starting
s09ad
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle. If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help. Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.

. Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available.

In Case of Emergency

. A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

CONTINUED

458 Jump Starting
& How to Jump Start s09ad01
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch. 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

Jump Starting 459

A) Booster battery B) Strut mounting nut 1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery. 2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery. 4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut.

In Case of Emergency

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

460 Engine Overheating

9-6. Engine Overheating
s09ae
WARNING Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.
CAUTION If the engine overheats, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may be reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.
& If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone as0w9aae0y1 from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If No Steam Is Coming from

the Engine Compartment

NOTE

s09ae02

For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant, refer to "Engine Coolant" FP495.

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment. Refer to "Engine Hood" FP487.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact your authorized dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

Towing 461

9-7. Towing
s09af
WARNING Never tow AWD vehicles with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recommends it be done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.

& Towing Hook and Tie-Down Hooks/Holes
The towing hooks should be used onsl0y9aif0n1 an emergency. A towing hook is supplied with Outback only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing hook (the towing hook can be purchased at a SUBARU dealer). On Legacy, the towing access cover is on the rear bumper only. SUBARU recommends towing be done by your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole closest to the muffler under the vehicle for towing purposes.
Front towing hook (Outback): 1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the under-floor storage compartment.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and pry open the cover.
9
3. Screw the towing hook into the CONTINUED

In Case of Emergency

462 Towing
threaded hole until the threads can no longer be seen.

er operation of the SRS airbag system in a frontal collision.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor storage compartment. Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with prop-

CAUTION To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive load to the towing hook. Rear towing hook: 1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook, wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the under-floor storage compartment.
Legacy

Outback 2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the

Towing 463

threaded hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

er operation of the fuel pump shut off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.

Rear tie-down holes:

CAUTION To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply excessive load to the towing hook. Front tie-down hooks:

In Case of Emergency

The front tie-down hooks are located between each of the front tires and the front bumper.
Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down the vehicle. They are not for towing.

9
1) Rear tie-down hole The rear tie-down holes are located near each of the jack-up reinforcements. There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole. To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
CONTINUED

464 Towing

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING Use the rear tie-down holes only for downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip out of the holes, possibly causing a dangerous situation.
& Using a Flat-Bed Truck s09af02

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
Transport by flat-bed truck may cause the headlights to become misaligned. In such a case, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer after transporting the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

& Towing with All Wheels on the Ground
s09af03

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

WARNING . Never turn the ignition switch to
the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked. . Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.
CAUTION . If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck. . Sometime damaged vehicles cannot be towed because of their damaged condition. In that case, use a flat-bed truck for transportation. . The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For greater speeds and distances,

465 Electronic Parking Brake If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released

transport your vehicle on a flatbed truck. . Use a flat-bed truck if there are long distance downgrades or steep slopes. However, do not apply the brake pedal for a long time because the engine braking will not work while towing. Doing so could overheat the brake. . Drive carefully and do not make an impact on the towing rope by suddenly starting. . Use a specific towing rope for towing. If wire ropes and metal chains are needed to be used for towing, wrap the contact portion of the bumper with cloth to protect it from damage.
1. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral. 2. The ignition switch should be in the "ON" position while the vehicle is being towed. 3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.

9-8. Electronic Parking Brake If the Electronic Parking Brake Cannot Be Released
s09an
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.

9-9. Access Key Fob If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly
s09ap
CAUTION

In Case of Emergency

Keep metallic objects, magnetic sources and signal transmitters away from the area between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch. They may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the pushbutton ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob. . Locking/unlocking doors including rear

gate

. Switching power status

. Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, replace it with a new one. Refer to "Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob" FP526.

CONTINUED

466 Access Key Fob If Access Key Fob Does Not Operate Properly

& Locking and Unlocking s09ap01

& Switching Power Status s09ap02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the "P" position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

5. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated, press the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. The status of the push-button ignition switch then changes to "ON".

1) Release button 2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key. Lock or unlock the driver's door with the emergency key in the procedure described in "Locking and Unlocking from the Outside" FP137.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to attach the emergency key back to the access key fob.

4. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the pushbutton ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the status of the push-button ignition switch changes to either of the following.
. When the keyless access with pushbutton start system is deactivated: "ACC"
. Under other conditions: "ON"

NOTE
If the power does not switch even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Starting Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.

s09ap03

2. Shift the select lever into the "P"

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

467 Rear Gate (Outback) If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened

9-10. Rear Gate (Outback) If the Rear Gate Cannot Be Opened
s09au
In the event that you cannot open the rear gate by pressing the rear gate opener button (all models) or using the power rear gate (if equipped), you can open it from inside the cargo area.

CAUTION Never operate the rear gate lock release lever with your fingers because doing so may cause an injury. Always use a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.

In Case of Emergency

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position, while

9
Models without power rear gate 1) Rear gate lock release lever

depressing the brake pedal, press the 1. Remove the access cover at the

push-button ignition switch.

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

flat-head screwdriver.

NOTE
If the engine does not start even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

CONTINUED

468 Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
9-11. Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
s09av
If the following screens are displayed, temporary errors or malfunctions may occur in the center information display. If they are only temporary errors, the following procedure may help to eliminate them.

Models with power rear gate 1) Rear gate lock release lever
2. Turn the rear gate lock release lever to the right position using a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool. Then the rear gate will open.

Freezing the screen

Shutting down the screen

Blacking out the screen

469 Malfunctions of the Center Information Display
button for more than 10 seconds. The center information display will start up again. 4. If the center information display is not recovered by restarting it, contact your SUBARU dealer.

In Case of Emergency

Error A

1) Volume button (dual 7.0-inch display models)

Error B
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn the ignition switch once to the "LOCK/OFF" position, then start the engine.

1) Volume button (11.6-inch display models)
3. If the center information display cannot be recovered even though the engine has been restarted, press and hold the volume

470 If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident

9-12. If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident
s09ar
& To Restart the Engine When Involved in an Accident
s09ar02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, be sure to inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel has leaked on the ground, do not try to restart the engine. The fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off system. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying the fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is activated. Models without "keyless access with push-button start system": 1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position. 2. Restart the engine.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" or "OFF" position.
2. Restart the engine.
& Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking Operation When Involved in an Accident
When the automatic door locking/unlso09cakr0-3 ing function is ON, all the doors will be locked automatically while driving. For further details, refer to "Automatic Door Locking/Unlocking" FP140.
When the vehicle sustains a strong impact which may trigger the airbags to deploy, the door locks may be unlocked automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained from a rear end collision does not trigger the airbags to deploy. However if the impact is strong enough to deploy the airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic door locking/unlocking function will be suspended and the doors will remain unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first and carry out the following to retrieve the automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system": 1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
Models with "keyless access with push-button start system": 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position. 2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the impact, the emergency unlocking may not function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a malfunction in the system. Have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer. . The doors unlock automatically
while driving. . With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock side of the power door locking switch.

. The automatic door locking/unlocking function does not operate.

If Your Vehicle Is Involved in an Accident 471 9

In Case of Emergency

10-1. Exterior Care ................................................. 474 Washing ...................................s.1.0........................ 474 Waxing and Polishing ......................................... 475 Cleaning Alloy Wheels ........................................ 475
10-2. Corrosion Protection .................................... 476 Most Common Causes of Corrosion.................... 476 To Help Prevent Corrosion .................................. 476

Appearance Care
10-3. Cleaning the Interior .....................................477 Seat Fabric Material ........................................... 477 Leather Seat Materials........................................ 477 Synthetic Leather Upholstery ............................. 478 Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Combination Meter, and Other Plastic Surface ............................................................ 478 Center Information Display ................................. 478

Appearance Care

474 Exterior Care

10-1. Exterior Care & Washing
CAUTION

s10aa s10aa01

. When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts, it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of the power steering.
. When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents when washing the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a detergent with organic solvents is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be damaged. . Outback: Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic car-wash operator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. The best way to preserve your vehicle's beauty is frequent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush when washing down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody Chemicals, salts and gravel uses1d0aa0f1o0r1 deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle parts, as they are particularly prone to mud

Exterior Care 475

and sand buildup. Do not use a sharpedged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and other parts when washing suspension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine bottom for a long time. It may cause damage of some electrical parts.
! Using a warm water washer . Keep a good distance of 12 in (3s010aca0m10)2 or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle. . Do not wash the same area continuously. . If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and Polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle bes1f0oaar0e2 waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the manufacturer's instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grainsize number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic solvents on the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a polish or wax with organic solvents is applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
& Cleaning Alloy Wheels . Promptly wipe the alloy wheels cleas1n0aao04f 10
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off. . Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed washing device.
CONTINUED

Appearance Care

476 Corrosion Protection

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

10-2. Corrosion Protection
s10ab
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.
& Most Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corros1s0iaob0n1 are: . The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. . Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when: . It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution. . It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To Help Prevent Corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to presv10eabn02t corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfaces.
. Roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

Cleaning the Interior 477

of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the Interior
s10ac
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use organic solvents.)
& Seat Fabric Material
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris wsi1th0ac0a1 vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, paint thinner, or any similar materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather Seat Materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a sh10iagc0h2

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause leather to become

brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain

its resiliency, leather should be cleaned

monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-

Appearance Care

cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap, taking care not to

soak the leather or allow water to pene-

trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle

circular motion while cleaning the leather -

do not rub or apply extreme pressure.

Wipe the leather again with another clean, slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue

and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt

spots may be treated with a commercial

leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning

solvents, leather oils, varnishes or

polishes on your leather as it will dry out

the leather finish.

CONTINUED

478 Cleaning the Interior

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage. You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genuine leather.
& Synthetic Leather Upholstery
The synthetic leather material used ons10tahc0e3 SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

& Instrument Panel, Console Panel, Switches, Combination Meter, and Other Plastic Surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to cleans10tahc0e4 instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or gasoline, or strong cleaning agents that contain those solvents. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or any switches. If silicone adheres to these parts, it may cause damage to electrical components.

& Center Information Display
To clean the center information dissp1l0aacy11, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If the display(s) is/are extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent then carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the display(s). Doing so could damage the monitor's components.
. Do not wipe the display(s) with a hard cloth. Doing so could scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that contains thinner, gasoline, or any other volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid could erase the lettering on the switches on the display(s).

11-1. Maintenance Schedule ................................. 483 11-2. Maintenance Precautions ....s.1.1....................... 483
Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment.................................................... 484
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment.................................................... 485
When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While the Engine Is Running ....... 485
11-3. Maintenance Tips .......................................... 485 Removing and Reinstalling Clips ........................ 485
11-4. Engine Hood.................................................. 487 11-5. Engine Compartment Overview ................... 489
2.5 L Models ....................................................... 489 2.4 L Models ....................................................... 490
11-6. Engine Oil ...................................................... 491 Engine Oil Consumption ..................................... 491 Checking the Oil Level........................................ 491 Changing the Oil and Oil Filter............................ 493
Recommended Grade and Viscosity.................... 493 Synthetic Oil....................................................... 493 11-7. Cooling System............................................. 494 Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections ................... 494 Engine Coolant ................................................... 495 11-8. Air Cleaner Element...................................... 496 Replacing the Air Cleaner Element...................... 496 11-9. Spark Plugs ................................................... 498 Recommended Spark Plugs ................................ 498 11-10. Drive Belts ................................................... 499 11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid ............................................................... 499

Maintenance and Service

11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear

Differential Gear Oil ......................................499

Recommended Grade and Viscosity ................... 499

11-13. Brake Fluid ...................................................500

Checking the Fluid Level .................................... 500

Recommended Brake Fluid................................. 500

11-14. Brake Booster ..............................................501

11-15. Brake Pedal ..................................................501

11-16. Replacement of Brake Pad .........................501

11-17. Tires and Wheels .........................................502

Types of Tires .................................................... 502

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(U.S.-Spec. Models) .......................................... 502

Maintenance and Service

Tire Inspection ................................................... 504

Tire Pressures and Wear .................................... 504

Wheel Balance ................................................... 506

Wear Indicators.................................................. 507

Rotational Direction of Tires ............................... 507

Tire Rotation ...................................................... 508

Tire Replacement ............................................... 509

Wheel Replacement............................................ 510

11-18. Alloy Wheels ................................................510

11-19. Windshield Washer Fluid ............................510 11-20. Replacement of Wiper Blades ....................511

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly ..................... 512

Window Wiper Blade Rubber .............................. 513

Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly

(Outback) ......................................................... 514

Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber (Outback) ...... 514

11-21. Battery ..........................................................516

Maintenance and Service
11-22. Fuses ........................................................... 517 11-23. Installation of Accessories......................... 518 11-24. Replacing Bulbs.......................................... 518
Headlights .......................................................... 519 Front Turn Signal Light ....................................... 519 Rear Combination Lights .................................... 519 Backup Light ...................................................... 522 Dome Light......................................................... 523

Map Lights......................................................... 524 Door Step Light.................................................. 524 Cargo Area Light (Outback) ................................ 524 Trunk Light (Legacy) .......................................... 524 Other Bulbs ....................................................... 525 11-25. Replacing Battery ........................................525 Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob................. 526 Replacing Battery of Transmitter ........................ 527

11-1. Maintenance Schedule
s11aa
U.S. models The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." For details, read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."
Canada models The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Service Booklet." For details, read the separate "Warranty and Service Booklet."
Except for U.S. and Canada models Some items of your vehicle are required to be serviced at scheduled intervals. For details about your maintenance schedule, read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."

11-2. Maintenance Precautions
s11ab
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar apparatus. Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.
. Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your

Maintenance Schedule 483

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid.

. Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.

Maintenance and Service

. Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas. . Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.

CONTINUED

484 Maintenance Precautions

. Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seatbelt pretensioner system, or attempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.
. Check the inside of the engine compartment to see if there are any cloths and tools left. If they are left inside, they may be a cause of malfunction and fire.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle which is damaged by adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU.
& Before Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment
s11ab01
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. If your body or clothes come into contact with a rotating fan, that could result in serious injury. To avoid risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions. Models with push-button start
system: Always turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position and confirm that the operation indicator on the switch is turned off. Then take the access key fob out from the vehicle. Models without push-button start system: Always remove the key from the ignition switch. . Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system temporarily place that system in the service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.

Maintenance Tips 485

& When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment
s11ab03
CAUTION . Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause your hand to slip off the belt cover and result in an unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a burn or other injury. Note that the oil filter becomes very hot when the engine is running and remains hot for some time after the engine has stopped.
& When Checking or Servicing in the Engine Compartment While the Engine Is Running
s11ab02
WARNING A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Maintenance Tips
s11bi
Some clips and fender linings must be removed before replacing the air cleaner elements or specific bulbs.

& Removing and Reinstalling Clips
s11bi01
! Removing clips There are several types of clips uses1d1bi0f1o0r1 your vehicle.

! Type A and D clips

s11bi010107

Maintenance and Service

Type A clips

CONTINUED

486 Maintenance Tips

! Type B clips

s11bi010102

! Type C clips

s11bi010103

Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using a flat-head screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised. 2. Remove the clips with a flat-head screwdriver using leverage.

1. Pull out the center portion of the clip using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to remove the entire body of the clip.

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a Phillips screwdriver until the center portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Reinstalling clips Type A clips Type B clips

Engine Hood 487

s11bi0102
Type C clips

11-4. Engine Hood
s11ac

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the engine hood when the wind is strong. The engine hood could close suddenly, possibly causing injuries from slamming.

Maintenance and Service

. Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the engine hood. If the engine hood becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to support holding it open.

. Check that the end of the hood

stay is inserted into the slot. If it is

not inserted properly, the hood may drop and cause injury.

Type D clips
Insert the clip without the center portion first and then push the center portion of the clip into the hole.

CONTINUED

488 Engine Hood

To open the hood: 1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood lock by moving the lever between the front grille and the hood toward the left.

compartment.
To close the hood: 1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the engine compartment and return the prop to its retainer. 2. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop. 3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the engine

11-5. Engine Compartment Overview

& 2.5 L Models

s11ad s11ad08

Engine Compartment Overview 489
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 500) 2) Main fuse box (page 517) 3) Battery (page 516) 4) Windshield washer tank (page 510) 5) Engine oil filler cap (page 491) 6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 495) 7) Radiator cap (page 495) 8) Engine oil filter (page 493) 9) Engine oil level gauge (page 491) 10) Air cleaner case (page 496)
11
CONTINUED

Maintenance and Service

490 Engine Compartment Overview

& 2.4 L Models

s11ad17

1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 500) 2) Main fuse box (page 517) 3) Battery (page 516) 4) Windshield washer tank (page 510) 5) Engine oil filler cap (page 491) 6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 495) 7) Radiator cap (page 495) 8) Engine oil filter (page 493) 9) Engine oil level gauge (page 491) 10) Air cleaner case (page 496)

Engine Oil 491

11-6. Engine Oil
s11ae
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine Oil Consumption
Some engine oil will be consumed ws1h1aiel0e7 driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and thus require refilling between maintenance intervals: . When the engine is new and within the break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed (repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high engine speeds (for extended periods of time)
. When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When the engine idles for extended periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU retailer who may perform a test under controlled conditions.

& Checking the Oil Level s11ae01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine. If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.
2.5 L models 1) Oil level gauge 2) Oil filler cap 3) Oil filter
11
CONTINUED

Maintenance and Service

492 Engine Oil

2.4 L models 1) Oil level gauge 2) Oil filler cap 3) Oil filter
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, and insert it again. 3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly inserted until it stops.

2.5 L models 1) Full level 2) Low level 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level

2.4 L models 1) Full level 2) Low level 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. 5. Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil level is below the low level mark, add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the engine oil filter when removing the oil filler cap. Doing so may result in a burn, a pinched finger, or may cause some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and vis-

Engine Oil 493

cosity. . Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil filler cap and slowly pour engine oil through the filler neck. After pouring oil into the engine, you must use the level gauge to confirm that the oil level is correct.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the full level when the engine is cold. . After adding or changing the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a level surface, then start the engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm that the warning light has turned off after the engine has started. Refer to "Engine Low Oil Level Warning Indicator" FP183.
& Changing the Oil and Oil Filter
Change the oil and oil filter accordins1g1aet0o2 the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."

NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer for changing the engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the special tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and also, used oils are properly disposed of. . If performing oil replacement yourself, observe the local regulations and dispose of waste oil properly.
& Recommended Grade and Viscosity
s11ae03
CAUTION Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Refer to "Engine Oil" FP532.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.

& Synthetic Oil
You should use synthetic engine oils1t1haea05t meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity and grade shown in this Owner's Manual. Refer to "Engine Oil" FP532. Also, you must follow the oil and filter changing intervals shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance booklet."
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity noted in chapter 12 is the recommended engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
11

Maintenance and Service

494 Cooling System

11-7. Cooling System
s11af
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
CAUTION . Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT that does not require the first change for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km). This coolant should not be mixed with any other brand or type of coolant during this period. Mixing with a different coolant will reduce the life of the coolant. Should it be necessary to top off the coolant for any reason, use only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT. If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is diluted with another brand or type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing coolant. . Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling Fan, Hose and Connections
Your vehicle employs an electric coos1l1inaf0g3 fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature.
1) Normal operating range If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Refer to "Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge" FP175.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. Refer to "Fuses" FP517 and "Fuses and Circuits" FP538. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Cooling System 495

& Engine Coolant
! Checking the coolant level

s11af02 s11af0201

1) Fill up to this level.

CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

Maintenance and Service

1) "FULL" level mark 2) "LOW" level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the "LOW" level mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refill coolant up to just below the filler neck as shown in the following illustration.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the cap and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.

! Changing the coolant It may be difficult to change the coso11laaf0n20t2. Have the coolant changed by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."
11

496 Air Cleaner Element

11-8. Air Cleaner Element
s11ag
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

& Replacing the Air Cleaner Element
Replace the air cleaner element accorsd11iang0g1 to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

! 2.5 L models

s11ag0111

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.

CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, there is the possibility of causing a negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is unnecessary to clean or wash the element.

1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).

3. Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner case cleaned.
4. If you find large foreign objects such as leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.

Air Cleaner Element 497

cleaner case (front). 7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

! 2.4 L models

s11ag0112

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the cover rearward while lifting it up.

5. Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.

1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).

3. Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION If the inside of the air cleaner case is extremely soiled (for example, by sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and have the air cleaner case cleaned.
4. If you find large foreign objects such as 11
leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove the foreign objects.

Maintenance and Service

6. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air

CONTINUED

498 Spark Plugs

5. Install a new air cleaner element in the way the longitudinal side and the transverse side face as shown in the illustration.

cleaner case (front).
7. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

11-9. Spark Plugs
s11ah
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."
& Recommended Spark Plugs
Refer to "Electrical System" FP536. s11ah01

6. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air

Drive Belts 499

11-10. Drive Belts
s11ai
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of the drive belt periodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic belt tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-11. Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
s11ay
There is no fluid level gauge. It is unnecessary to check the continuously variable transmission fluid level. However, if necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

11-12. Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil
s11bl
It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet." Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended Grade and Viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own bs1a1sbl0e1 oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to "Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil" FP534.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a 11
decline in vehicle performance.

Maintenance and Service

500 Brake Fluid

11-13. Brake Fluid
s11ao
& Checking the Fluid Level s11ao01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBARU dealer.

Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them. . Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
Visually check the brake fluid level of the reservoir monthly on the even surface.

& Recommended Brake Fluid

Refer to "Fluids" FP535.

s11ao02

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if they are the same brand.

CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts.

1) "MAX" level line 2) "MIN" level line
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level is below "MIN", top up brake fluid to "MAX". Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

Brake Booster 501

11-14. Brake Booster
s11aq
The brake booster utilizes the vacuum produced by the engine manifold to reduce the force required to depress the brake pedal.
The vacuum in the brake booster may be insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed when the engine is stopped or after the vehicle has been parked for a long period of time. It such cases, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal using greater force than usual.

11-15. Brake Pedal
s11ar
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-16. Replacement of Brake Pad
s11at
CAUTION
. If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement.
. It is recommended that you disconnect the vehicle battery before replacing the brake pad. However, it is dangerous to disconnect the vehicle battery. We recommend that you have your SUBARU dealer replace the brake pad.

Maintenance and Service

CONTINUED

502 Tires and Wheels

The disc brakes have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

11-17. Tires and Wheels
s11av
& Types of Tires
You should be familiar with type of st1i1raev0s1 present on your vehicle.
! All season tires The factory-installed tires on yours11nave01w01 vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However all season tires do not offer as much traction performance as winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by "ALL SEASON" and/or "M+S" (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed capsa11bavi0li1t0y2 tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires Winter tires are best suited for drivisn11gav0o10n3 snow-covered and icy roads. However winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires and all season tires on roads other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (U.S.-Spec. Models)
The tire pressure monitoring systems1p1ravo0-2 vides the driver with a warning message by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown on the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them

Tires and Wheels 503

by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for every difference of 108F (5.68C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example, the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95V
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside temperature

Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]

Front

Rear

308F (-18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F (-128C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

-108F (-238C) 41 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

Example: Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18 100H Standard tire pressures: Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside temperature

Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]

Front

Rear

308F (-18C) 38 (260, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)

108F (-128C) 40 (275, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.65)

-108F (-238C) 42 (290, 2.95) 41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method described above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to see that the low tire pressure warning light goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire pressure warning light does not go off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this event, go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any increase in the tire pressures caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warning light to go off.

System resetting is necessary when the wheels are changed (for example, a switch to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have this work performed by a SUBARU dealer following wheel replacement.

It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same part number as the standard-equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light in the instrument panel will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute.

Maintenance and Service

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned ON or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute,
CONTINUED

504 Tires and Wheels
you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur. 1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed. 2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/ or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.
& Tire Inspection Check on a daily basis that the tsi1r1eav0s3 are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problem.
NOTE . When the wheels and tires strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoidable, keep the vehicle's

speed down to a walking pace or less, and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when you park the vehicle. . If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.
& Tire Pressures and Wear Maintaining the correct tire psr1e1asv0-4 sures helps to maximize the tires' service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Tires and Wheels 505

Tire placard
Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.
Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE . The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm. . The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.

. Correctly inflated tires (tread worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.
11

Maintenance and Service

CONTINUED

506 Tires and Wheels

. Under inflated tires (tread worn at . Over inflated tires (tread worn in

shoulders)

center)

vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of

& Wheel Balance Each wheel was correctly balansc11eavd05 when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle's straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle's running stability.

Tires and Wheels 507

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.

NOTE The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) for optimum straight-line stability and cornering performance.

& Wear Indicators

s11av06

1) New tread 2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
NOTE For safety, inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators

become visible. & Rotational Direction of Tires
s11av11

Maintenance and Service

Example of rotational direction marked on the sidewall 1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

on the side wall. The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels are

fitted.

CONTINUED

508 Tires and Wheels
& Tire Rotation

s11av07

Vehicles equipped with 4 nonunidirectional tires 1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires 1) Front

Models with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires 1) Front

NOTE In prior to carrying out a tire rotation, check the side wall of the tires and confirm the following. . All 5 tires are the same in brand and tread pattern. . The rotational directions and sizes match.
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet."
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.
& Tire Replacement
The wheels and tires are importants1a1anv0d8 integral parts of your vehicle's design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire placard and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle's ground clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires at the same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)

Tires and Wheels 509

(h) Degrees of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire placard. The tire placard is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all four tires are not the same in items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

Ride

Maintenance and Service

Handling

Braking

Speedometer/Odometer calibration

Clearance between the body and the tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

CONTINUED

510 Alloy Wheels

& Wheel Replacement
When replacing wheels due, for exams1p1alve09, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to rub against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

11-18. Alloy Wheels
s11bm
Alloy wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap is replaced, be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alloy wheels.

11-19. Windshield Washer Fluid
s11ax
Windshield washer fluid warning light When there is only a small amount of washer fluid remaining, the windshield washer fluid warning light will appear. When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as follows.

Replacement of Wiper Blades 511

1) "FULL" mark
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then add fluid until it reaches the "FULL" mark on the tank. Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use clean water. In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid.
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause paint damage.
If you fill the windshield washer tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the

one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the windshield washer tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the windshield washer tank.
. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blades or washer system.

11-20. Replacement of Wiper Blades
s11az
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Maintenance and Service

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. When you wish to raise the passenger-side wiper arm, first raise the driver-side wiper arm. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.

CONTINUED

512 Replacement of Wiper Blades

. Return the passenger-side wiper arm to its original position before returning the driver-side wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise, the passenger-side wiper assembly and driver-side wiper assembly will touch each other, possibly resulting in scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers to the original positions, return the wipers slowly on the windshield by hand. Returning the wipers from the detached positions by the spring operation might change the shape of the wiper arm or scratch the windshield.
. While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to the original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following procedures.

& Windshield Wiper Blade As-

sembly

NOTE

s11az01

Do not lower the wiper arm while the wiper blade assembly is removed.

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield. First raise the driver's side wiper arm and then raise the front passenger's side wiper arm.

CAUTION Hold the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade, may result in blade deformation.

1) Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by hand, push the lock knob to release the lock, and then pull out the wiper blade assembly.
NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

Replacement of Wiper Blades 513

& Window Wiper Blade Rubber s11az05

illustration, so that it can be removed.
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber through the slit to remove it.
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber, perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. After installation, check that the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the end of the cap.

3. When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm connection part and then slide it in the opposite direction of removal to install. After installing the wiper blade assembly, check that the connection part is locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

Maintenance and Service

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit on the underside of the wiper blade is in the removal position, as shown in the

11
CONTINUED

514 Replacement of Wiper Blades
& Rear Window Wiper Blade Assembly (Outback)
s11az03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

& Rear Window Wiper Blade Rubber (Outback)
s11az04

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm.

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to unlock it from the plastic support.

them in the new blade rubber.

Replacement of Wiper Blades 515

Maintenance and Service

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install

516 Battery
11-21. Battery
s11ba
WARNING . Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive. . For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery. . Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes. If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a wellventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.

Fuses 517

11-22. Fuses
s11bb
CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel behind the fuse box cover on the driver's seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1) Spare fuses 2) Fuse puller
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in the engine compartment. Also, the spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller when removing it from the main fuse box.

Maintenance and Service

1) Good 2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/

"OFF" position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to "Fuses and Circuits"

FP538.

CONTINUED

518 Installation of Accessories

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-23. Installation of Accessories
s11bd
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle. We recommend that you install only genuine SUBARU accessories on your vehicle.

11-24. Replacing Bulbs
s11be
WARNING Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. For the specified wattage of each bulb, refer to "Bulb Chart" FP542. For replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Headlights

Replacing Bulbs 519

s11be18

& Front Turn Signal Light

s11be03

2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and replace the bulb with a new one.

& Rear Combination Lights s11be05

! Legacy
NOTE

s11be0501

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Right-hand side

Maintenance and Service

1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo 11
the clips, refer to "Type C clips" FP486.
Left-hand side 1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out.
CONTINUED

520 Replacing Bulbs

counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.

2. Remove the side cover.

4. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it from the vehicle.
8. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.

1) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly by turning it

Replacing Bulbs 521

Maintenance and Service

9. Tighten the upper and lower screws. 10. Reinstall the side cover.

! Outback

s11be0502

2. Remove the side cover.

4. Slide the rear combination light assembly straight rearward and remove it from the vehicle.

3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo the clips, refer to "Type C clips" FP486.

1) Rear turn signal light 2) Rear side marker light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear CONTINUED

522 Replacing Bulbs
combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and replace it with a new one. 7. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.

8. Reinstall the rear combination light assembly by sliding the two-pronged part of the combination light assembly securely to each holder of the vehicle side.

9. Tighten the upper and lower screws. 10. Reinstall the side cover.

& Backup Light

s11be06

! Legacy
NOTE

s11be0601

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk trim lining by removing the clips indicated in the illustration.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.

5. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.

! Outback

s11be0602

Replacing Bulbs 523

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& Dome Light

s11be08

Maintenance and Service

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it.

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the light cover as shown in the illustration, and pry the light cover off from the rear gate trim.

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
11

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it clockwise.

CONTINUED

524 Replacing Bulbs

& Door Step Light CAUTION

s11be10

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

& Cargo Area Light (Outback) s11be11

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.

& Map Lights CAUTION

s11be09

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 3. Install a new bulb. 4. Reinstall the lens.

& Trunk Light (Legacy)

s11be12

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

Replacing Battery 525

& Other Bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bus1l1bbes29. We recommend that you have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

11-25. Replacing Battery
s11bk
The access key fob/transmitter battery may be discharged under the following conditions. . The operation of the keyless access function is unstable. . The operating distance of the remote keyless entry system is unstable. . The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance.
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the battery. . Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as bright sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer. . Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. . Mount the battery in the correct orientation to prevent fluid leakage. Be careful not to bend the terminals. It may result in a malfunction. . It is recommended that the battery should be replaced by a SUBARU dealer. . Use a new battery. . After replacing the battery, confirm that the access key fob/transmitter functions properly.
11

Maintenance and Service

CONTINUED

526 Replacing Battery

& Replacing Battery of Access Key Fob
s11bk01
CAUTION . When removing or fitting the
access key fob cover, make sure that the plastic part does not come off or become misaligned. . Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or equivalent

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to remove the cover.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+) side facing upward as shown in the figure.

1) Release button 2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob by fitting the projections and recesses together.

& Replacing Battery of Transmitter
s11bk02
CAUTION Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or equivalent

Replacing Battery 527

1. Open the key head using a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing the hooks.

1) Negative (-) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) making sure to install the new battery with the negative (-) side facing up. 5. Put together the transmitter case by fitting the hooks on the case. 6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the key head. 7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans- 11
mitter must be synchronized with the remote keyless entry system's control unit. Press either the " " or " " button six times to synchronize the unit.

Maintenance and Service

12-1. Specifications ............................................... 530 Dimensions ..............................s.1.2........................ 530 Engine................................................................ 531 Fuel.................................................................... 531 Engine Oil .......................................................... 532 Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil... 534 Fluids ................................................................. 535 Engine Coolant ................................................... 535 Electrical System ................................................ 536 Tires................................................................... 536 Brake Pedal ........................................................ 537 Brake Disc.......................................................... 537 Brake Pad........................................................... 537

Specifications
12-2. Fuses and Circuits ........................................538 Fuse Panel Located in the Passenger Compartment ................................................... 538 Main Fuse Panel Located in the Engine Compartment ................................................... 540
12-3. Bulb Chart......................................................542 Safety Precautions ............................................. 542 Bulb Chart ......................................................... 543
12-4. Vehicle Identification.....................................545 12-5. Function Settings ..........................................546
Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display ......................... 546
Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display ............................... 546
Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer ...................................................... 546

Specifications

530 Specifications

12-1. Specifications s12aa

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

s12aa01

Item

Drive system

Transmission type

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Tread

Front Rear

Ground clearance*1

2.5 L

Legacy

2.4 L

190.6 (4,840) 72.4 (1,840) 59.1 (1,500) 108.3 (2,750) 62.2 (1,580) 63.4 (1,610)
5.9 (150)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty CVT: Continuously variable transmission AWD: All-Wheel Drive

AWD CVT

2.5 L

Outback

in (mm) 2.4 L

191.3 (4,860) 73.0 (1,855) 66.1 (1,680) 108.1 (2,745) 61.8 (1,570) 62.8 (1,595)
8.7 (220)

& Engine
Engine model
Engine type
Displacement cu-in (cc) Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) Compression ratio Firing order

s12aa02

FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine

152 (2,498)

3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)

12.0 : 1

1324

Specifications 531
FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo) Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine 146 (2,387)
3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0) 10.6 : 1
1324

& Fuel

s12aa08
Fuel requirement

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

Fuel tank capacity 18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

Specifications

12
CONTINUED

532 Specifications
& Engine Oil
For the checking, adding and replacins1g2aap1r2ocedure or other details, refer to "Engine Oil" FP491.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil Always use the SUBARU approveds1e2naag12i0n1e oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page. ! Alternative engine oil If the SUBARU approved oil is unavsa12ialaa1b20l2e, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. . In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures. . When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recommended by SUBARU.

Specifications 533

Oil grade

API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SN with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING" or SN PLUS with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING"

ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil for optimum engine performance and protection. Conventional oil may be

2.5 L models Adding the oil from low level to
full level: 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Changing the oil and oil filter:

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

5W-30 conventional oil may be used if you need to add oil. However, you should change to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.

2.4 L models Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

Changing the oil and oil filter: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

Specifications

12
CONTINUED

534 Specifications

& Front Differential and Rear Differential Gear Oil

s12aa13

Oil

Front differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*3 . API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*4

SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Rear differential gear oil 2.5 L models and 2.4 L for Legacy: SUBARU Extra MT*3 or API
classification GL-5 (75W-90*4) 2.4 L for Outback: API classification GL-5 (75W-90*3 or 90*4)
. 75W-90* . 90

Oil capacity*1 Remarks*2

1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) "Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil" FP499

*: Recommended 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) "Front Differential Gear Oil and Rear Differential Gear Oil" FP499

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section. *3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of differential gear oil. *4: You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.

Specifications 535

& Fluids
Fluid Continuously variable transmission fluid
Brake fluid

s12aa10
Fluid type*1

Fluid capacity*2

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

2.5 L models: · Legacy: 11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt) · Outback: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt) 2.4 L models: · Legacy: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt) · Outback: 12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid

Remarks*3 "Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid" FP499 "Brake Fluid" FP500

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid. *2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. *3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine Coolant

2.5 L models 2.4 L models

Vehicle model

s12aa11

Coolant capacity 9.5 US qt (9.0 liters, 7.9 Imp qt) 9.2 US qt (8.7 liters, 7.7 Imp qt)

Coolant type SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to "Cooling System" FP494.

Specifications

CONTINUED

536 Specifications
& Electrical System
Alternator Spark plugs

s12aa03
Battery type
2.5 L models 2.4 L models

LN2 2.5 L models: 12 V-150 A 2.4 L models: 12 V-190 A
DILKAR7Q8 (NGK) SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

& Tires
Item Tire size

Wheel size Pressure
Temporary spare tire/ Conventional tire

Front Rear Size
Pressure

Wheel nut tightening torque

s12aa05

Legacy

Outback

225/55R17 97V

225/50R18 95V

225/65R17 102H

225/60R18 100H

17 6 7J 17 6 7 1/2J

18 6 7 1/2J

17 6 7J

18 6 7J

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

T155/70 D17 110M

T155/80 D17 101M*2 225/60 R18 100H*3

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)*2 Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)*3 Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)*3

88.5 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12.2 kgf·m)*1

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to "Changing a Flat Tire" FP452.
*2: Models with temporary spare tire *3: Models with conventional tire

Specifications 537

& Brake Pedal

s12aa27

Pedal clearance Pedal free play

*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

2.68 (68)* 0.02 - 0.11 (0.5 - 2.7)

in (mm)

& Brake Disc
If you need information on the usage lism12iata1v8alue of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Brake Pad
Brake pad wear limit

s12aa28

0.06 (1.5)

in (mm)

Specifications

538 Fuses and Circuits
12-2. Fuses and Circuits
s12ab
& Fuse Panel Located in the Passenger Compartment s12ab01

Fuse panel

Fuse rating

Circuit

Empty

20 A CIGAR

7.5 A IG A-1

15 A AUDIO NAVI

10 A IG B-2

7.5 A METER IG (DCDC)

20 A 12 V SOCKET

10 A A/C IG

7.5 A ACC

7.5 A IG B-1

7.5 A EYE SIGHT (DCDC)

Empty

7.5 A IG A-3

Empty

7.5 A UNIT IG (DCDC)

7.5 A MIRROR ACC

Empty

10 A IG A-2

Fuse panel

Fuse rating

Circuit

10 A SRS AIR BAG

7.5 A A/C IG (DCDC)

10 A EYE SIGHT

7.5 A IG A-4

7.5 A A/C ACC (DCDC)

7.5 A UNIT +B (DCDC)

10 A BACK UP

15 A SEAT HTR R

20 A TRAIL R.FOG

Empty

7.5 A BACK UP (DCDC)

7.5 A SMT (DCDC)

15 A MIRROR +B

7.5 A KEY SW A

Empty

7.5 A ILLUMI (DCDC)

7.5 A KEY SW B

15 A UNIT +B1

7.5 A UNIT +B2

Fuses and Circuits 539
12
CONTINUED

Specifications

540 Fuses and Circuits
& Main Fuse Panel Located in the Engine Compartment s12ab02

Fuse panel

Fuse rating

Circuit

Empty

7.5 A OBD

7.5 A STOP

10 A MB-B

7.5 A PU B/UP

30 A JB-B2

7.5 A M/B-IG1

7.5 A M/B-IG2

10 A M/B-IG3

7.5 A M/B-IG4

7.5 A HORN1

7.5 A HORN2

10 A TAIL

15 A HAZARD

20 A D/L

20 A F/P

Empty

10 A AVCS

Fuse panel

Fuse rating

Circuit

15 A ETC

15 A TCU

7.5 A CVT SSR

10 A E/G2

15 A IG COIL

20 A O2 HTR

20 A DI

15 A E/G1

25 A MAIN FAN

15 A DEICER

30 A VDC SOL

15 A F-END

30 A F.WIP

25 A R.DEF

30 A BACKUP

20 A HTR

25 A SUB FAN

15 A R.WIP

20 A BLOWER

10 A MB-A

Empty

Fuses and Circuits 541 12

Specifications

542 Bulb Chart

12-3. Bulb Chart

& Safety Precautions

s12ac s12ac03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

& Bulb Chart

s12ac04

Bulb Chart 543

Specifications

12 NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J and K are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement. CONTINUED

544 Bulb Chart
1) Front turn signal lights 2) Dome light 3) Vanity mirror lights 4) Door step lights (if equipped) 5) Cargo area light (Outback) 6) Rear side marker lights (Outback) 7) Backup lights 8) Rear turn signal lights 9) Trunk light (Legacy) A) Front position lights
Daytime running lights B) Map lights C) Low and high beam headlights D) Front fog lights (if equipped) E) Front side marker lights F) Side turn signal lights (if equipped) G) High-mounted stop light H) Tail lights (if equipped) I) License plate lights J) Tail and stop lights K) Rear side marker lights (Legacy)

Wattage 12 V-28 W 12 V-8 W 14 V-1.4 W 12 V-5 W 12 V-13 W 12 V-5 W 12 V-16 W 12 V-21 W 12 V-3.8 W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Bulb No. 7444NA -- HTU W5W SAE #912 W5W W16W WY21W SAE #194 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

12-4. Vehicle Identification
s12ad

Vehicle Identification 545
1) Emission control label 2) Certification and bar code label 3) Tire inflation pressure label (tire placard) 4) Vehicle identification number plate 5) Model number label 6) Fuel label 7) Air conditioner label
12

Specifications

546 Function Settings

12-5. Function Settings s12ag
& Function Settings and Adjustments on the Center Information Display
Setting adjustments can be manuallys12cagh01anged within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to "Center Information Display (CID)" FP209.

& Individual Settings and Adjustments Excluding Center Information Display
For setting adjustments to the followins1g2agi0te2 ms, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item

Function

Available settings

Factory default setting

Alarm system

Operation/Non-operation

Operation

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal

Operation/Non-operation

Operation

Page 144 135

& Function Settings and Adjustments Performed by a Dealer s12ag03

Item

Function

Available settings

Alarm system
Keyless access with push-button Remote keyless entry system Remote trunk open/power rear gate open function*1 Key lock-in prevention Battery drainage prevention function

Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors) Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light (Outback) illumination Audible signal volume*2 Trunk open without key (Legacy) Audible signal volume*2 Operation of trunk opening/power rear gate opening by remote transmitter/access key fob Key lock-in prevention Battery drainage prevention function

0 seconds/30 seconds
ON/OFF Level 1 to 7 ON/OFF Level 1 to 7 Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing and holding Operation/Non-operation Operation/Non-operation

Factory default setting
30 seconds
OFF Level 5 ON Level 5
Pressing and holding
Operation Operation

Item Auto dimmer cancel High beam assist function*1

Function
Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel High beam assist function

Available settings OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Operation/Non-operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper*1

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation

Operation/Non-operation

*1: If equipped *2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

Function Settings 547
Factory default setting
Mid Operation U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation Other models: Operation

Specifications

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 550 13-2. Tire Information ...................s.1.3....................... 550
Tire Labeling ...................................................... 550 Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure................. 552 Glossary of Tire Terminology .............................. 553 Tire Care Maintenance and Safety Practices ..... 557 Vehicle Load Limit How to Determine ............... 558 Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle
Load Capacities................................................ 561 Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading
on Handling and Stopping and on Tires ............ 561

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit........... 562 13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards .....562
TREADWEAR ..................................................... 563 TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 563 TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 563
13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA) ...................564 13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in
Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada) .................564

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

550 For U.S.A.

13-1. For U.S.A.
s13aa
The following information has been compiled according to Code of Federal Regulations "Title 49, Part 575".

13-2. Tire Information
s13ab
& Tire Labeling Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire s13ab01 Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These marking can provide you with useful information on the tire.
! Tire size Your vehicle comes equippeds13wabi0t1h01 P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.
! P Metric s13ab010101
With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars (2) Section Width in millimeters (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height 7 section width). (4) R = Radial Construction (5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descriptions
s13ab010102
The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size designation. They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire's speed rating.

Tire Information 551

Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum inflation pressure. For example, "91" means 1,356 lbs (615 kg), "90" means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), "89" means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire's capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds. For example, "V" means 149 mph (240 km/h)

WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tire's rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIsN13a)b01i0s2 marked on the intended outboard sidewall. The TIN is composed of four groups. Here is a brief review of the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.
(1) DOT symbol* (2) Manufacturer's Identification Mark (3) Tire Size (4) Tire Type Code (5) Date of Manufacture The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001. *: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
13

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

CONTINUED

552 Tire Information

! Other markings The following makings are also s13ab0103 placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation pressure
s13ab010301
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, "350 kPa (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS"
! Maximum load rating s13ab010302
The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tire. For example, "MAX. LOAD 615 kg (1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI) MAX. PRESS."
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

! Construction type s13ab010303
Applicable construction of this tire. For example, "TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL"
! Construction s13ab010304
The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire. For example, "PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1 NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYESTER"
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
s13ab010305
For details, refer to "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards" FP562.
& Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure
s13ab02
! Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
For the recommended colds13atbi0r2e01 inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires, refer to "Tires" FP536.

! Vehicle placard

s13ab0202

The vehicle placard is affixed to the driver's side B-pillar.
Example:

Tire Information 553

The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.
! Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exs1c3aeb0s20-3 sively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation
Check and, if necessary, adjuss1t3atbh02e04 pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of Tire Terminology

. Accessory weight

s13ab03

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

CONTINUED

554 Tire Information

. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and higher inflation pressure than the corresponding standard tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall (1) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounting on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that is appended to the

Tire Information 555

end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pressure
The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer's des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

CONTINUED

556 Tire Information

. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall.
. Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136-93 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and that is marked with an Alpine Symbol " " on at least one sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and it may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

. Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity.
. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing.

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

Tire Information 557

Table 1 -- Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of
occupants

Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a number of occupants normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front.

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat.

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

& Tire Care Maintenance and Safety Practices
. Check on a daily basis thats1t3habe04 tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. . Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

13
CONTINUED

558 Tire Information

. To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). Rotating the tires involves switching the front and rear tires on the righthand side of the vehicle and similarly switching the front and rear tires on the left-hand side of the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on its original side of the vehicle.) Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tire at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened. For information about the tightening torque and tightening sequence for the wheel nuts, refer to "Flat Tires" FP452.
& Vehicle Load Limit How to Determine
The load capacity of your vehicsl1e3abi0s5 determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side B-pillar. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be calculated by the following method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit - (total weight of occupants + total weight of optional equipment + tongue load of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and weight limits, refer to "Trailer Towing (Outback)" FP438.

! Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations
Calculate the available load capa- s13ab0501 city as shown in the following examples: Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs".

For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250 kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.

Example 1B

Tire Information 559
2. Calculate the available load capacity.

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

2. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can be carried.

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.

3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37 kg), so the cargo weight must be reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more. Example 2A (Outback only)
CAUTION Legacy: Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.
13

CONTINUED

560 Tire Information

176 lbs (80 kg)). 1. Calculate the total weight.

Example 2B (Outback only) CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to be used for trailer towing. Therefore, never tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 363 kg or 800 lbs".
For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can be carried.

For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

Tire Information 561

child to use, the calculations are as follows: 1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load capacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10 kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining Compatibility of Tire and Vehicle Load Capacities
The sum of four tires' maxims1u3amb06 load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight ("GVWR"). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle's maximum loaded capacity ("GAWR"). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axle's maximum loaded capacity is referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each axle's GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label affixed to the driver's door.
The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehicle's suspension, axles and other parts of the body. Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire's maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse Safety Consequences of Overloading on Handling and Stopping and on Tires
Overloading could affect vehs1ic3albe07 handling, stopping distance, vehicle and tire as shown in the following. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury. . Vehicle stability will deteriorate. . Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could increase the risk of rollover. . Stopping distance will increase. . Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and 13
other parts of the body could break or experience accelerated wear that
CONTINUED

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

562 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

will shorten vehicle life. . Tires could fail. . Tread separation could occur. . Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
s13ab08
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

13-3. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
s13ac
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 563

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
& TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a compas13raac0-2 tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highess1t3atco03 lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
& TEMPERATURE A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the s13ac04 highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
13

Consumer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

564 Reporting Safety Defects (USA)

13-4. Reporting Safety Defects (USA)
s13ah
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar. gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar. gov.

13-5. How to Contact Transport Canada in Order to Report a Safety Concern Relating to the Vehicle (Canada)
s13cf

Index
s14
14

Index

568 Index
1 11.6-inch display models.......................................... P211
A Abbreviation .............................................................. P4 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P356
Warning light ..................................................... P185 Access key
Warning indicator............................................... P191 Access key fob ....................................................... P115 Accessories .......................................................... P518 Accessory power outlet .......................................... P308 Adjustable storage net............................................ P320 Air cleaner element ................................................ P496 Air conditioner
Automatic climate control.................................... P285 Manual climate control system ............................ P287 Air filtration system ................................................ P293 Airflow mode selection............................................ P287 Alarm system ........................................................ P141 All season tires...................................................... P502 All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P189 Alloy wheel ........................................................... P510 Cleaning ........................................................... P475 Antenna................................................................ P298 Printed antenna ................................................. P298 Roof antenna .................................................... P298 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P356 Arming the system ................................................. P142 Armrest .................................................................. P46 Ashtray.................................................................. P311

Assist grip ............................................................. P312 AT OIL TEMP warning light...................................... P184 Audio
Antenna ............................................................ P298 Set ................................................................... P298 Auto dimmer cancel function.................................... P176 Auto on/off headlights ............................................. P248 Sensor .............................................................. P250 Auto Start Stop system ........................................... P372 Indicator light ........................................... P199, P372 No Activity Detected indicator light ............. P199, P375 OFF indicator light.................................... P198, P375 Warning light ........................................... P198, P374 Auto Vehicle Hold ................................................... P368 ON indicator light ............................................... P188 Operation indicator light ...................................... P188 Auto Vehicle Hold function....................................... P368 Auto-dimming mirror/compass.................................. P263 Automatic climate control operation .......................... P285 Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. P255 Warning light ..................................................... P198 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P48
B Backup light........................................................... P522 Battery .................................................................. P516
Drainage prevention function ............................... P141 Jump starting..................................................... P457 Replacement (access key fob)................... P130, P526 Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ...... P345

Replacement (transmitter).......................... P136, P527 Vehicle battery................................................... P516 Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ..................................... P385 Booster seat............................................................ P68 Bottle holder.......................................................... P307 Brake Assist ............................................................... P356 Booster.................................................... P355, P501 Disc ................................................................. P537 Fluid........................................................ P500, P535 Pad .................................................................. P537 Parking............................................................. P366 Pedal ............................................................... P501 Brake system ........................................................ P355 Warning light ..................................................... P186 Braking................................................................. P355 Tips.................................................................. P355 BSD/RCTA............................................................ P384 Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P388 OFF indicator ........................................... P199, P389 Warning indicator...................................... P199, P390 Warning volume................................................. P388 Bulb Chart................................................................ P542 Replacement ..................................................... P518

C Camera
Front View Monitor.............................................
Rear view camera..............................................

P376 P379

Index 569

Cargo area

Cover ............................................................... P314

Light ....................................................... P303, P524

Tie-down hooks ................................................. P319

Catalytic converter.................................................. P419

Center console....................................................... P305

Center information display (CID) .............................. P209

11.6-inch display models ..................................... P211

Cleaning ........................................................... P478

Dual 7.0-inch display models ............................... P232

Changing

Coolant ............................................................. P495

Flat tire ............................................................. P452

Oil and oil filter .................................................. P493

Charge warning light............................................... P183

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light ................................................................... P182

Checking

Coolant level ..................................................... P495

Fluid level (brake fluid)........................................ P500

Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P510

Oil level (engine oil)............................................ P491

Child restraint systems .............................................. P58

Installation of a booster seat................................. P68

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P63

Lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .................. P69

Index

Top tether anchorages ......................................... P74

Child safety .............................................................. P5

Locks................................................................ P145

Chime

Key reminder ..................................................... P169

570 Index
Light................................................................. P248 Seatbelt ..................................................... P48, P177 Cleaning Alloy wheels...................................................... P475 Center information display .................................. P478 Interior.............................................................. P477 Ventilation grille ................................................. P292 Climate control system ........................................... P279 Automatic ......................................................... P285 Manual ............................................................. P287 Clock.................................................................... P245 Coat hook ............................................................. P312 Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P201 Compass .............................................................. P263 Console Center .............................................................. P305 Overhead.......................................................... P305 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................. P347 Fluid........................................................ P499, P535 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P184 Control switch light................................................. P248 Convenient tie-down hooks ..................................... P319 Coolant........................................................ P495, P535 Cooling system...................................................... P494 Corrosion protection ............................................... P476 Crossbars ............................................................. P432 Cup holder ............................................................ P306 Front passenger's .............................................. P306 Rear passenger's .............................................. P307

D Daytime running light (DRL) system.......................... P254 Defogger ............................................................... P261 Defrosting.............................................................. P291 Deicer ................................................................... P261 Differential gear oil
Front ...................................................... P499, P534 Rear ....................................................... P499, P534 Dimensions............................................................ P530 Disarming the alarm system .................................... P143 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................... P356 Dome light ................................................... P302, P523 Door Locks................................................................ P137 Open indicator ................................................... P189 Step light........................................................... P524 Unlock selection function..................................... P124 Double trip meter.................................................... P174 Drive belts ............................................................. P499 Driver Focus .......................................................... P404 Driver Monitoring System ........................................ P404 OFF indicator light.............................................. P200 Operation indicator light ...................................... P200 Temporary stop indicator light .............................. P200 Warning light ..................................................... P200 Driving All-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P421 Drinking ............................................................... P7 Drugs .................................................................. P7 Foreign countries ............................................... P420 Off road ............................................................ P422

Pets ..................................................................... P8 Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P426 Tips......................................................... P352, P421 Tired or sleepy ...................................................... P8 Winter .............................................................. P424 Dual 7.0-inch display models................................... P232
E Electrical system.................................................... P536 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system...... P357
Warning ............................................................ P187 Electronic parking brake ......................................... P366
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P368 Indicator light..................................................... P187 Switch .............................................................. P366 Warning ................................................... P187, P371 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .......................... P47 Engine.................................................................. P531 Compartment overview....................................... P489 Coolant.................................................... P495, P535 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................... P6, P418 Hood ................................................................ P487 Hood open warning light ..................................... P189 Hood release knob............................................. P487 Low oil level warning indicator............................. P183 Oil........................................................... P491, P532 Overheating ...................................................... P460 Starting & stopping ................................... P334, P336 Event data recorder ................................................. P10 Exterior care ......................................................... P474

Index 571
F Flat tires ................................................................ P452 Floor mat............................................................... P314 Fluid level
Brake................................................................ P500 Continuously variable transmission....................... P499 Fog light ................................................................ P256 Indicator light ..................................................... P198 Switch............................................................... P256 Front Differential gear oil ................................... P499, P534 Fog light............................................................ P256 Fog light indicator light........................................ P198 Fog light switch.................................................. P256 Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ P181 Passenger's seatbelt warning light ....................... P177 Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... P55 Turn signal light ................................................. P519 View Monitor ..................................................... P376 View monitor switch............................................ P377 Front seats .............................................................. P28 Forward and backward adjustment........................ P31 Head restraint adjustment .................................... P37 Manual seat ....................................................... P31 Memory function ................................................. P33 Power seat ......................................................... P32 Reclining ............................................................ P31 Seat heater ............................................... P39, P290
Seat height adjustment (driver's seat) .................... P31 14
Seat ventilation .......................................... P40, P290

Index

572 Index

Fuel ............................................................ P326, P531 Consumption indicator ........................................ P205 Economy hints................................................... P418 Filler lid and cap ................................................ P328 Gauge .............................................................. P174 Requirements........................................... P326, P531 Tank capacity .................................................... P531
Fuses ................................................................... P517 Fuses and circuits.................................................. P538

G GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... Glove box ............................................................. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)......................

P430 P305 P430

H Hands-free Power Rear Gate function ...................... P159 Hazard warning flasher.................................. P172, P448 Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ........................................................... P37 Rear seat............................................................ P44 Headlight .............................................................. P248 Beam leveler ..................................................... P255 Control switch ................................................... P248 Flasher ............................................................. P250 Indicator light..................................................... P198 Welcome lighting function ................................... P249 Heated Steering Wheel system ............................... P275 High Beam Assist Function ........................................................... P251 Indicator ........................................................... P197

High beam indicator light ......................................... High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. Hill descent control .................................................
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink® ............................................................. Hook
Coat ................................................................. Convenient tie-down ........................................... Shopping bag .................................................... Towing and tie-down........................................... Horn ..................................................................... Hose and connections.............................................

P197 P250 P362 P199 P263
P312 P319 P313 P461 P276 P494

I Icy road surface warning indicator ............................ P200 Ignition switch ........................................................ P168
Light ................................................................. P169 Illumination brightness control .................................. P175 Immobilizer ............................................................ P131 Indicator light
Auto Start Stop .................................................. P199 Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected .................... P199 Auto Start Stop OFF........................................... P198 Auto Vehicle Hold ON......................................... P188 Auto Vehicle Hold operation ................................ P188 BSD/RCTA OFF....................................... P199, P389 Door open ......................................................... P189 Driver Monitoring System OFF............................. P200 Driver Monitoring System operation...................... P200 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop.............. P200 Electronic parking brake...................................... P187

Front fog light .................................................... P198 Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF....... P181 Headlight .......................................................... P198 High beam ........................................................ P197 High beam assist ...................................... P197, P251 Hill descent control ............................................ P199 Immobilizer ....................................................... P196 Intelligent (I) mode .................................... P197, P353 Malfunction ....................................................... P182 RAB OFF.......................................................... P200 Security ................................................... P132, P196 Select lever/Gear position ................................... P197 SI-DRIVE.......................................................... P197 Sonar audible alarm OFF ................................... P201 Sport Sharp (S#) mode ............................. P197, P353 Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .................... P198 Turn signal........................................................ P197 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P191 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ..................... P190 X-MODE ........................................................... P199 Inside mirror.......................................................... P263 Interior lights ......................................................... P302 Internal trunk lid release handle............................... P149

J Jack and jack handle .............................................
Jack-up point.........................................................
Jump starting ........................................................

P449 P452 P457

K Key ....................................................................... P115

Index 573
Number plate..................................................... P115 Positions ........................................................... P168 Reminder chime................................................. P169 Replacement ..................................................... P132 Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P115 Disabling keyless access functions....................... P127 Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P120 Warning chimes and warning indicator........ P130, P191 When access key fob does not operate
properly .............................. P130, P172, P338, P465 Keyless entry system .............................................. P133
L Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...................................... P385 Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P56 Leather seat materials............................................. P477 LED headlight warning light ........................... P198, P519 LED headlights....................................................... P519 Lifting Cargo Cover................................................. P314 Light
Backup ............................................................. P522 Cargo area .............................................. P303, P524 Control switch .................................................... P248 Daytime running................................................. P254 Dome ..................................................... P302, P523 Door step .......................................................... P524 Front fog ........................................................... P256 Front side marker............................................... P248 Ignition switch .................................................... P169
Map........................................................ P302, P524 14
Rear combination ............................................... P519

Index

574 Index
Rear side marker light ........................................ P521 Rear turn signal ........................................ P256, P519 Side turn signal ................................................. P543 Trunk................................................................ P524 Turn signal............................................... P256, P519 Vanity mirror...................................................... P304 Loading your vehicle .............................................. P428 Low fuel warning light............................................. P189 Low tire pressure warning light ................................ P184 Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) ......... P69 Lower and top tether anchorage ................................ P69
M Maintenance
Precautions....................................................... P483 Schedule .......................................................... P483 Seatbelt .............................................................. P54 Tips.................................................................. P485 Tools ................................................................ P449 Malfunction indicator light (CHECK ENGINE warning light)...................................................... P182 Manual Climate control .................................................. P287 Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............ P351 Rear gate ......................................................... P151 Seat ................................................................... P31 Map light ..................................................... P302, P524 Maximum load limits............................................... P439 Meters and gauges ................................................ P173 Mirror defogger...................................................... P261 Mirrors.................................................................. P263

Moonroof............................................................... P161 Switch............................................................... P161

N New vehicle break-in driving .................................... P418

O Odometer .............................................................. P173 Off road driving ...................................................... P422 Oil filter ................................................................. P493 Oil level
Engine .............................................................. P491 Front differential gear ......................................... P499 Rear differential gear .......................................... P499 Warning light ..................................................... P183 Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P183 On-road and off-road driving ....................................... P9 One-touch lane changer .......................................... P257 Outside Mirror defogger .................................................. P261 Mirrors .............................................................. P271 Overhead console .................................................. P305 Overheating engine ................................................ P460

P Parking .................................................................
Brake................................................................ Tips .................................................................. Passenger seatbelt reminder ................................... Periodic inspections ................................................ Petrol fuel..............................................................

P365 P366 P371 P177 P420 P326

PIN code Access ................................................... P124 Power
Folding mirror switch .......................................... P273 Outlets ............................................................. P308 Outside mirrors......................................... P271, P273 Rear gate ......................................................... P152 Seat ................................................................... P32 Steering............................................................ P354 Steering warning light......................................... P189 Window switches ............................................... P146 Windows........................................................... P145 Precautions against vehicle modification............ P57, P109 Preparing to drive .................................................. P333 Printed antenna ..................................................... P298 Push-button Ignition switch ................................................... P170 Starting and stopping engine............................... P336
R Rear
Combination lights ............................................. P519 Differential gear oil .................................... P499, P534 Turn signal light ................................................. P519 View camera ..................................................... P379 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)............................... P385 Rear gate .................................................... P151, P467 Manual ............................................................. P151 Power............................................................... P152 Rear Seat Reminder ................................................ P58 Rear seatbelt warning light...................................... P179 Rear seats .............................................................. P40

Index 575
Armrest.............................................................. P46 Folding down ...................................................... P42 Head restraint adjustment .................................... P44 Heater ............................................................... P39 Reclining ............................................................ P41 Rear view camera .................................................. P379 Rear window Defogger ........................................................... P261 Wiper and washer switch .................................... P260 Wiper blade rubber............................................. P514 Wiper blades ..................................................... P514 Recommended Brake fluid......................................................... P535 Continuously variable transmission fluid................ P535 Engine oil.......................................................... P532 Front differential gear oil ........................... P499, P534 Rear differential gear oil............................ P499, P534 Spark plugs ....................................................... P536 Refueling............................................................... P328 Remote control mirror switch ................................... P271 Remote engine start system .................................... P339 Remote keyless entry system .................................. P133 Replacing battery ..................................... P136, P525 Replacement Access key fob battery.............................. P130, P526 Air cleaner element ............................................ P496 Brake pad ......................................................... P501 Cabin air filter .................................................... P293 Key .................................................................. P132
Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P345 14
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .... P136, P527

Index

576 Index
Tire .................................................................. P509 Wheel............................................................... P510 Wiper blade rubber ............................................. P511 Wiper blades ...................................................... P511 Replacing bulbs ..................................................... P518 Backup light ...................................................... P522 Cargo area light................................................. P524 Dome light ........................................................ P523 Door step light................................................... P524 Front turn signal light ......................................... P519 Headlight .......................................................... P519 LED headlight ................................................... P519 Map light .......................................................... P524 Rear combination light........................................ P519 Rear side marker light ........................................ P521 Rear turn signal light .......................................... P519 Trunk light......................................................... P524 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) System................ P393 OFF indicator .................................................... P200 ON/OFF setting ................................................. P402 Warning indicator...................................... P200, P403 Rocking the vehicle................................................ P428 Roof Antenna............................................................ P298 Molding and crossbar ......................................... P430 Rails with integrated crossbars ............................ P432
S Safety
Precautions when driving........................................ P5 Symbol ................................................................. P4

Warnings.............................................................. P3 Seat
Fabric ............................................................... P477 Front ................................................................. P28 Heater ............................................................... P38 Height adjustment ............................................... P31 Manual .............................................................. P31 Memory function ................................................. P33 Power ................................................................ P32 Rear .................................................................. P40 Ventilation .......................................................... P40 Seatbelt............................................................. P5, P46 Fastening ........................................................... P48 Maintenance....................................................... P54 Pretensioners ..................................................... P55 Safety tips .......................................................... P46 Warning light and chime.............................. P48, P177 Security Alarm system..................................................... P141 Immobilizer........................................................ P131 Indicator light ........................................... P132, P196 Select lever ........................................................... P348 Position indicator................................................ P197 Shift lock function............................................... P349 Shift paddle ........................................................... P351 Shopping bag hook................................................. P313 Shoulder pretensioners ............................................. P55 SI-DRIVE .............................................................. P353 Indicator light ..................................................... P197 Intelligent (I) mode indicator ...................... P197, P353 Mode ................................................................ P353

Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator ................ P197, P353 Switches ........................................................... P353 Snow tires.................................................... P427, P502 Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P426 Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator .......................... P201 Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P136 Spark plugs.................................................. P498, P536 Specifications ........................................................ P530 Speedometer......................................................... P173 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)........................................................... P5, P77 System monitors................................................ P107 System servicing ............................................... P108 System warning light .......................... P86, P107, P181 Starting & stopping engine ............................. P334, P336 State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................ P332 Steering lock ................................................ P336, P338 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ...................... P254 OFF indicator light .................................... P198, P254 OFF switch ....................................................... P254 Warning light ..................................................... P198 Steering wheel Heater .............................................................. P275 Lock ........................................................ P336, P338 Power............................................................... P354 Tilt/telescopic .................................................... P274 Storage compartment ............................................. P304 Summer tires......................................................... P502 Sun visors............................................................. P303 Sunshade ............................................................. P162 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............. P77

Index 577
Curtain airbag .................................................... P100 Frontal airbag ..................................................... P86 Knee airbag........................................................ P86 Side airbag........................................................ P100 Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P478
T Tachometer............................................................ P173 Temperature gauge................................................. P175 Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P184 Temporary spare tire............................................... P448 Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P69, P74 Tie-down hooks...................................................... P461 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ................................... P274 Tire ............................................................. P502, P536
All season ......................................................... P502 Chains .............................................................. P428 Information ........................................................ P550 Inspection ......................................................... P504 Pressures and wear ........................................... P504 Replacement ..................................................... P509 Rotation ............................................................ P508 Size and pressure .............................................. P536 Summer ............................................................ P502 Types ............................................................... P502 Winter (snow) .................................................... P502 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .................................. P184, P363, P456, P502
Screen .............................................................. P365 14
Warning light ..................................................... P184

Index

578 Index
Tires and wheels ................................................... P502 Tools .................................................................... P449 Top tether anchorages....................................... P69, P74 Towing.................................................................. P461
All wheels on the ground .................................... P464 Flat-bed truck .................................................... P464 Hooks............................................................... P461 Tie-down hooks ................................................. P461 Weight.............................................................. P439 Trailer Connecting ....................................................... P436 Hitch (Outback) ........................................ P436, P442 Towing (Legacy) ................................................ P438 Towing (Outback)............................................... P438 Towing tips........................................................ P444 Trip meter ............................................................. P174 Trunk lid ............................................................... P148 Opener button ................................................... P149 Release handle ................................................. P149 Trunk light............................................................. P524 Turn signal Indicator lights ................................................... P197 Lever................................................................ P256
U Under-floor storage compartment............................. P320 USB power supply ................................................. P310
V Valet mode............................................................ P144 Vanity mirror.......................................................... P304

Light ................................................................. P304 Vehicle
Capacity weight ................................................. P429 Identification ...................................................... P545 Symbols............................................................... P5 Vehicle Dynamics Control system............................. P358 OFF indicator light.............................................. P191 Operation indicator light ...................................... P190 Warning light ..................................................... P190 Ventilator ............................................................... P278
W Warning and indicator lights..................................... P177 Warning chimes
Driver Monitoring System .................................... P411 Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P191 Seatbelt .................................................... P48, P177 Warning indicator Access key.............................................. P130, P191 BSD/RCTA ........................................................ P199 Engine low oil level ............................................ P183 Icy road surface ................................................. P200 Keyless access with push-button start
system .................................................. P130, P191 RAB ....................................................... P200, P403 Warning light ABS.................................................................. P185 All-Wheel Drive .................................................. P189 AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P184 Auto Start Stop .................................................. P198 Automatic headlight beam leveler......................... P198

Brake system .................................................... P186 Charge ............................................................. P183 CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P182 Driver Monitoring System.................................... P200 Engine hood open ............................................. P189 Front passenger's seatbelt.................................. P177 LED headlight ................................................... P198 Low fuel............................................................ P189 Low tire pressure ............................................... P184 Oil pressure ...................................................... P183 Power steering .................................................. P189 Rear seatbelt..................................................... P179 Seatbelt ............................................................ P177 SRS airbag system ............................................ P181 Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P198 Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................... P190 Windshield washer fluid ...................................... P189 Warranties ................................................................ P2 Warranties and maintenance................................... P439 Washing ............................................................... P474 Waxing and polishing ............................................. P475 Wear indicators ..................................................... P507 Welcome lighting function ....................................... P249 Wheel Alloy................................................................. P510 Balance ............................................................ P506 Nut tightening torque.......................................... P536 Replacement ..................................................... P510 Windows............................................................... P145 Windshield Washer fluid ...................................................... P510

Index 579
Washer fluid warning light ................................... P189 Wiper and washer switches ................................. P258 Wiper blades ..................................................... P512 Wiper deicer ...................................................... P261 Winter Driving .............................................................. P424 Tires ....................................................... P427, P502 Wiper and washer .................................................. P257 Wiper deicer .......................................................... P261 X X-MODE................................................................ P360 Indicator............................................................ P199
14

Index

GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel

S99AA
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to "Engine Oil"

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKS9I9(A9A001

FP532.

RON) or higher.

& Engine Oil Capacity

& Fuel Octane Rating

2.5 L models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

S99AA05

! RON

S99AA02

2.4 L models: 4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number. S99AA0201 ! AKI This octane rating is the average of the Research OctanS9e9AaA0n20d2

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

and service, refer to "Engine Oil" FP491.

Knock Index (AKI).
& Limit of Ethanol Content
2.5 L models: no more than 10%

S99AA09

& Cold Tire Pressure
Refer to "Tires" FP536.

S99AA06

2.4 L models: no more than 15%

& Fuel Tank Capacity
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)

S99AA03

& Engine Oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For fuSr9t9hAAe0r4 details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described as follows. . API classification SN with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING" or SN PLUS with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING" . or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

References

Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 11.0.2924/W Unicode-x64 PDFlib PDI 8.0.2p1 (C /Win64)